Home

R&S®AFQ100A User Manual

1. lt gt PRBS at Generator PRBS at DUT Output BEER 50 Bi BER active n lt gt These bits are ingored Fig 4 7 Example of functionality of Pattern Ignore 50 bits were set to 0 by the DUT These 50 bits plus the preceding 0 are ignored in the bit error rate measurement 1401 3084 32 4 69 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Dialog Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block The Bit Error Rate dialog for configuring the bit error rate measurement is called either in the BERT function block of the main window or by selecting BERT in the Edit menu The Bit Error Rate dialog is divided into the following sections amp Bit Error Rate State Bit Error Rate 0 000 000 000 ENG y 0 Data Bits Errors 0 Terminated By e State NO CLOCK NO DATA NO SYNC Configuration Mode Auto y Execute Single Max Data Bits 10000000 Pos Y Off off Y Max Errors PRBS Data Polarity Clock Slope External Restart Data Enable Pattern Ignore Threshold Impedance 1401 3084 32 4 70 The top section indicates if the bit error rate measurement is active and displays the results and current status of the measurement The Configuration section is used to select the type of measurement the data source and the termination criteria If the data is not cyclically continued the measurement can be selectively interrupted and restar
2. 1 14 JO connectors sse 1 14 LAN TOS iii at tds 1 12 EX 1OSCl iuris 1 12 ON OFF switch 1 11 1401 3084 32 10 10 Index Front PAN A 1 9 PORT 1 connechor 1 13 PORT 2 connechor 1 13 Power switch sss 1 11 READY LED 1 10 REMOTE LED ege gei dete 1 10 RUNNING LED 1 12 Status RE 1 10 TRIGGER key 1 12 TRIGGER LED 1 12 USB interface type A 1 12 RUSOS Lett eate ie forro 1 26 G Generate Signal HD Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 169 6 15 Sine Test Signal ARB 4 166 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 171 6 11 Test Signal AND 4 1736 17 Test Pattern AND 6 9 Generate Signal RAM Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 169 6 13 Sine Test Signal ARB 4 166 6 15 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 172 6 10 Test Signal ARD 4 173 Test Pattern AND 6 9 GET Group Execute Trigger 5 26 GPIB e a te etel 4 265 Graphical display ooooononiocinnnninnicncccnccncnnnnas 3 97 H Hardware CONTIG iro iee dida E ieee 4 253 6 90 Error 240 cene 9 5 Missing 241 9 5 ODIIOnS usto bti te e e 4 254 6 3 Header uet era dtr 5 16 Header suffix out of range 114 9 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A l FGA EE 4 206 eher 1 14 IEC IEEE bus Into CO siii A i 1 15 Address iii 4 265 6 109 Illegal parameter value 224 9 5 Impairments digital suus 6 58 Impedance BERT
3. 9 9 Protect iet e edes dis 4 266 Pulse Divider AND 4 194 Pulse Divider Marker 4 193 6 48 Pulse Frequency Divider ARB 4 194 Pulse Frequency Marker 4 193 6 48 Q GUSTY iiit io 5 15 Responses i e ri 5 20 Deadlocked 430 ssssssssss 9 9 Interrupted CAT 9 9 Unterminated 420 sssssuss 9 9 QUESO citi te He dat te so 5 24 Queue overflow 350 usus 9 9 Quotation marks sse 5 24 R Rack installation sss 1 23 READY LED iiis 1 10 SII 1 15 AC power connector cooooooccccccccccccincanncnnnnno 1 16 AG SUDDIV iit tea net ess 1 16 BERT inputs ees Ae 1 17 1401 3084 32 10 14 Index Rear Dame 1 15 CLOCK input iie inrnanihins inini riet 1 18 1 20 CLOCK oufpnut nipan 1 20 DATA ENABL Jup 1 18 RRE 1 18 Ethernet interface oooonioinnnnnicicnnnnicccnnncannnos 1 15 FUSO DOR ae EAS 1 16 IEC IEEE bus miertace 1 15 LAN METCO eoo 1 15 MARKER outputs sssssssssess 1 19 MONITOR ANALOG connector 1 18 NEXT Input e P 1 20 Power switchen 1 16 REF IN input men 1 20 REF OUT output suse 1 20 RESTART inputs ie 1 18 TRIG input se ead 1 20 USB 1 1 interface type A 1 19 USB 2 0 interface type A 1 19 USB 2 0 interface type B 1 19 Recall File NAM sesasine iae 4 273 Instrument settings 4 273
4. Via IEC IEEE bus status viGpibControlREN vi Set instrument to manual operation VI GPIB REN ADDRESS GTL Remote Control via USB Interface The PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface An USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed VISA will detect and configure the generator automatically when the USB connection is established No entry of an address string and no separate driver installation is necessary The used USB address string is USB lt vendor Id gt lt product Id serial number gt INSTR Example USB 0xOAAD 0x0031 100001 INSTR where the first block OxOAAD is the vendor Id for Rohde amp Schwarz the second block 0x0031 is the product Id for the R amp S AFQ100A and the third block is the individual serial number on the rear panel of the instrument 1401 3084 32 5 13 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Interface and Device Messages Interface and Device Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus see section Bus Lines on page 5 33 or via a TCP IP network can be divided into two groups the Interface messages and the Device messages Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the
5. 4 170 6 12 On Off Ratio Marker ARB 4 193 6 47 On Off switch sse 1 11 Operation bourse 6 91 Option expiration date 4 256 listilig eoe 4 254 6 3 Out of memory 225 sss 9 8 Output Analog IQ output sssaseeeennneneeanna 1 14 4 224 CLOCK teuer 1 20 leie 1 20 Digital output eee 1 13 MARKER 1 4 1 19 Output digital Amplitude eseess 4 229 6 75 Clock Slope sess 4 231 6 75 Overlapping execution sssssss 5 26 P Parallel Pol 5 32 Parameter Commande eene 5 20 not allowed 108 sess 9 8 Part numbers A 4 253 PISO ptam a 4 281 Pattern Test Pattern ARB 4 173 Pattern Ignore BERT 4 247 6 83 Pattern Q Test Pattern ARB 4 173 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Periods Table Sine Test Signal 4 171 6 9 6 10 6 13 Phase Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 171 Phase Offset Table Sine Test Signal ARB 6 13 Phase Offset Q Sine Test Signal ARB 4 166 6 17 Point to point connection 1 37 1 43 POWer TUS OS viii 1 26 Power On Counter sss 6 91 PPE Parallel poll enable register 5 30 PRBS A inal lat 4 243 6 85 Pres o tats O 1 31 Instrument settings 4 249 6 4 6 113 Factory seiinmge 6 112 Program mnemonic too long 112
6. ie di dd 6 90 DIAGnostic ECON trol E eii bti RM 6 91 DIAGnostic INFO OTIMG a iie UAE EH HER RE aA 6 91 DIAGnostic iINFO POCo rller d nii A b ie ees 6 91 DIAGnostic POINt CA Talog eene ARE ENEN SALER EARE neret nea rsen EE annee annees 6 92 1401 3084 32 10 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands M Ee CA TAJO E 6 95 MMEMory CA Talog LENG A EE 6 96 MMEMory CDIRectory iot dt etui ek er nea Pan EES oia a nean 6 96 MMEMorny COPY ica iR eH ODE 6 96 MMEMON DATA thm Ene BEN ERIS 6 97 MMEMory DCATalog i fin dno Ro emp diete 6 97 MMEMon DCAtalool ENG 6 99 MMEMory DELet eege eege d ae A dea 6 99 MMEMory LOAD STAT RE 6 99 MMEM ory MDIRGCIONY Lines be sd dd det aa E erg 6 100 MMEMOrny MOVE i REM RR t te Hee ee e Hb a eie 6 100 MMEMory MSIS 30000023 e e LR ete ede ee EE 6 100 MMEMory RDIRectOIy iii una b EO BP E BED E tah 6 102 MMEMorny STORG STATe iH AI A RU REA vid RE test 6 102 S Kee Le ele E 6 50 L OUb ce KCL OCkKlNPutCEREOuenck ono ncnnnn nn rn naar E E AE B nnne nna 6 50 SOURce CLOCK INPUESLOPE riino eed iet a AR A RM o ER 6 50 ISQURcGG I GEOGCK SOURUGC6 n aieo tei e RM HERES 6 51 Lee Bee ee EE 6 7 SQURce EQUalizer IQ CATalog otero iiie di arte evt e e d e d ie d e da eroe i a gau 6 60 L OUb ceIEOLaltzerjO C faoog ENG 6 59 SOURce elle NEE 6 60 SOURce EQUalizer IQ I FREQuenoy sss eene ether nane hans enhn etras ha seen nsns 6 60
7. Type balanced only Switches On or Off the bias amplifier Remote control commands SOUR OUTP ANAL BAL BIAS STAT ON Type balanced only Sets the bias A DC voltage is superimposed upon the symmetric and Q signal Value range 2 5 V 2 5 V Remote control commands SOUR OUTP ANAL BAL BIAS 0 5 4 60 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block Digital Output The parameters offered in the Digital Output dialog depend on the selected output ports In the upper section the output is switched on or off and the active output analog or digital is selected see section State The port of the digital interface is set in the Interface section amp Output State Ce State Active Output Digital Out D Active Output Digital Out Interface Interface Port 1 R amp S Standard 2 Parallel LVDS Signal Output Pin Assignment Resolution 16 Bits y 1 0 LSB maps to Signal gt Amplitude o 800 Fs I 1 maps to Signal gt Offset ooofFs j Q 0 LSB maps to Signal gt Q Offset ooofFs j Q 1 maps to Signal gt Clock Interface clock memory clock Clock Signal Resolution 16Bis gt Amplitude o 800 Fs Offset 0 000 FS Q Offset o 000 FS 1401 3084 32 4 61 E 3 R amp S AFQ100B Output Block Selects one of the two available digital interfaces see chapter 1 section Legend for Front Panel View and chapter 8 section Specification of Dig
8. 4 265 USB universal serial bus interface 1 19 USB interface USB 1 1 tyDe A ote ds 1 19 USB 2 0 ly PSA ici to 1 19 USB 2 0 type D 1 19 User data Complex modulation and control data 3 111 4 278 Select li eae 4 278 Waveioms nssssossennnnnnneeeeenernnnnenneenrnn nnen 4 278 User data icq EOI SAE SEA er 3 111 E eiecti eai 3 111 V Virus protection software 1 32 1 35 1 36 1 60 Visa Resource String ss 4 265 Visa Resource String USB 6 109 VNC connechon 1 51 Voltage Test point 4 262 4 263 W Elte E 3 89 9 1 Waveform File 4 164 6 20 6 21 White space 5 24 WIER eegene 3 94 Window XP rN E dled iets edhe 1 32 L EE 1 42 Windows button ooooooococcccccnnccccncnnnanoncnncnnnnns 3 97 E 3
9. Enter key or one of the unit key Some settings require additional confirmation This is the case when it is useful to first enter a few values and to confirm them together All settings of instrument functions that can be switched on and off are calculated and effective only after this function has been switched on Function Accepts value immediately Confirms entries Confirms entries in the dialogs with the Accept button Sets the entries in the instrument PC keyboard Vary the value with the up down cursor keys Press the Enter key or one of the key combinations Alt F9O F10 F11 Select Accept button with the cursor keys and press Enter If the instrument function is active the new value is immediately calculated and set If the instrument function is not active the new confirmed value is calculated and set only when the function is switched on Mouse Exit entry field Click on Accept button see keyboard Restoring the Previous Value Setting Parameters Parameter variations with the cursor keys are immediately set and therefore not reversible Normally values cannot be restored also in the case of mouse control because no explicit confirmation is required in this case and entries are automatically confirmed when the entry or selection field is exited 1401 3078 62 3 19 RES AFQ100A
10. SOURce TSIGnal TSINe OFFSet 1 1FS The command sets a DC component to the test signal Example TSIG TSIN OFFS 0 1 sets an offset of 0 1 FS Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 10 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 PERiods 1 50 The command sets the number of periods for the sine waves The values are set separately for each component of the test signal Example TSIG TSIN1 PER 4 TSIG TSIN2 PER 6 sets the number of periods of sine wave 1 to 4 and the number of periods of the second sinewave to 6 Device specific SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 PHASe 360 360 degree Sets the phase shifts of the sine waves The values are set separately for each sine wave of the test signal Example TSIG1 TSIN1 PHAS 360 TSIG2 TSIN2 PHAS 360 sets the phase offset of the channel to 360 degree and the phase offset of the Q channel to 360 degree Device specific SOURce TSIGnal RECT AMPLitude 0 1 FS The command sets the digital amplitude of the rectangular wave The abbreviation FS means full scale Example TSIG RECT AMPL 0 5 sets the amplitude to 0 5 FS Device specific SOURce TSIGnal RECT CREate The command generates a waveform which is output directly This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG RECT CRE a signal is generated and output directly Device specific
11. Segment Address FHOP Parallel Clock 0 Data 0 Restart 0 Data En 0 Next Seg 0 Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR MAN SOUR TRIG SEGM EXEC Sets a delay on the externally fed in trigger signal This enables the instrument to be synchronized with the device under test or other external devices Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR EXT SOUR TRIG SEGM DEL 1 Sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event subsequent to triggering Arestart ccan only be inhibited with an external trigger source In Retrigger mode every trigger signal causes a restart of signal output The restart is inhibited for the specified number of samples Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR EXT SOUR TRIG SEGM INH 0 5 4 25 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Slope Segment Trigger Baseband Block Selects the slope of the active edge of the external trigger signal The slope can only be set for an external trigger signal that is fed in via the NEXT connector on the rear panel Positive The rising edge is selected Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SEGM SLOP POS Negative The falling edge is selected Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SEGM SLOP NEG The Control Line Setup section is where the threshold and impedance of the trigger inputs CLOCK IN TRIG NEXT are selected Threshold Trigger Impedance Trigger Sets the high low
12. Number of I Q pairs 4 2 bytes per and per Q value Qx represents binary data 16 bit signed integer in 2 s complement notation containing the and Q component alternately and starting with the component Each component consists of two bytes least significant byte LSB first The values of the two bytes in an component and a Q component are in the range 32767 to 32767 This value is transferred to the D A converter At 50 O between the inner and outer conductors of the and Q outputs an amplitude V of 0 5 Volt arises on the I Q output connectors of the Instrument When a PEP offset is defined PEP OFFSET tag the amplitude is correspondingly reduced VI A 0 57 Vo 0 54 The illustration also applies to the Q output Example WAVEFORM 401 1 0 1 0 1 Q 1 Q 100 1 0 pairs with 4 bytes each are transmitted are transmitted IEC bus query The data is transmitted using GPIB command WAVE DATA We will use the example of a sine function in the channel and a cosine function in the Q channel each with 20 points to explain how a waveform file SICO WV is generated The sine and cosine values are calculated by a short program written in the programming language C see the following example for creating a C program They are stored in the file SICO TXT as follows Contents of SICO TXT Sine I Cosine Q 000000 1 000000 309017 0 951057 587785 0 809017 809017 0 587785 951057
13. 6 Press the Next button An alias name for the instrument can be entered in the next window This name must not be mistaken for the computer name It is only used for instrument identification within the program and displayed in the menu as an option in case of an Ethernet link 1401 3084 32 5 10 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control ICreate New Measurement amp 7 Pressthe Next button and then the Finish button The instrument is now registered in the program and can be addressed via the resource or alias name Measurement amp Automation Explorer MAX is ready to create your device Click Finish to create your device Click Back to review device information in the previous pages Click Cancel to leave this wizard without creating your device Finish Cancel y 1401 3084 32 5 11 E 3 RES AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Starting the Measurement amp Automation program for remote control of the R amp S AFQ 1 Start the program on the controller 2 Inthe Configuration window open Instruments and Interfaces and select R amp S AFQ Alias under VISA Ethernet Devices 3 Open the menu by clicking on Open VISA Session with the right mouse key DE MAX SM File Edit View Tools Help Properties Hopen VISA session m E DN Devices and Interfaces md CIBO POCA VISA Resource Name TCPIP 89 1 2 118 INSTR VISA resource identifier for this device m Ports Ser
14. Adjust For best performance of Programs O Background services Memory usage By default the computer is set to use a greater share of memory Eo run your programs Adjust For best performance of S Programs O System cache Virtual memory A paging Fie is an area on the hard disk that Windows uses as if t were RAM Total paging file size For all drives OMB 1401 3078 62 General Computer Name Hardware 1 50 Using Norton Antivirus E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 8 Activate a Drive D DATA b System managed size Drive Volume Label Paging File Size MB C FIRMWARE p para E USBSTICK e Paging file size for selected drive Drive D DATA Space available 11557 MB O Custom size Initial size MB Maximum size MB Ogre Total paging File size for all drives Minimum allowed 2 MB Recommended 381 MB Currently allocated 0 MB Lox Cema Virtual Memory GE Click on the Set button Click on the Close button the dialog closes Now the program Norton Antivirus can be installed 1401 3078 62 1 51 Using Norton Antivirus E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Contents Getting Started Contents Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Getting RA ire ere ve eer E REPE reae aas 2 1 Outline of the Instrument tenen tnnt nan nnn nnne 2 1 Schematic Description 2 1 Use of the InstruUMent oooooccninnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnncrr rn 2 1 Main Applications itte t
15. Parameters 0 The content of the status registers is retained at power on If the status registers ESE and SRE are configured accordingly this may cause a service request to be triggered at power on 1401 3084 32 6 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Common Commands 1 The content of the status registers is reset at power on The query PSC retrieves the contents of the Power on Status Clear flag The answer is either 0 or 1 RCL 0 10 RECALL calls up the instrument status which was stored under the specified number using the SAV command e g SAV 4 It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory LOAD number file name extension command RST RESET resets the instrument to a defined default state SAV SAVE stores the current device state under the specified number see also RCL The command is used to store the current instrument state in an intermediate memory The instrument state can be recalled by using the command RCL with the associated number To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file the command MMEMory STORe number file name extension is used Parameter file extension is savrcl Parameter number is the specific number defined with the SAV command e g SAV 4 SRE 0 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the specified value Bit 6 MSS enable bit remains O This command determines the con
16. SOURce EQUalizer MODulator FEMode ABSolute RELative This command determines whether frequency values are absolute or relative with respect to the RF carrier frequency Example EQU MOD FEM REL frequency is given relative to the RF carrier frequency ABSolute Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator FREQuency 0 1 GHz This command enters frequency values into the current equalizer data table of the modulator Example EQU MOD FREO 10000 20000 30000 enters three requency values into the current data table SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 53 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer MODulator GAIN 10 10 dB This command enters gain values into the current equalizer data table of the modulator Example EQU MOD GAIN 0 1 2 enters three gain values into the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator PHASe 360 360 deg This command enters phase values into the current equalizer data table of the modulator Example EQU MOD PHAS 0 45 90 enters three phase values into the current data table SCPI 0 01 deg Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator POINts This command queries the number of data points of the current equalizer data table of the modulator The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SOUR EQU MOD SEL D TEMP TESTPREDMOD
17. The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see chapter 9 Error Messages If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Only the error numbers are returned and not the entire error text Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see chapter 9 Error Messages If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR CODE ALL queries all entries in the error queue and subsequently deletes them Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is returned and not the entire error text Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined b
18. 1401 3084 32 6 11 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal RECT CREate NAMed lt waveform filename gt The command generates a rectangular test signal and stores the file on the local hard disk HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG RECT CRE NAM D NtempNtest wv writes the generated waveform file to test wv on the HD Device specific SOURce TSIGnal RECT OFFSet 1 1FS The command sets a DC component to the rectangular test signal Example TSIG RECT OFFS 0 1 sets an offset of 0 1 FS Device specific SOURce TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 4 1000 samples The command sets the number of sample values required from the rectangular wave per period The resulting clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Example TSIG RECT SAMP 500 sets the number of samples to 500 for a period Device specific SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate The command generates a waveform which is output straight away This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG SINE CRE a signal is generated and output directly Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed
19. 6 Remote Control Commands Introduction Remote Control Commands The following sections contain the remote control commande for the general settings which are grouped in the Setup menu for manual control All of the commands which are relevant only to remote control such as the commands of the STATus and SYSTem subsystem and the common commands are also described here Common Commands Introduction Common Commands The common commands are taken from the standard IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 Identical commands have an identical effect in different instruments The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands affect the status reporting system which is described in detail in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics Komma CTO CT CT US A A ETT De eT Leg em sara sentis uen Guay or ww C nica query ue oy wm 92m OT iv tas que Queen Lo A A TE oem otomana quen ey any EE Ew O A EE Em A A IT E o ETT Em A E Eme AO IT Emm LC E geen K A A CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVEN part of the QUEStionable and OPERation register to zero The command does not change the enable and transition parts of the registers It deletes the output buffer 1401 3084 32 6 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Common Commands ESE 0 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the specified value The ESE
20. 8 m 4 cma mm EX jw o BC Q Active Output Analog Out v Type In the upper part of the dialog the output analog or digital is selected and activated The dialog differs depending on the selected output State Switches On or Off the active output The selected output either analog or digital is activated or deactivated respectively Remote control command SOUR OUTP STAT ON Active Output Selects the output mode Two output modes cannot be actived at the same time The selection offered depends on the fitted output boards If there is only one board fitted e g an analog one the menu item Analog Out is selectable solely Only instrument version R amp S AFQ B18 is equipped with a digital output board Then the user decides whether the analog or the digital board shall be switched on If a second digital output board is installed the user has to select either DIGITAL1 or DIGITAL2 In the same way the user has to select either ANALOG1 or ANALOG2 if the instrument is equipped with two analog output boards Digital One digital and one analog output are fitted The Analog digital or analog output can be activated Remote control command SOUR OUTP AOUT DIG ANAL Analog Two analog outputs are fitted One of them can be Analog2 activated Remote control command SOUR OUTP AOUT ANALOG1 ANALOG2 Digital Two digital outputs are fitted One of them can be IDigital2 activated Remote control command SOU
21. Access to the VISA functions require the declaration of the functions and constants prior to their use in the project This can be accomplished either by adding the modules VISA32 BAS and VPPTYPE BAS or a reference to the VISA32 DLL to the project Project Simple Bo Simple Simple vbp 3 Forms Imi rmiMain Main Frm 29 Modules e VISA32 visa32 bas St vPPTYPE vpptype bas References Simple vbp Available References v Visual Basic For Applications v Visual Basic runtime objects and procedures v Visual Basic objects and procedures OLE Automation MIVISA Library IAS Helper COM Component 1 0 Type Library IAS RADIUS Protocol 1 0 Type Library ComponentOne AwkOne Control VideoSoft vsOcx6 Controls aActEmail 1 0 Type Library ABManager 1 0 Type Library aboutlook 1 0 Type Library aboutlookex 1 0 Type Library Arress2MMMhesianer 1 0 Tyne ihrary VISA Library Location C WINNT System32 visa32 dll Language Standard The modules visa32 bas and vpptype bas can be found in the lt VXlpnpPath gt WinNT include typically C VXlpnp WinNt include Note Manual control is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contrast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status Therefore control programs should always define an initial device status e g by the command RST and then implement the required settings Drivers for the generator e g IVI C
22. Cmd WAV SEL C Program Load waveform file FilesNRohde amp SchwarzNAFQFirmwareNListsV WaveformsNsinelOkHz wv status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount If status VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Cmd SOUR STAT ON Switch on generation of waveform file status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount 1401 3084 32 5 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Exit Sub ErrorExit viStatusDesc vi status ErrorDescription MsgBox ErrorDescription The selected waveform signal is now applied at the default output of the instrument Switchover to Remote Control On power on the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be operated via external mouse keyboard and monitor In case of remote control via the IEC IEEE bus the instrument is set to remote control REMOTE status by means of an addressed command With remote control via Ethernet remote control is not automatically set by means of a command The instrument must be explicitly set to the REMOTE state e g by sending the interface command amp GTR go to remote In the REMOTE state instrument control via external mouse keyboard and monitor is disabled Dialogs can be opened however e g to verify settings Buttons and setting fields are displayed in gray and cannot be activated RE
23. R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger SEGMent DELay 0 10 sec This command sets a segment trigger delay for a multi segment waveform A segment trigger delay can be set only when the trigger source External is selected Example TRIG SEGM DEL 0 11 sets a segment trigger delay of 0 11 seconds Device specific SOURce TRIGger SEGMent EXECute The command generates a segment trigger event for a multi segment waveform A segment trigger can be generated only when the segment trigger source External is selected This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TRIG SEGM SOUR MAN selects the segment trigger source Manual TRIG SEGM EXEC generates a segment trigger event Device specific SOURce TRIGger SEGMent INHibit 0 10 sec The command sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event for a multi segment waveform subsequent to triggering A segment trigger inhibit can be set only when the trigger source External is selected This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TRIG SEGM INH 0 123 suppresses a segment trigger event for 0 123 seconds Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 31 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger SEGMent MODE CONTinuous SEAMIess SINGle REPeatN The command selects the extended trigger mode for mu
24. R amp S AFQ100A Contents Remote Control Commands Contents Chapter 6 Remote Control Commande 6 Remote Control Commands ccccccccccccccnccccncncnnnnnnenenenencnnnnenonos 6 1 Introduction Remote Control Commande 6 1 Common le eu ln 6 1 Introduction Common Commandes 6 1 AFQ Commands Signal Generation 6 5 Baseband Block Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB 6 5 Baseband Block ARB Waveform and List Format 6 18 Baseband Block Trigger and Input Settings 6 27 Baseband Block Marker Settings cccecceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeenaas 6 36 Baseband Block Clock Settings ccceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeennaeeeeenaas 6 41 Baseband Block Time and Frequency Shifts 6 45 Impairments Block 6 46 Equalizer Block eii PERRO UO E 6 48 Output Block analog and digital seeese 6 56 BERT Block iii alta Dia 6 63 AFQ Commands Setup Section oooooccccccnnnccocccccccccncnnanannconcnnnnnnnnn nn nnnannnnnnnns 6 72 Calibration Subsystem nr ierra ar rE E A nan cnnnr nn r naar enn 6 72 Diagnostic Subsystem nano nonn cnn rn nnno na nn n nn enne 6 73 Mass Memory Subsystem o oococccinccccccnonoccnononnnnnnonnno canon conc rnnnn rra 6 77 Status Subsystem na ncssa ccnn iaai ai 6 85 System SUBSYSTEM BEE 6 90 1401 3084 32 l 6 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Remote Control Commands
25. SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt LIST PATTern RATio LIST 1 max wavelength 1 samples 1 max wavelength 1 samples SOURce TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON OFF The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal If a delay is entered in setting ON but is outside this range the maximum possible delay is set and an error message is output The numeric suffix in OUTPut has no significance for this command since the setting always affects every marker Example TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay 0 2 20 1 Samples The command defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signals expressed in terms of samples Command TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON can be used to restrict the range of values to the dynamic range i e the range within which a delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal Example TRIG OUTP2 DEL 16 sets a delay of 16 samples for the signal on connector MARKER 2 Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 36 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay MAXimum The command queries the maximum marker delay for setting TRIGger OUTPut DELay F
26. 1 12 USB 2 0 type A rear panel 1 19 USB 2 0 type B rear panel 1 19 Interface function IEC IEEE bus 5 36 8 4 Intermediate frequency ccssessiinneeennnee 4 205 Internet Connection Firewall 1 42 ee 5 31 Invalid Block data C7e7l sss 9 6 Character 201 9 6 Separator 103 sssssssss 9 6 SUffix 5131 istae e nates 9 6 IP addres dine dti ederet 1 38 IST TIAQ a pe obi 6 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A K Key HELP ide unl 4 270 PRESET nns 1 31 4 249 Keyboard emulaton 3 82 Keyboard On Screen sss 3 82 L LAN ide iem 1 36 5 8 5 38 8 6 InteHace s iiid inii 5 38 8 6 Remote confrol sss 5 7 Ethernet interface saananannennnnnnenneenenana 1 15 Leakage WQ dote 4 208 LEDS il 1 10 BUSY a 1 10 ERROR etd dida 1 10 READY is pud 1 10 REMOTE eve d 1 10 License for software option 4 256 Linux controller sss 1 51 Lists not same length 226 9 6 Load instrument settings 4 273 6 4 6 99 Load Waveform ARB iets thats erada uier e edi 4 164 DIrectOry ui atcp 4 278 File list iiis eR 4 279 Recent data seis 4 278 Deleite 4 279 Load Waveform ARB 6 20 6 21 Local Remote Channel Control 4 265 Local to remote switchover 5 4 Lower case commands
27. 1401 3084 32 9 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Command protected 203 The desired command could not be executed as it was protected with a password Example The command CAL FREQ might be protected with a password Remedy Use command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 to enable the command SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Data out of range 222 A value of the transmitted command was outside the legal range Example Command SOUR FREQ only permits entries in the range of min to max frequency SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Data type error 104 The command contains an invalid value indication Example ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting FREQ ON SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Device specific error 300 Device specific error not defined in greater detail SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Exponent too large 123 The magnitude of the exponent is too large SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Expression data not allowed 178 The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages External reference out of range or disconnected 50 External reference is selected but no
28. If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SYSTem ERRor The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example STAT QUE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 89 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section System Subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation Command Parameters EN SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI STANdard SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 0 30 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource Po SYSTem DISPlay UPDate sste ty sste A ty estate A nny O A ICE ssm A A ICE TA O Lienen A A A me A UT D se CO CUCA Ny smse A A ICE A A A nny smm O O re oy CO A A ICE TAN System GPIB Terminator SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EO STANdard The command sets the terminator recognition for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus Parameters EOI The terminator must be sent together with the line message EOI End of Line This setting is recommended for binary block transmissions where a character could coincidentally have the value LF Line Feed but is not intended as the terminator This setting must be selected for block data with undefined length STANdard An LF Line F
29. Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones A Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n
30. Running The waveform is output a trigger was internally or externally initiated Remote control command SOUR TRIG RMOD Response RUN Stopped Waveform output is stopped The instrument waits for an internal or external trigger event to restart signal generation Remote control command SOUR TRIG RMOD Response STOP 1401 3084 32 4 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block The Trigger Configuration section is where the trigger for the waveform is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on the selected trigger source Run Mode Trigger 1401 3084 32 Selects the trigger mode For multi segment waveforms the segment output is determined by the Segment Mode settings on page 4 18 The effect of the selected regular and or segment trigger mode on signal generation is indicated in the waveform graph in the bottom section of the dialog box Continuous Single The waveform is output continuously Retrigger Off Trg z When retrigger is disabled a subsequent trigger after the start of signal generation is without effect The waveform output can be restarted by switching off and then switching on the ARB state in the Baseband Block Retrigger On Trg When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a subsequent trigger after start of signal generation Remote control command SOUR TRIG MODE CONT The waveform is output once after a trigger event occu
31. SOURce EQUalizer IQ I GAIN rtiri a e E rne nnne gin aer aED nnns nnn 6 60 ISQURce IEQUAalizer IQ EPFIASe oia il a a UH 6 61 L OiUlb celEOUalzerfOtDOINts enne nene nhnnn nnn nnn nth i ia tesat sense ra sss assa sss essa sas naa 6 61 SOURce EQUAlizer IQ l SEL aui re te tee es ETE RETE ets 6 61 SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q FREQuenoy sisse seien nh nane en setae as ernst 6 63 SQURce EQUAalizer IQ Q GAIN 2 2 thui ed estf d dte e d e a det etae pr aga 6 63 SQURce EQUAGlizer IQ Q PHASe eiii o itia etes ese esse Fiet eyes bebes b esis ER ERR 6 63 SOURce JEQUAalizer IQ Q POINES T irecte ititi i AE NE LLAN sane nsns nnns sane enn nnne nna 6 63 L OUb celEOialtzerjO O SElect oriista Anara a S REAA AANE EAPO ERE EIEEE TEEDE EEEREN RAN 6 64 SOURce EQUalizer IQ S TATe aa a a a a a sss ssa ra das ad aa aiad 6 64 1401 3084 32 10 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands SOURce EQUalizer MODulator CA Talog sss sesenta enne 6 66 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator CA Talog LENGth sss eene 6 64 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator DE Lete eiii seas asa rna ha haa ra tha haa sa saa a 4 2 A MAR RR A A nenne 6 66 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator FEMOQGe eiii iii isse asa sae sa naa ra thanh ia iaa a a A EAR R2 2 LA 24244 6 66 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator FREQuency sisse eene eene nnns nenas 6 66 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator GAIN eiii ie
32. Save Lists File Management on page 3 28 Save list under the same name Enter Mark the Save button and press the key Double click on the Save button Create new list Mark the List Data button and press the Enter key Mark the menu item New List and press the Enter key Select the directory and enter the file name in the menu New List see section Select Save Lists File Management on page 3 28 Double click on the List Data button Double click on New List Select the directory and enter the file name in the menu New List see section Select Save Lists File Management on page 3 28 1401 3078 62 3 22 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Online Help Online Help The instrument is equipped with a context sensitive help function A help page is available for each parameter and can be called any time during instrument operation The context sensitive page which is opened with the F key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system Note Compiled online help systems are also available for all functions of the instrument on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument This help program can be called on any controller with Internet Explorer version V 4 0 and higher E AFQ Online Help V00 01 LB Hide Contents Index Search
33. switches off the corrections Device specific SOURce EQUalizer STATe ON OFF This command switches on off both the UO and the Modulator corrections Example EQU STAT OFF switches Off all corrections Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 55 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Output Block analog and digital CTI emma CTA CT EI PETT av av av av SOURce OUTPut AOUTput ANALog DIGital ANALOG1 ANALOG DIGITAL1 DIGITAL2 I Note If the instrument is not fitted with either two digital or two analog output boards then omit the lt CH gt suffix 1401 3084 32 6 56 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUT Put ANALog lt CH gt AMODe ELECtronic ATTenuators The command sets the amplitude mode Two of them are possible Electronic or Attenuators They determine how precise the signals will be adjusted Using the Electronic mode the instrument generates signal amplitudes by scaling the waveforms The adjustment can be performed very fast The level resolution is low if a small signal amplitude lt lt 1V is selected Using the Attenuators mode the instrument generates signal amplitudes by applying a gauge circuit to the waveforms The instrument switches a relay The adjustment takes some time The level resolution is high especially for small signal amplitudes 1V Example OUTP ANAL AMOD ATT the instrument generates signal amp
34. 1 2 Session ONC RPC REC 1057 Transport TCP UDP RFC 793 Network IP RFC 791 Data Link Ethernet 802 3 8802 3 Physical 802 3 10BASE T 8802 3 Fig 8 2 Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR legal RPC messages are known as VXI 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups program messages control command to the instrument response messages values returned by the instrument service request Spontaneous queries of the instrument and low level control messages interface messages 1401 3084 32 8 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels a core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel program response and low level control messages The abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more details refer to the VXI 11 specification TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI 11 Revision 1 0 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXIbus and TCP IP IEEE
35. Advanced Windows Firewall is turned off Your computer is at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as the Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services Name Component of Software Platform ComponentE nvironmentS erver O File and Printer Sharing O Message Queuing O Remote Assistance O Remote Desktop L UPnP Framework Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions 1401 3078 62 1 45 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Establish Manual Remote Control on the Linux Unix PC The VNC program is available per default for Linux Unix operating systems Only three steps are necessary to establish the connection to the R amp S AFQ 1 Startthe internet browser on the PC 2 Enterthe following address vnc IP address of R amp S AFQ e g vnc 192 168 1 1 3 Confirm with the Enter key The password for the remote VNC connection is requested 4 Enter the password defined in the Default Local System Properties panel of the Ultra VNC program of R amp S AFQ 5 Press the Log On button to confirm After the connection is established the current modulation generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S AFQ can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and key
36. Off Pattern Ignore is not active Remote control command BERT SET IGN OFF All 1 Bit sequences consisting of 32 or more consecutive 1 data are not used i e ignored for the BER measurement Remote control command BERT SET IGN ONE Allo Bit sequences consisting of 32 or more consecutive 0 data are not used i e ignored for the BER measurement Remote control command BERT SET IGN ZERO Sets high low threshold in volts for the BERT inputs Clock Data Data Enable and Restart The variable threshold makes it possible to align the BERT interface with the level of different input signals In addition reflections and other interference can be suppressed by selecting the appropriate threshold Remote control command SOUR INP BERT THR 1 0 Sets the input impedance of the BERT inputs Clock Data Data Enable and Restart For high clock rates 50 ohms should be selected Remote control command SOUR INP BERT IMP G50 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings General Instrument Settings Default Instrument Settings The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings The default settings can be called only via remote control Most of the parameters and switching states are preset even those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings However functions that conc
37. SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess or manually in the Environment GPIB dialog Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually Open the dialog Setup Remote GPIB amp Remote Channel Set El O GPIB Settings GPIB channel address 6 Via IEC IEEE bus Dim defaultRM As ViSession Dim status As ViStatus Dim vi As ViSession Dim Cmd As String Dim retCount As ViUInt32 Dim ErrorDescription As String VI FIND BUFLEN status viOpenDefaultRM defaultRM Open default resource manager If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit status viOpen defaultRM GPIB 6 INSTR 0 Open connection to instrument 5000 vi with old address If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Cmd SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Set instrument to new address status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit status viClose vi Close old connection and reopen with new address If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit status viOpen defaultRM GPIB 18 INSTR 0 5000 vi 1401 3084 32 5 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control If status VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Exit Sub ErrorExit viStatusDesc vi status ErrorDescription
38. Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the Pct string Example SOURCe OUTPut DIGital OFFSet I 0 05FS SOURCe OUTPut DIGital OFFSet I 5PCT 1401 3084 32 5 19 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Special numeric value MIN MAX DEF UP DOWN INF NINF NAN Boolean Parameters Text 1401 3084 32 The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values In the case of a query the associated numerical value is provided Example Setting command SOURce IMPairment GAIN I MAXimum Query SOURce IMPairment GAIN I Answer 0 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command UP DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are division by zero subtraction or addition of infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean parameters represent two states T
39. afq mfg selects the current data table EQU MOD POIN queries the number of data points of the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator RFFRequency 0 100 GHz This command sets the RF carrier frequency of the modulator this is necessary if frequency entry mode absolute is chosen The instrument compensates frequency responses of RF modulators However the region of interest is the accessible bandwidth of 200 MHz centered on the RF carrier frequency This is why the user enters the carrier frequency if frequency entry mode absolute is chosen Outside this region the instrument does not correct anything Example EQU MOD RFFR 1 3GHz sets the RF frequency to 1 3 GHz Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 54 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer MODulator SELect FILE NAME gt This command selects a file containing the equalizer data table for the modulator previously entered by the user All new data points will be saved in the selected one hence there is no save or save as command The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU MOD SEL equ modl selects the file equ mod1 containing the data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator STATe ON OFF This command switches on off the corrections for the modulator Example EQU MOD STAT OFF
40. c The interface runs at 100 MHz clock rate the data are output from sample memory at an adjustable clock rate or at an external clock rate and are resampled to 100 MHz Time and frequency shifts as well as equalizer features are possible The user may switch on an IF i e a frequency offset which will frequency shift the radio signal immediately d The interface runs at 100 MHz clock rate the data are output from sample memory at an internal adjustable clock rate or an external clock rate and inserted in the data stream Valid data words are labeled as Enable The instrument does not resample the signal this means the clock rate is not changed Time and frequency shifts as well as equalizer features are not accessible e Connector The pins are assigned as follows R amp S AFQ B18 Port 1 MUXED DATA Signals for and Q Control Signals LVDS p LVDS n LVDS p LVDS n Pin i Pin Pin 3 SYNC In 1 14 I2C Clock 7 3V3 Logic I2C Data 20 3V3 Logic GND GND GND 5V Out LVDS p und LVDS n are a pair of lines The signals have to be transmitted at a differential impedance of 100 Ohm and terminated appropriately to avoid signal reflections The multiplex factor is 7 1 hence a clock rate of 100MHz corresponds to a data rate of 700 Mbit s Serializing and Mapping UO data are transmitted using National Semiconductor s LVDS Channellink technique Data bits of and Q mar
41. connection 1401 3084 32 4 36 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Unnecessary cable lengths and branching points have to be avoided The time differences of the reference clock signal reaching the instruments in the chain must be compensated by adjusting the Reference Clock Delay Reference Clock 10 MHz Slave D Delay ns 2 000 Tri REF IN o rio AFQ Master Marker REF OUT E REF IN is AFQ Slave REF OUT Sync Mode REF IN 9 AFQ Slave ae Varker DUT IN REF is AFQ Slave E Marker UT REF IN en GE Last DUT Fig 4 1 Connection of several R amp S AFQs for precise synchronization The parameters for the synchronization are set in the Reference Clock area of the Clock dialog 1401 3084 32 4 37 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block The synchronization mode has to be set for each instrument One of the instruments must be appointed Master and another one must be appointed Last slave The remaining instruments have to be appointed Slave Reference Clock 10 MHz Sync Mode Normal Master Slave Last Slave Multitriggering The master receives an external trigger signal TRIG The master delays the triggering and sends the signal to the slaves TRIG via the Marker output All instruments are in the state Pre triggered The rising edge of the following Reference Clock pulse acts as trigger for all instruments All instruments start signal output simultane
42. lt 18kKbit s 256 Colors Fuzzy View Only Auto Scaling Options Use DSMPlugin E Plugin detected y Config m PowRepae 3 Enter IP address of R amp S AFQ in input line VNC Server 4 Initialize the connection by pressing the Connect button A message requesting the password is displayed we Password E Wy tena 5 Enter the VNC password defined in the Default Local System Properties panel of the Ultr VNC program of R amp S AFQ 6 Press the Log On button to confirm After the connection is established the current modulation generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S AFQ can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in chapter 3 section Legend of Manual Controls on page 3 1 In contrast to Remote Control Desktop direct control on the R amp S AFQ is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the manual remote control 1401 3078 62 1 47 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Cut Manual Remote Control Connection via Ultr VNC The connection can be cut either on the R amp S AFQ or on the external PC Cutting the connection does not disable it It can be established again any time Cutting the connection on
43. lt waveform filename gt The command generates a signal and stores the file on the local hard disk HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG SINE CRE NAM D NtempNtest wv writes the generated waveform file to test wv on the HD Device specific SOURce TSIGnal SINE FREQuency The command queries the resulting frequency of the test signal The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example TSIG SINE FREO queries the resulting frequency of the test signal Response 80000 the frequency amounts 80000 kHz Device specific SOURce TSIGnal SINE PHASe 180 180 degree The command sets the phase offset of the sinewave signal on the Q channel relative to the sinewave signal on the channel Example TSIG SINE PHAS 45 sets the phase offset of the Q channel to 45 degree Device specific SOURce TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 4 1000 samples The command sets the number of sample values required from the sine wave per period The resulting clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Example TSIG SINE SAMP 500 sets the number of samples to 500 for a period Device specific 1401 3084
44. query command returns the content of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the content of the event status register in decimal form 0 255 and then sets the register to zero IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification The instrument type serial number and firmware version are returned Example Rohde amp Schwarz AFQ100A 1141 2005k02 000000 1 45 0 3 01 06 05 Release IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the content of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit O in the event status register when all previous commands have been processed This bit can be used to trigger a service request OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns a 1 when all previous commands have been processed It is important to ensure that the timeout set at the IEC IEEE bus is long enough OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options configured in the instrument and returns a list of the installed options The options are separated by commas PRE 0 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the specified value The PRE query command returns the content of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the content of the ENABle registers are retained or reset at power on
45. transmitted to the controller and further processed There are several methods which are outlined in the following Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from section Overview of the Status Register on page 5 26 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in the enable registers SRE and ESE Example Use command oPc to generate an SRQ CALL IBWRT modulator ESE 1 set bit O of ESE Operation Complete CALL IBWRT modulator SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as upon the command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is made via int
46. 1 LSB 1 of port 2 to either the signal or marker 3 Example OUTP DIG PASS 11 MARK the output pin I 1 is mapped to marker 3 SIGNal Device specific SOURce OUT Put DIGital lt CH gt PASSignment Q0 SIGNal MARKer This command maps the output pin I 0 LSB of port 2 to either the Q signal or marker 2 Example OUTP DIG PASS Q0 MARK the output pin Q 0 is mapped to marker 2 SIGNal Device specific SOURce JOUTPut DIGital lt CH gt PASSignment Q1 SIGNal MARKer This command maps the output pin Q 1 LSB 1 of port 2 to either the Q signal or marker 1 Example OUTP DIG PASS Q1 MARK the output pin Q 1 is mapped to marker 1 SIGNal Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 61 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUTPut DIGital lt CH gt PORT PORT1 PORT2 This command selects a digital output port Le either PORT1 or PORT2 see chapter 1 section Legend for Front Panel View and chapter 8 section Specifications of Digital Interfaces Example OUTP DIG PORT PORT2 selects the second digital output port Device specific SOURce OUTPut DIGital lt CH gt RESolution BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 BIT9 BIT10 BIT11 BIT12 BIT13 BIT14 BIT15 BIT16 This command sets word width in bits to specify the digital resolution of the signal The analog signal is not influenced Example OUTP DIG RES BIT6 sets the digital resolution to 6 bits Device specific SOURce
47. 1024 MByte 1 GByte Start Test Test Result Memory test successful Note The Memory Test Setup Test is provided for service purposes and therefore described in chapter 3 of the service manual section Trouble Shooting The service manual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument 1401 3084 32 4 96 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings GPIB Setup Remote The Remote Channel Settings dialog provides access to the GPIB and Ethernet settings The GPIB dialog can be selected in the Remote section of the Setup menu Setup Edit Help System Test D amp j Remote Channel Settings GPIB Settings GPIB channel address 6 Visa Resource Strings TCPIP TCPIP 10 113 10 163 INSTR USB USB 0xAAD 75 000000 INSTR GPIB channel address Sets the IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument Remote control command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 Visa Resource String Indicates the visa resource string This string is used for remote control of the instrument A separate string is provided for remote control via the LAN and the USB interface Remote control commands SYST COMM USB RES Response USB 0x0031 100001 INSTR Local Switches the instrument to operate in local control mode Switching from remote to local control mode can be also done with one of the following actions with the interface command amp GTL via the remote control interface with the key combination CTRL Q Re
48. 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block Enters the sample clock frequency for generating a table sine test signal 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Remote control command SOUR TSIG CLOC 300e6 Enters the number of sample values of a waveform 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Remote control command SOUR TSIG TSIN TLEN Enters the DC component of the resulting signal in or FS units The abbreviation FS means full scale Remote control command SOUR TSIG TSIN OFFS 4 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block The two sine waves can be configured in the sections Sine 1 and Sine 2 Periods Table Sine Sets the number of periods for the sine waves The values are set Test Signal separately for each component of the test signal as provided in section Sine 1 and section Sine 2 of the dialog Remote control command SOUR TSIG TSIN1 PER 5 SOUR TSIG TSIN2 PER 7 Amplitude Table Sine Sets the amplitude values of the sine waves The values are set Test Signal separately for each sine wave of th
49. 16 samples 1800 clock 1e 008 comment segments 3 clock unchanged level unchanged 1401 3078 62 3 28 E 3 RES AFQ100A File Management Select Loads user data 1 Select the drive and the directory in the left window The available files are listed in the right window 2 Press the Enter key or click on the Select button to load the file data E New List E amp Create List File Which Name c afq lists equ mod test afq help afq lists SineTriRectMarker afq help CAP ClearCase Storage CAP Documents and Setting ClearCase Storage Documents and Settings DOKUME 1 DRV Flare Test mvfslogs E 0 E O DAA A Save Saves new entries of user data For editing user data see Equalizer List Editor on page 3 21 The file name of the lists and the directory to which the files have to be saved are user selectable The file extension is different for each list type and is assigned automatically by the system see File Manager on page 3 30 The extension cannot be entered 1 Select the drive and the directory in the left window 2 Move the cursor to the entry field File name and enter the file name 3 Press the Enter key or click on the Save button to create the new data file Note If a file is highlighted the file name is entered automatically in the entry field File name Then the current data will overwrite the data in the file 1401 3078 62 3 29 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Mana
50. 4 276 6 4 6 99 Intermediate essen 6 4 Recent data seis 4 278 Rectangular Test Signals 4 168 Reference clock Delay titel 4 201 6 51 Narrow synchronization bandwidth 4 202 EE 4 201 external internal usse 4 201 Synchronization bandwidth 4 201 Synchronization mode 4 200 4 203 Last slave ioni ee 4 200 Mastercard eter 4 200 Normal e dnte ane RU 4 200 Slaves uidit ab eS 4 200 Wide synchronization bandwidth 4 202 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Reference Clock sechon cccccccseeceeee ene 4 199 Reference oscillator ses 6 51 Remote control A A O 5 7 GPIB MS c xD tds 5 5 Man ally dne ets 1 44 BASICS iii 5 1 SWIIChOV6r eai ene dn 5 4 Remote Desktop Connection 1 46 REMOTE LED bebe 1 10 Remote to local switchover 5 4 Rename iiA 4 281 6 100 Repeat count ococonccinininininininnnnaninonananos 4 177 6 35 Trigger ie maa aut d 6 35 Trigger multi segment waveforms 6 38 Res Frequency Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 171 Reset Factory seiiinmge 6 112 Instrument settings 1 31 4 249 6 4 6 113 Status reporting system s 5 33 Restoring the previous value 3 101 Result GERT 4 237 6 79 Retrigger Enable Trigger 6 35 REVISION Sidi ica 4 253 RJ 45 Cal ic
51. 488 2 Instrument Interface Specification VXI 11 3 Draft 0 3 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXIbus Core channel program response control messages Instrument o I Controller i Abort channel abort Interrupt channel Service request Fig 8 3 VXI 11 channels between instrument and controller The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This distinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a PC are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller Fig 8 4 Remote control via LAN from several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers 1401 3084 32 8 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces In the Measurement amp Automation Control program this setting is made on the Template tab TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0x001B36E 0 Template Basic UO Interface 1 0 viEnableE vent viDisableE vent viDiscardE vents viwaitOnE vent viGetAttibute viSetAttribute viLock viUnlock viEventHandler Heguesiod Res Actual Access Key Timeout E 0 Lock Type Ze Exclusive Shared Re
52. 5 10 enters three gain values into the current data table SCPI 0 01 deg Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q POINts This command queries the number of data points of the current data table of the path The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example EQU IQ I SEL D TEMP TESTPREDIQ selects the data table EQU IQ Q POIN queries the number of data points of the current data table SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 51 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q SELect This command loads the specified file containing a data table for the Q path All new data points will be saved in the selected file hence there is no save or save as command If the specified file does not exist the instrument will create a new one assigning the entered file name If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out on the default drive selected with the MMEM MSIS command The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ Q SEL corr al selects a file containing a data table previously entered by the user SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ STATe ON OFF This command switches on off the UO corrections Example EQU IQ I SEL D TEMP TESTPREDIQ EQU IQ Q SEL D TEMP TESTPRED
53. CW generation and the arbitrary waveform generator The files are stored on the hard disk of the instrument Drive D can be used to save user defined data any directory structure can be created on D Some default directories are predefined but can be changed at any time The Ci drive is a protected system drive The files on this drive contain data that must not be changed Therefore this drive should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss To prevent inadvertent deletion or overwriting of system files this drive is not specified in the file menus It can be accessed if a protection level see protection level Setup menu is revoked Files can be exchanged either via a memory stick or a connected network A memory stick is connected to the USB interface and is assigned to the next free drive In the case of a connected network all network drives that can be accessed are available see chapter 1 section Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN on page 1 25 The user data can be roughly divided into four data types 1 Instrument Settings 2 Lists 3 Complex modulation and control data 4 Waveforms Depending on the data type a file can either be selected created or it can be selected and saved The files are differentiated according to their extensions each type of file is assigned a specific file content The extension is usually of no consequence to the user since access
54. Control Panel menu 3 Select Services 4 Deactivate the VNC Server service The connection is disabled the VNC icon on the task bar SS of the R amp S AFQ disappears 1401 3078 62 1 48 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Using Norton Antivirus Using Norton Antivirus Virus protection software Symantec Norton Antivirus 2005 has been successfully tested for compatibility with the measurement instrument software on R amp S AFQ However Norton Antivirus may affect the behavior of the instrument in terms of settling time or stability Norton Antivirus 2005 has been subjected to detailed tests with R amp S AFQ Firmware version V1 40 and the paging file settings given below The system remains very reliable However rare impact on the settling time has been experienced slight degradations of settling time in 2 of samples out of specification Preparing the Installation of Norton Antivirus The installation is performed in the Windows XP operating system The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and or a mouse is connected Operation by mouse only without the external keyboard is possible if the on screen keyboard is used To ensure recognition of the external devices the instrument has to be switched off prior to connecting them 1 Switch off the instrument 2 Connect external keyboard and or mouse to the USB interface 3 Switch on the instrument 4 Open the start menu either by pressing the Windows key o
55. DIG AMPL 1FS sets the digital amplitude to maximum 0 001 FS Device specific SOURce JOUTPut DIGital lt CH gt CLOCk SLOPe POSitive NEGative Port2 only The command sets the polarity of the active clock for triggering digital signal transmission via Port2 Clock and data are in phase Either the rising or the falling edge of the data clock can be selected Example OUTP DIG AMPL 1FS sets the digital amplitude to maximum 0 001 FS Device specific SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH OFFSet 0 1 FS 0 1 FS The command sets an offset to the component of the digital signal The abbreviation FS means full scale Example OUTP DIG OFFS I 0 01 sets the offset of the digital signal to 196 full scale 0 001 FS Device specific SOURce OUTPut DIGital lt CH gt OFFSet Q 0 1 FS 0 1 FS The command sets an offset to the Q component of the digital signal Example OUTP DIG OFFS Q 0 01 sets the offset of the digital signal to 196 full scale 0 001 FS Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 60 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUT Put DIGital lt CH gt PASSignment l0 SIGNal MARKer This command maps the output pin I 0 LSB of port 2 to either the Signal or Marker 4 Example OUTP DIG PASS IO SIGN the output pin I 0 is mapped to signal SIGNal Device specific SOURce OUT Put DIGital lt CH gt PASSignment I1 SIGNal MARKer This command maps the output pin I
56. Dialog Operation Dialog Operation Dialogs are operated with the aid of the Winbar buttons and with key combinations The Ctrl H key combination minimizes an active dialog It is displayed in the form of a Winbar button The Ctrl F1 to F8 key combinations maximize the corresponding dialog The ctr G key combination closes an active dialog The softkeys call or close the associated dialog and set the cursor in the dialog Note The Esc key also closes the active dialog if the cursor is at the highest dialog level Function PC keyboard Mouse Displays a dialog in the foreground Click on the respective button in the Winbar Minimizes an active dialog Click on the J button in the header line Closes an active dialog Click on the MI button in the header line Hides all dialogs Press Ctrl D 1401 3078 62 3 20 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Editors Editors The GUI provides user friendly editors for defining data lists The lists are saved to files and may thus have any length The file name of the lists and the directory to which the files are saved are user selectable The file prefix is different for each list type and is permanently assigned by the system see section File Management on page 3 25 Equalizer List Editor The Equalizer menus provide the editor for defining the
57. E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt UNBalanced AMPLitude 0 0 75 V The command sets the maximum output voltage peak peak for the unbalanced signal Small differences at the inputs can be taken into account via impairment settings Example OUTP ANAL UNB AMPL 0 234V sets the maximum output voltage to 0 234 V Device specific SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt UNBalanced OFFSet l 10 mV 10 mV The command sets the DC offset of the path Example OUTP ANAL UNB OFFS I 9 9mV sets the DC offset of path to 9 9 mV Device specific SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt UNBalanced OFFSet Q 10 mV 10 mV The command sets the DC offset of the Q path Example OUTP ANAL UNB OFFS I 9 9mV sets the DC offset of Q path to 9 9 mV Device specific SOURce OUTPut AOUTput ANALog DIGital ANALOG1 ANALOG2 DIGITAL1 DIGITAL2 The command selects the active output boards analog and or digital If either two digital boards or two analog boards are fitted then the suffix 1 or 2 is added to select one of them Example OUTP AOUT ANAL activates the analog output Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 59 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUTPut DIGital lt CH gt AMPLitude 0 FS 1 FS The command sets the digital amplitude i e the low to high level difference corresponding to a full modulated input signal Example OUTP
58. Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid NRFD Not Ready For Data NDAC Not Data Accepted 1401 3084 32 active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus 8 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions The following table lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument Ie Handshake source function source handshake full capability CON ERIN a entran eme rss MTA CN eeano NNNM o Reset function Device Clear full capability pr recio Davie Tse May CONS EE Table 8 1 IEC IEEE Bus Interface functions 1401 3084 32 8 4 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A IEC IEEE Bus Messages Hardware Interfaces Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active LOW They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC IEEE bus Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded 10 1F hex They affect all instruments connected to the bus without addressing Visual Basic command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear LL
59. Instrument Functions UA Remote Control Commands Introduction Remote Control Command Common Commands AFO Commands Setup Section e AFO Commands Signal Processing AFO Commands BERT Subsystem TEST Subsystem e Supplements tes amp Er Prnt Options Introduction Remote Control Commands The following sections contain the remote control commands for the general settings which are grouped in the Setup menu for manual control All of the commands which are relevant only to remote control such as the commands of the STATus and SYSTem subsystem and the common commands are also described here The help function is provided with a navigation bar i e other help pages can be called from the context sensitive page via the table of contents the index arrows for scrolling and page internal links 1401 3078 62 3 23 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Operation of context sensitive help Online Help Function PC keyboard Mouse Open the help system Press F1 key E The help page for the respective parameter is displayed Close the help system Press F1 key again Activate the link The help system branches to the linked page Select link using the cursor keys and activate with the Enter key Click on the link Scroll Select Previous or Next in the help window using the cursor keys and activate with the Enter key
60. MU E ens 4 182 Segment trigger source ssssss 4 185 LU op 4 186 BUS iii po Pun nnus 4 186 ExteMal ta aiino beu d 4 185 enne eisereen dE 4 185 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Select file sss ies 4 279 Select List Di 4 278 File JiSt i eer gets 4 279 Recent data seis 4 278 Select ee e tenis 4 279 Select Test Point 4 262 4 263 Selection field sss 3 96 Selfil st cis simu eH 4 266 6 5 Self test failed 320 9 10 Semicolon separator suus 5 24 Serial number ssssseeeenns 6 3 Serial oumbers seen 4 253 Sena poll ia 5 31 Service request SRQ 5 31 6 4 Setting parameters sss 3 98 Settings conflict 221 9 10 SIGN isi EDO ie P M d 5 20 Sine Test Sionegls sss 4 165 Slope External segment trigger 4 190 External trigger esses 4 179 Segment trigger sessssss 4 190 AA e epe 4 179 Slots td P p de 4 253 et 3 94 Software OPtiONS ococononcnncocicoccnccananonos 4 254 6 3 Software approved coocooccccccccccononcccnccannnnnnnnos 1 32 Square brackets cooooooooccccccconccconcccccccconnann ccoo 5 17 SRE service request enable register 5 29 SRQ service request 21 cccecceeeeeteteeteneees 6 4 Standby mode 1 11 Stat BERT s sce edd 6 85 Start menu
61. MsgBox ErrorDescription Sending the first command starts remote control operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC IEEE bus Manually 0 Press the Ctrl o key combination Note Before the transition command processing must be completed as otherwise transition to remote control is performed immediately The Cti Q key combination can be disabled by the interface message amp LLO see section IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions on page 5 34 in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is only possible via the IEC IEEE bus The Ctri Q key combination can be enabled again by deactivating the REN line of the IEC IEEE bus see section IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions on page 5 34 Via IEC IEEE bus status viGpibControlREN vi Set instrument to manual VI GPIB REN ADDRESS GTL operation 1401 3084 32 5 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Remote Control via LAN Interface For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol Connection of the R amp S AFQ to a network and the querying of a computer name is described in chapter 1 section Query Computer Name Note In contrast to file transfer via LAN which requires only a partial permission
62. Name Data or Name Length Data The colon separates the name part and the data part The colon can be followed by a space for the sake of legibility The Name identifies the tag It is always expressed in capital letters The Data is tag specific and in most cases it is in ASCII plain text The Length specifies the number of bytes in a WAVEFORM tag from to ASCII integer Each waveform file must begin with the TYPE tag The sequence of the remaining tags is arbitrary For each tag an indication shows whether it must be included in the file concerned mandatory or may be included optional Unknown tags are not analyzed by the Instrument On the other hand they are left unchanged are saved without an error message and can be read back again Waveforms generated for R amp S AMIQ can also be loaded on the Instrument where they are converted internally into an R amp S Signal Generator waveform The following sections first describe the mandatory TYPE tag which identifies the file and is always located at the start of the file The rest of the tags used in the R amp S Signal Generator are then described in alphabetical order Most tags are valid for all three file types If a tag is valid only for a single file type e g only for a waveform this fact is indicated in the description 1401 3084 32 6 18 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation TYPE magic xxxxxxxx mandatory must be the first tag in the file
63. Please note If Gui Update is OFF values of displayed parameters may differ from their internal and actual values This mode is mainly provided to support unjittered signal output Gui Update is setto ON on every change of the instrument s remote state The Start Stop Gui Update window provides the possibility to switch off updating the displayed parameters in order to increase speed for certain settings The indicated values are not updated and may therefore differ from their internally used values Remote control command SYST DISP UPD OFF Software Options Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration Remote gt GUI Update Protection Software Options The Software Options window can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu The Software Options window shows the firmware version of the instrument software as well as all installed hardware and software options Note Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode The activation code is supplied with the software option How to install options is described in chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied on CD ROM with the instrument Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde amp Schwarz service shop 1401 308
64. Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an
65. SOUR TRIG OUTP1 OFFT 30 SOUR TRIG OUTP1 0NT 20 4 28 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Divider Marker Pattern Marker 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block List A marker signal that is defined by a pattern of samples is generated When List is selected an input box for entering the pattern is displayed see also List on page4 30 The samples can be assorted by entering either particular samples or sample ranges each defined by the sampleindex and the signal value 0 1 The arguments are separated by A hyphen between the start and the end sampleindices of a sample range A colon between the sample index and the value A semicolon between the argument entries Example 20 1 50 0 60 70 Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE LIST SOUR TRIG OUTP1 LIST 1 100 1 101 0 102 200 1 Marker signal output Pulse only Enters the divider value The precision of the frequency setting depends on the sampling rate The maximum pulse frequency is equal to half of the sampling rate Frequency 500 000 000 kHz The entry field is indicated only if a regular marker signal Pulse is generated The resulting pulse frequency is displayed below Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE PULS SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PULS DIV 4 SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PULS FREQ Marker signal output Pattern only Set a pattern for the marker output signal The pattern has a maximum length of 32 bits 1 1110
66. SYSTem VERSion The command queries the SCPI version with which the instrument complies The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST VERS queries the SCPI version Response 1996 the instrument complies with the version from 1996 SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 95 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Contents Maintenance and Interfaces Contents Chapter 8 Maintenance and Interfaces 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces 8 1 Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces A 8 1 d Elite 8 1 Hardware Interfaces eei nn naa 8 2 IEC IEEE Bus Interface eee ns 8 2 LAN Gonnector dte nive nit Mater qute ir ds 8 6 USB Connection USB and USB IN sse 8 9 Specifications of Digital Interfaces A 8 10 Port NR 8 11 Eet cta Oeo ie utet ee 8 14 1401 3084 32 1 8 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the modulation generator and a description of the remote control interfaces Please follow the instructions in the service manual when exchanging modules or ordering spares The order no for spare parts can be found in the service manual The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde amp Schwarz service centers can be found at
67. The buttons also assign functions to the softkeys of the next lower level for front panel operation Up to eight dialogs may be open simultaneously When the ninth dialog is opened the dialog that was opened first is automatically closed lo Equalizer Impairments Modulator HET Some dialogs assign dialog specific functions to the front panel softkeys by way of the dialog buttons Any of the open dialogs can be activated either with the respective button in the Winbar or the front panel softkey In combination with the keys for dialog operation Esc Alt the underscored character of the name in the windows tas pane and the cursor keys convenient dialog operation can be ensured Dialog operation is described in section Dialog Operation on page 3 20 Menu Structure Display The parameters are set in dialog boxes Dialogs are called either via the function blocks in the diagram or in the windows menus The dialogs are displayed on top of the block diagram If the dialog buttons assign dialog specific functions to the softkeys the Winbar is hidden 4 Equalizer Modulator State List Data equ_mod_test Edit Data Frequency Entry Mode Absolute M RF Frequency 1 000 000 000 GHz Gain f kHz uc f kHz 1401 3078 62 3 13 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display This section describes the dialog structure Dialog operation is described in section Dialog Operation on page 3 20 the setti
68. The help contains the complete user documen tation for the Signal Generator including the contents of the pre sent quick start guide The help files chm are also available on the CD ROM and can be used as a standalone help User Documentation R amp S AFQ100A Documentation CD ROM The CD ROM provides the complete user documentation for the Signal Generator The online help system chm The complete operating manual and service manual in printable form paf The data sheet brochure and specifications in printable form Links to different useful sites in the R amp S internet Note Please use the ADOBE Acrobat Reader for PDF files and the browser Internet Explorer gt 4 0 for the HTML help Optional Documentation The printed version of the operating and service manual provides the contents of the quick start manual plus the complete reference and the service information for the Signal Generator This manual can be ordered as an option stock no 1401 3084 32 English A4 format or 1401 3084 39 English letter format see ordering information in the data sheet Note The CD ROM contains the pdf version of the manuals Operating Manual The operating manual contains comprehensive information about the instrument functions and remote control in addition to the chapters of the quick start guide lt includes information about maintenance of the instrument and about error detection listing
69. Windows XP 1 38 Start Stop Gui Update 4 254 6 109 State Rn aia 4 163 6 7 BERT ii oi 4 237 6 85 1401 3084 32 10 16 Index State Digital Impairments 6 58 State Test point 4 261 6 90 6 92 Analog output board ssss 4 262 Status bEDS t TA IM 1 10 Register overvieu 5 28 Reporting system ssssee 5 28 Reporting system commands 6 103 STB status byte sssssssss 5 29 Stop BER Timor 6 86 Store instrument settings 4 276 String data not allowed 158 9 10 Strings te eae e 5 23 SU TIX eege 5 17 Suffix not allowed 138 9 10 Suffix too long 134 ssssssss 9 10 Symantec Norton Antivirus 2005 1 60 Synchronization mode Reference clock 4 200 4 203 Syntax error 102 see 9 11 System error 310 sss 9 11 T Table Length Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 170 6 12 Table Sine Test Signals ARB 4 169 Tables iih dee 3 96 Tag CLOCK aie estes ee aN aha 6 23 COMMENT EE 6 24 TCPIP Visa Resource String 4 265 Terminator recognition ssss 6 108 Test Pattern ARD 4 173 Test point voltage display 4 262 6 90 6 92 Text Da
70. afq one and stores it there under the name keep1 savrcl SCPI Compliant MMEMory MSIS lt msus gt The command sets the drive or network resource in the case of networks using lt msus gt MSIS Mass Storage Identification String This setting is effective for all MMEMory commands where the drive is not explicitly specified in the parameter Example MMEM MSIS E selects the memory stick as the default drive SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 83 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section MMEMory RDIRectory directory name The command deletes the specified subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM RDIR carrier deletes the subdirectory carrier in the current directory SCPI Device specific MMEMory STORe STATe 4 lt file_name gt This command stores the current instrument setting in the specified file The instrument settings must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number using the common command SAV see the section Introduction Common Commands on page 6 1 The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4 This setting can be c
71. aims at the standardization of instrument control commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI Not all of the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard but their syntax follows SCPI rules This section assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sections Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers The program examples for IEC IEEE bus programming are all written in VISA VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments The UO channel LAN GPIB is selected at initialization time by means of a channel specific resource string For more information about VISA refer to that user documentation 1401 3084 32 5 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Remote Control Basics The programming examples for remote control are all written in Microsoft VISUAL BASIC
72. allowed 9 8 109 Missing pGarameier 9 8 112 Program mnemonic too long 9 9 113 Undefined header 9 11 114 Header suffix out of range 9 5 123 Exponent too large 9 3 124 Too many digits s 9 11 128 Numeric data not allowed 9 8 131 Invalid eut 9 6 134 Suffix too Jong 9 10 138 Suffix not allowed 9 10 144 Character data too long 9 2 148 Character data not allowed 9 2 158 String data not allowed 9 10 161 Invalid block data 9 6 168 Block data not allowed 9 2 2 203 Command protected 9 3 221 Settings conflict 9 10 222 Data out of range 9 3 223 Too much data 9 11 224 Illegal parameter value 9 5 225 Out of memong sss 9 8 226 Lists not same length 9 6 240 Hardware emm 9 5 241 Hardware MISSING eee eet eee eeeneee 9 5 3 300 Device specific emor 9 3 310 System erop 9 11 330 Self test failed sssss 9 10 350 Queue overflow 9 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 4 410 Query deadlocked 9 9 41
73. alt 0 0 0 2 08 06 04 02 00 02 04 05 08 11 Inphase i t The impaired signals and Q are given by the phase mismatch Ag and the proper ones and Q F 1 q xQ Q q xQ with qi sin Ag qq cos Ag Remote control command SOUR IMP PHAS 5 1 4 44 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Equalizer Block Equalizer Block The dialog for inserting equalizer data can be accessed in the block diagram via the Equalizer function block or by selecting Equalizer in the Edit menu On Switches On or Off the function block Equalizer The states of the I Q and the Modulator corrections that were active before the last switch off are established Remote control commands SOUR EQU STAT ON The Equalizer uses externally measured frequency response data of external equipment to internally calculate the required level correction values The frequency response data is entered in data tables which can be stored and recalled together with the calculated correction values After activation of the Equalizer this correction data is used on the generated waveform UO and modulator frequency response data is edited in different dialogs UO or Modulator dialog Thus correction data for different measurement setups can be calculated and stored on the instrument Each dialog displays in several graphs the frequency response contained in the loaded correction list and not the internally calculated correction values Areas of the graphs can be zoom
74. are required for the modulation generator a Select installation of all components B Setup Ultr VHC Release 1 0 0 RC 18 BE a Select Components e Which components should be installed E Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Click Next when you are ready to continue Full installation Ultra NC Server Ultra NC Viewer Current selection requires at least 2 7 MB of disk space 1401 3078 62 1 41 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller b Select all entries in the Additional Task Panel i3 Setup Ultr VHC Release 1 0 0 RC 18 Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing Llltre NC Release 1 0 0 RC 18 then click Next Server configuration Start or restart Ultr VNC service Additional icons Create a Ultr VNC Viewer desktop icon Create a Ultr VNC Server desktop icon Create a Ultr VNC Repeater desktop icon File Associations v Associate vnc files with Ultr VNC Viewer C A successful installation is indicated by a message WinVHC X The WinVNC service was successfully registered The service may be started from the Control Panel and will automatically be run the next time this machine is reset m d Atthe same time a warning is displayed stating that a password mus
75. automatically in the entry field File name 6 Press the Enter key or click on the Open button to load the instrument settings The window is closed automatically 1401 3078 62 3 26 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Save File Management Saves the current instrument settings If the instrument works with loaded settings the current changes will overwrite the setttings in the file File name and path cannot be entered If the instrument does not work with loaded settings the function Save as will be called automatically Choose a filename to save under f Save in O afq lists Sine TriRectMarker 49 2 Waveforms My Recert BI SaveRecallTest savrcl Documents 3 Desktop My Documents EI fisch_bi on MUBDOCFE 5 My Network File name Places Save as type Save as Note Save Recal Fies savicl Opens the window Choose a filename to save under a Windows explorer user interface which is similar to the Choose a file to open window see above The instrument settings can be stored in a setting file 1 Click on the selection list Save in or move the cursor with the aid of the Tab key to activate the selection list 2 Click on the pop up button or press the cursor down key to pop up the selection list The available drives are listed 3 Mark the drive where the setting file has to be stored The directories and files are displayed in the area below 4 Shiftthe e
76. case of continuously generated signals that contain whole number multiples of the PRBS sequence the measurement occurs without interruption Only the data and clock lines of the BERT interface are used for the measurement The length of the pseudo random sequence is 2 to the power of the degree of the polynomial minus 1 For example PRBSS9 has a length of 511 2 1 binary digits Restart function The Restart function makes it possible to perform BER measurements with short signals or with signals that are not continuously generated and therefore do not contain any whole number multiples of PRBS sequences An external signal at the BERT input halts the measurement and restarts it when the data sequence begins and the BER results of the relevant sub sequences are integrated start of PRBS generation restart of PRBS generation length of PRBS sequence i restart of PRBS generation A user data block user data block user data block restart signal Fig 4 4 The length of the signal is too short for a complete PRBS sequence PRBS generation is restarted by the Restart signal when the signal begins anew Frames generated by the WinIQSIM2 software contain continuous PRBS data Le the PRBS sequence is continuously written to the user data fields Consequently if the instrument is used as a data source a restart is only necessary if e g when using a waveform the total length of the signal does no
77. clock signal is missing then data changes will also not be detected If the data is not detected despite the detected clock signal this may be caused by the following The signal from the DUT is missing The wrong impedance for the applied clock rate was selected see Impedance parameter The wrong threshold for the applied data signal was selected see Threshold parameter The measurement is synchronized Remote control command BERT RES Response the 7th value indicates the status of the synchronization 1 successful 0 unsuccessful 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 4 73 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block No Sync The measurement is not synchronized Generally a measurement cannot be synchronized until a clock and a data signal have been detected If synchronization still does not occur this may be caused by the following The selected PRBS is not correct For the bit error rate measurement the PRBS sequence on which the data is based must be set on the bit error rate tester If the PRBS is not correct the BER measurement cannot synchronize to the data due to the incorrect polynomial A wrong clock slope is used which violates setup or hold times see Clock Slope parameter The travel times of clock and data are unfavorable e g clock slope at data change Check the relationship of clock to data using an oscilloscope and optimize the travel times e g clock slope w
78. copy a complete directory together with all its files If lt destination gt is not specified lt source gt is copied to the MMEM MSIS drive and the MMEM CDIR directory Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory COPY lt file_source gt lt msus_source gt lt file_destination gt lt msus_destination gt The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM COPY D USER TEST1 SAVRCL E copies the file test1 savrcl in the USER directory on the internal hard disk to the memory stick without changing the file name SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 80 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt lt binary block data gt MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt This command writes the block data lt binary block data gt to the file identified by lt file_name gt The IEC IEEE bus terminator should be set to EOI in order to ensure correct data transfer The associated query command transfers the specified file from the instrument to the IEC IEEE bus and then on to the control computer It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the control computer is large enough to take the file In this case the setting for the IEC IEEE bus terminator is irrelevant T
79. currently selected path is displayed above the windows Only the relevant files are displayed without file extensions If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed When a file is saved or created its name is user selectable the extension is assigned automatically and cannot be entered The file is saved to the selected path Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Dialog Area Setting Parameters on page 3 18 By using the cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by using the Enter key The up down cursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys itis possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory will only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the Esc key again shifts the entry focus up one level The button for saving or loading the file can be selected and pressed After selecting the file a menu is closed automatically amp Load Waveform recent data sets esiRohde amp Schwarz AFQFirmware ListsWaveforms SineTriRectMarker ic Program Files Rohde amp Schwarz AFQFirmware Lists Waveforms Hc sine10kHz sine49 51MHz AnalogCalData SavRcl E Wavetorms a Plugins RsSigGenUninstaller date 2005 11 09 12 30
80. de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las c
81. differ with respect to their importance errors warnings info and the time of their appearance brief and permanent messages They require different treatment by the user Further information on all messages can be called in the info window see section Info Window Display on page 3 9 Chapter 9 Error Messages includes an overview of all status information and messages as well as instructions for error elimination Status Information The status information gives the user an overview of the settings of the instrument The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user wavetorm Sine test signal 27 3 01 um Ampiude 1 000 v Info Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line i e the white text box in different colours depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Brief messages Brief messages report automatic settings in the instrument or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Brief messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatica
82. doc dis 4 3 ARB Sine Test Signals Dialog 4 5 ARB Rectangular Test Signals Dialog 4 7 ARB Table Sine Test Signal Dialog ses 4 8 ARB Test Pattern Dialog 4 11 Trigger Dialog hu tati pede ette ote me e ud ia 4 12 Marker Dlalog irre Pi 4 27 Clock Dialog om Rt rehenes 4 31 Setting Up Several Connected R amp S AFQs for Precise Simultaneous Signal Output 4 36 Time and Frequency Shifts ssssssssse 4 38 SS A 4 40 Introduction titi nds 4 40 Impairment Settings Dialog essem 4 40 Equalizer Block ada 4 45 Modulator Dialog 52i ite iaa eio 4 46 Editing Modulator Data 4 48 LA Dialog eue theta eoi 4 52 Editing VO Data siii dp Ln e at iim 4 54 Output Block iiec pee t d e aget Lee Ea eoe des 4 57 Introduction eie eoe tee D eite i vue 4 57 Analog ET ue ET 4 58 Digital OutpuUt 2 pec eco Hee t ERE Eee eA cok tad gii te tt 4 61 Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block 4 66 Introduction itae eere d toe eei ote dete ite tiet lee 4 66 Bit Error Rate Dialog en 4 70 1401 3078 62 1 4 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Contents Instrument Functions General Instrument Geitnges emm 4 82 Default Instrument Settings sssse 4 82 SOUP MENU A A Aa 4 83 Internal Adjustments Setup System sse 4 83 Hardware Config Setup System sse 4 85 Gui Update Setup Gvesiem cece ceccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetsnnc
83. ds 2 2 Feature Sumimaly ioo nates mmelgteieim ba ai 2 3 Block Diagratri iiti itd id etd de ete dnd 24 Two ways to operate the instrument em 2 5 1401 3078 62 1 2 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Outline of the Instrument 2 Getting Started Outline of the Instrument Schematic Description The R amp S AFQ UO modulation generator forms analog signals to be modulated onto RF carriers by other instruments The instrument converts digital baseband signals to analog signals which can be further processed by an RF generator The R amp S AFQ outputs a two component time dependent analog signal vector signal consisting of an in phase I t and a quadrature phase Q t signal In general all modulations are possible yet the R amp S AFQ is recommended for vector modulation as well as amplitude and phase modulation The instrument performs all vector modulations for which baseband processing software to be run on a separate control PC is available e g R amp S WinlQSIM2 or Matlab A control PC takes the payload e g digitized speech recording and calculates the baseband signals Therefore a future radio or mobile communication standard will only require an upgrade of the baseband processing software Use of the Instrument Common Use The instrument loads waveforms calculated by simulation software such as Matlab or R amp S WinIQSIM2 into its sample memory After resampling the waveform is D A converted and output at the and Q connectors The two
84. eiiis seas sa rana ra rhn haha ra raa aa 22 EAR 2 222 A MAR RR 2 2 IA A424 6 67 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator PHA Se esi iii isis asa saa sa iaa ra tha iaa sa saa a 2 A EAR RA A enean 6 67 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator POINItS ooooococccocococononoconononononononononononononononononononononononononnnononnnnnonononos 6 67 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator RFFRequenocy sessi enne nennen 6 67 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator S ELect eei iiie ia sas sean ara rana ara tha a a aA MAR RR A A enean 6 68 SOURce EQUalizer MODulator S TATe eiiis eas as ara tana haa ratas aa asa E244 22 A MAR R2 A MA nenne 6 68 SOURCE JE QUalIZer STATO iae eem aa 6 68 SQURcGe FOEFSet iss added dent edo s e ona eu attesa uana e raga dads 6 55 SOURGCe JIMPairment D I av 6 55 TSOURce JiIMPairment D I av 6 55 SOURce IMPairment GAIN she ee EELER 6 56 L OUlb ce HM aicmentGAIN OO 6 56 SQURce IMPairmment OFFSet ioi t ei oe ee e s 6 56 L OUlb ce HM aiomentOEF Ger 6 58 SQURce IIMPairment PHASe oid ls tte eoo tea dede ded ae od iii 6 58 SOURce IMPalrmentiSTA Te iid disti cot eate tato dro eye eed det aed crea 6 58 LSOUbce UND BERT JMtiedance eiii iiis eiiis asa aeaa a A MAR RR e E 6 86 SOURce INPut BERT THReshold sss nennen enne nnne rra nnns nnn nnne nn 6 87 SOURce INPut CONTrol IMPedance iiie ii ii sisse ia RR ha latinae 6 31 SOURce I
85. exception in the firewall remote control via LAN is possible only if the firewall is completely switched off Therefore the firewall settings for remote control differ from the firewall settings for file transfer see following description Setting for Remote Control Start Control Panel Switch to Classic View Windows Firewall Off not recommended Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is helping to protect your PC Windows Firewall helps protect pour computer by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to your computer through the Intemet or a network Q O On recommended This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored Y ou Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders What else should know about Windows Firewall NOTICE Risk of hostile users or programs It is recommend to enable the Windows Firewall again after termination of remote control via LAN setting On recommended in order to protect the instrument from an attack of hostile users or programs via the net 14
86. for auto login when the instrument is started and for manual remote control The password is also instrument By assigning the respective rights the network administrator decides which directories and resources in the network can be accessed by the R amp S AFQ 1401 3078 62 1 26 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN The configuration of the R amp S AFQ for networking is performed in the Windows XP menus The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and or mouse and a external monitor are connected Operation by mouse only without the external keyboard is possible if the on screen keyboard is used To ensure recognition of the external devices the instrument has to be switched off prior to connecting them 1 Switch off instrument 2 Connect external keyboard and or mouse and external monitor to the USB interface 3 Switch on instrument 1 Open the start menu either by pressing the Windows key on the keyboard next to the Ctrl key or by moving the mouse to the bottom of the display and subsequent clicking on Start All Programs gt File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q o Ds E rar Fe ve Control Panel Pick a category D Switch to Classic view e T a gt E Appearance and Themes ao Printers and Other Hardware A ki gt See Also Mos Network and Internet Other Control Panel j Conc User Accounts Options 5 Date Time Language and Add
87. frequency gain phase value triplets The associated button Edit Data calls up the list editor to edit the current list whose file name is displayed To select another one click on List Data then Select List or New List which will open the Select List or the New List dialog respectively The selected list is displayed If no list has been selected a blank list of only one row is displayed H Insert Fill Goto Row s Save As Save The value pairs are entered in the Frequency Hz Gain dB and Phase deg table columns A blank row is inserted at the end of the list New rows can be inserted anywhere in the table by means of the Insert Fill Row s button After the list has been edited i e changed it can be saved under its current name by means of the Save button or under a new name by means of the Save as button Only complete value pairs are taken into consideration rows containing an entry in only one column are ignored An existing list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode A new list can be created under a new name either by generating a blank file in the file select menu see section File Management on page 3 25 or by changing an existing list which will then be saved under a new name 1401 3078 62 3 21 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Editors Function PC keyboard Mouse Call up editor Mark the Edit Data button in the individual Click on the Edit Data button in
88. from logic 0 to 1 causes a partial result to be generated and the measurement to be stopped A transition from 1 to O starts the measurement for the next subinterval This measurement is synchronized anew If the instrument is used as a data source a signal in which a single 1 was coded at the end of the data sequence can be used as a restart signal at the instrument marker output This causes the BER measurement to stop briefly at the end of the data sequence and start again Partial results number of data and error bits are added up until the predefined total number of data or error bits is reached or exceeded The measurement is reset by Pattern Ignore or Data Enable regardless of its status The reset signal for the BER measurement is generated internally This setting is suitable for PRBS sequences that run continuously and thus ensure uninterrupted repetition BERT SET REST STAT ON the external signal restarts the measurement 1401 3084 32 6 68 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT SETup TYPE PRBS9 PRBS11 PRBS15 PRBS16 PRBS20 PRBS21 PRBS23 Selects the PRBS sequence The data generated by the PRBS generator is used as a reference for the measurement Example B ERT S ET TYPE PRBS15 sets a pseudo random binary sequence consisting of 32767 bits BERT STARt Starts a continuous measurement This command triggers an event and hence
89. function of an IEC IEEE bus controller Interface commands can be further subdivided into the universal commands the addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without previous addressing Addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in section EC IEEE Bus Interface Functions on page 5 34 If an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The IEC IEEE bus interface commands are emulated see VXI 11 Interface Messages on page 5 38 1401 3084 32 5 14 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Interface and Device Messages Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII character set is used If an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The device messages are equal for the different interfaces IEC IEEE bus and Ethernet A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device Program functions and request information Messages The commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru
90. help pages The sequence of the described functions corresponds to their position in the dialogs Back button The Back button calls up the page last viewed Contents in the navigation panel The contents list is used to open the individual help pages It has a hierarchical structure The highlighted line indicates where the currently displayed page is within the contents list Index in the navigation panel The index is used to call up all pages which contain the selected entry The index has an alphabetical structure and also contains all IEC IEEE bus commands The buttons are used to determine the entry focus for front panel operation to select the content of the navigation window and to change the font size To determine the entry focus for front panel operation the Cursors UP Down are used The links are highlighted in blue and can be selected and called up using the rotary knob 1401 3084 32 4 102 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Index Tree Back Scroll Left Scroll Right Zoom in Zoom out 1401 3084 32 General Instrument Settings Switches the navigation window display between the contents tree and index entries The input focus must be in the left hand navigation window Remote control command Contents tree Index The contents tree is the The index contains an alphabetical contents list of the help system list of all terms which refer to The cursor always highlights functions of the instrument For the entry whi
91. hex They affect all instruments connected to the bus without addressing Visual Basic command Effect on the instrument IBCMD controller CHR 20 DCL Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting Interface Clear IBCMD controller CHR 17 Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 24 Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 25 Serial Poll Disable IBCMD controller CHR 21 Ge Poll Unconfigure Table 5 7 Universal Commands Addressed Commands Locks switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys Ready for serial poll End of serial poll End of the parallel poll state The addressed commands are encoded 00 OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners VISUAL BASIC Command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device GET IBTRG device Group Execute Trigger IBLOC device Go to Local IBPPC device data96 EE Poll Configure Table 5 8 Addressed Commands 1401 3084 32 5 35 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting Triggers a previously active device f
92. in amplitude of the signal components In the vector diagram the length of the vector changes relative to the length of the Q vector 1401 3084 32 4 40 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Impairments Block Entering a gain for the signal means that the vector is amplified more than the Q vector by the path of the input amplifier 11 1 0 0 0 Quadrature o N 1 uU D DW it D 4 06 0 8 1 0 1 1 08 06 04 02 00 02 04 05 08 11 Inphase ift 8 6 4 2 41 Entering a gain for the Q signal means that the Q vector is amplified more than the vector by the Q path of the input amplifier Quadrature alt 1 0 347 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 08 06 04 02 00 02 04 06 08 143 Inphase ift Remote control command SOUR IMP GAIN I 1 5 SOUR IMP GAIN Q 0 1 1401 3084 32 4 41 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Offset Q Offset 1401 3084 32 Impairments Block Sets a DC component in the or Q path The accessible data range depends on the settings of the Gain text box After entering the gain the instrument calculates the accessible data range of the offset displaying the range in a small yellow flyout window when moving the mouse in the Offset text box The reason is the instrument will not output an amplitude exceeding 1 0 full scale An ideal UO modulator suppresses the carrier leakage completely offset O percent If an offset is entered for a component a carrier leakage with fixed ampl
93. in via the TRIG connector on the rear panel The active slope is selected under Slope Remote control command SOUR TRIG SOUR EXT Bus Sync mode Master and Normal only The trigger event is executed by remote control 4 15 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Execute Trigger Delay Trigger 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block using either the command GET TRG or TRIG EXEC Remote control command SOUR TRIG SOUR BUS Auto Sync mode Master and Normal only The trigger event is executed internally by the firmware Signal output starts immediately when a signal is loaded and State is on Trigger events are ignored Remote control command SOUR TRIG SOUR AUTO Trigger source manual only Executes the trigger manually A manual trigger can be executed only when a manual trigger source has been selected Trigger Configuration Run Mode Continuous D Enable Retrigger iv Source Remote control commands SOUR TRIG SOUR MAN SOUR TRIG EXEC Sets the trigger signal delay on external triggering This enables the instrument to be synchronized with the device under test or other external devices A delay can onl y be entered with an external trigger source Source External Delay 0 000 000 000 000 s 0 000 000 000 000 s D Positive Remote control command SOUR TRIG EXT DEL 5 4 16 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Inhibit Trigger Slope Trigger 140
94. iq fgp Remote control commands MM SO SO SO 1401 3084 32 EM CDIR d user Equalizer UR EQU IQ CAT UR EQU IO I SEL corr i UR EQU 10 Q0 SEL corr q 4 52 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Select List New List File Manager Equalizer Block Selects an existing equalizer table Remote control command n a Creates a new equalizer table Remote control command n a Opens a dialog for managing all files File Manager All Files 3gpp fdd K242 wv SineTriRectMarker 3gpp fdd K242 Noise s wv Waveforms The File Manager dialog consist of several areas The File Type entry field enables to select specific file types Only the relevant files with the selected file extension are displayed All Files displays all files that are saved in the currently selected path The available paths are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed in the status line of the path window If the File Manager dialog is opened several times the path last selected is displayed Each table is saved to the hard disk as a separate file with the file ending afq iq fgp The file name and the directory to which the file has to be saved are user selectable The extension is saved automatically and cannot be entered Remote control command n a Edit Data Opens the currently loaded Q data tabl
95. level When the editing mode is exited with Esc the previous value is restored F1 Help Opens closes context sensitive help On Screen Keyboard Windows XP operating system provides a keyboard emulation that can be used for system settings if no external keyboard but a mouse is plugged in It is called on the external monitor in the START Programs Accessories Accessibility menu selection On Screen Keyboard On Screen Keyboard Fie Keyboard Settings Help esef Fi F2 F3 Fa Md rs rel F7 ra d ro FIO Cd ech brk a ifafafelsfof7fofofofe El oe fins nmi tab a wj e IE pers E ajlslajrlsinjilk rijs a ew EXE visieclvielole Au ctrl e alt CIN alt e ctrl 1401 3078 62 3 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Operating Concept Operating Concept The operating concept for manual control enables the user to make settings as intuitively as possible and at the same time gives a permanent overview of characteristics of the generated signal and of the current instrument state Numerous on line help functions support user settings The block diagram is the core of the operating concept A large graphics display showing the current configuration and the signal flow in the form of a block diagram is the core of the operating concept The block diagram gives an overview of signal configuration and the graphical elements can be accessed for operation The desired element is selected by means of the cursor keys and
96. mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the mains In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropria
97. plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde 8 Schwarz 1171 0000 42 08 Page 14 Quality management and environmental management Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich f r den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produk tes entschieden Sie erhalten damit ein nach modernsten Fer tigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitats und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt gefertigt und gepr ft Rohde amp Schwarz ist unter ande rem nach den Managementsys temen 1509001 und IS
98. rate is output in exponential notation with the exponent 3 or 6 SClentific The error rate is output in scientific notation i e standardized to one place to the left of the decimal PCT The error rate is output in percent PPM The error rate is output in parts per million Example BERT UNIT PPM selects the unit ppm for the display of the error rate Device specific SOURce INPut BERT IMPedance G50 G1K The command sets the impedance of the BERT inputs Clock Data Data Enable and Restart Example INP BERT IMP G50 the impedance of the BERT inputs is set to 50 ohm to ground Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 70 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce INPut BERT THReshold 0 2 0 V The command sets the high low threshold of the BERT inputs Clock Data Data Enable and Restart In the case of positive polarity this threshold determines the point as of which a signal is high active or low inactive Example INP BERT THR 1 V a high low threshold of 1 volt is set at the BERT inputs The signal is high active for a signal voltage of 1 volt and higher Device specific TRIGger BERT IMMediate The command triggers a BERT measurement This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TRIG BERT IMM triggers a BERT measurement Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 71 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Setup Secti
99. see table OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all Setting bit O in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ previous commands have been executed Stops command processing until 1 is returned This is Sending OPC directly after the command whose only the case after the Operation Complete bit has processing should be terminated before other been set in the ESR This bit indicates that the commands can be executed previous setting has been completed WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command whose commands sent before WAI have been executed processing should be terminated before other commands are executed Table 5 1 Synchronization with OPC OPC and WAI 1401 3084 32 5 25 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System Status Reporting System The status reporting system cf Figure 5 2 Overview of status registers stores all information on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the error queue The the error queue can be queried via IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet The information is of a hierarchical structure The register status byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its associated mask register service request enable SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with the associated mask register stan
100. settings of a vector signal generator Note Frequency shift plus signal bandwidth must not exceed 100 MHz The icon Af is displayed between the Baseband block and the Impairments block when a frequency offset is defined Frequency Offset Enters the IF modulation frequency frequency offset in Hz Remote control command SOUR FOFF 1E6 1401 3084 32 4 39 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Impairments Block Impairments Block Introduction Impairment of the digital UO signal can be used for example to compensate the distortion of a test object or to check the effect of a distorted signal on a test object The UO Impairment dialog for setting the digital UO impairments is opened either in the Impairments function block or by selecting Impairments in the Edit menu Impairment Settings Dialog E 1 0 Impairments E K ber Gs I Gain ooo dB y Q Gain 0 000 dB y 1 Offset 0 000 FS y Q Offset 0 000 FS y Phase Error 0 00 deg State Switches l Q impairment On or Off Remote control command SOUR IMP STAT ON Gain dB Q Gain Sets a gain in the or Q path respectively dB The entry is made in dB where 1 dB offset is roughly 12 according to the following Imbalance dB 20xlog Gaing Gain An ideal UO modulator amplifies the and Q signal path by exactly the same degree The imbalance corresponds to the difference in amplification of the and Q channel and therefore to the difference
101. the The cursor marks the first row of the Frequency Hz column Enter dialog and press the key individual dialog Enter value Use the numeric keys to enter the value and terminate the entry by pressing the Enter key Change column Press the left right cursor keys Click on the cell Change row Use the up down cursor keys to mark the row Click on the cell Select row The cursor moves to the selected row Enter Mark the GoTo button and press the key Use the numeric keys to enter the row index and terminate the entry by pressing the Enter key Click on the cell Insert row A row is inserted above the currently marked row If no row has been selected a row is inserted at the beginning of the list Select the row above which the new row is to be inserted Mark the Insert Row s button and press the Enter key Click the row above which the new row is to be inserted Click on the Insert Row s button Save list under a new name Mark the Save as button and press the Enter key Enter the file name in the menu Create List File Which Name and select the directory see section Select Save Lists File Management on page 3 28 Double click on the Save as button Enter the file name in the menu Create List File Which Name and select the directory see section Select
102. the case of some mobile radio standards pure 0 or 1 bit sequences are generated when errors are detected within a frame e g an incorrect checksum These sequences instead of the frame data are provided for the BER measurement and signalize that the frame in question should not be used for the measurement The instrument ignores sequences of 32 bits or longer Note While ignoring the bits the PRBS generator for the BER measurement keeps running Following the 0 or 1 sequence the BER measurement is continued as if the ignored sequence had contained PRBS data If Pattern Ignore is switched on synchronization time is 32 bits longer If Pattern Ignore and External Restart are active at the same time the measurement terminates immediately when the restart signal is applied None of the 32 bits within the Pattern Ignore detector is evaluated If Data Enable and Pattern Ignore are active at the same time Data Enable is given priority i e bits that are not enabled are not examined for 0 or 1 sequences 1401 3084 32 4 80 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Example Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block 50 bits were set to 0 by the DUT These 50 bits plus the preceding 0 are ignored in the bit error rate measurement PRBS at Generator PRBS at DUT Output BER active Threshold Impedance 1401 3084 32 Drop Out of DUT These bits are ingored
103. the instrument can be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable Interface Characteristics 8 bit parallel data transfer bi directional data transfer three line handshake high data transfer rate up to 15 instruments can be connected maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m single connection 2 m wired OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel 941410600900 ATN IFC NRFD EOI D2 DO GND SRQ NDAC DAV D3 D1 J Se p d d LA NN AC CN GND 24 E GND 20 GND 18 D7 GND 23 GND 21 GND 19 REN D6 D4 Figure 5 1 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE Bus interface 1401 3084 32 5 32 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bus Lines Data bus with 8 lines DO to D7 Remote Control Hardware Interfaces The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DO is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear ATN Attention SRQ Service Request REN Remote Enable EOI End or Identify active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller active LOW permits switchover to remote control has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HI
104. this point the fourth value is output with 1 terminate measurement if the result is queried with BERT RES lf the continuous measurement mode BERT SEQ AUTO has been selected the measurement is restarted once the results have been queried Example BERT SET MCO 1E6 sets a measurement over 1000000 data bits 10 000 000 Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 67 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT SETup MERRor 0 0 2 32 1 Enters the number of errors to occur before the measurement is terminated This termination criterion always terminates the measurement after the specified number of errors Starting from this point the fourth value is output with 1 terminate measurement if the measurement result is queried with B Example ERT RES BERT SET MERR 1E4 sets a measurement over 1000 errors BERT SETup RESTart STATe ON OFF Activates deactivates an external restart of the BER measurement Parameters Example ON OFF The reset signal for the BER measurement is fed via the Restart input of the BERT interface If the PRBS sequence cannot be continued uninterruptedly the BER measurement must be stopped at the end of the data sequence and subsequently restarted at the beginning of the new data sequence The measurement is stopped and started via a 0 1 0 slope of the Restart signal A transition
105. two words with a width length of 16 bits each Every word will be passed over along with a clock signal Connector The pins are assigned as follows AFQ B18 Port 2 PARALLEL DATA LVDS p LVDS n LVDS p LVDS n Pin Pin Pin Pin Bit 0 LSB 35 Bit 0 LSB 18 52 Bit 1 36 Bit 1 19 53 Bit 2 37 Bit 2 20 54 Bit 3 38 Bit 3 21 55 Bit 4 39 Bit 4 22 56 Bit 5 40 Bit 5 23 57 Bit 6 41 Bit 6 24 58 Bit 7 42 Bit 7 25 59 Bit 8 44 Bit 8 27 61 Bit 9 45 Bit 9 28 62 Bit 10 46 Bit 10 29 63 Bit 11 47 Bit 11 30 64 Bit 12 48 Bit 12 31 65 Bit 13 49 Bit 13 32 66 Bit 14 50 Bit 14 33 67 Bit 15 MSB 51 Bit 15 MSB 34 68 Clock 43 Clock 26 60 LVDS p und LVDS n are a pair of wires lines The signals have to be transmitted at a differential impedance of 100 o and terminated appropriately to avoid signal reflections Note Because of large clock rates and high slew rates a proper cabling is necessary Avoid impedance discontinuities and branch lines The differential line should be terminated properly 100 Q and the resistor must be as close as possible to the line end Clock and data are in phase this means the rising clock slopes edge coincide with the transitions between two consecutive symbols Furthermore the clock can be inverted hence the falling clock slope coincides with the transitions between two consecutive symbols see chapter 4
106. type of measurement single or continuous measurement Auto Single 1401 3084 32 Continuous measurement of bit error rate If either or both of the termination criteria are met the measurement in progress is terminated and immediately a new one is started automatically Depending on the settings made a measurement may take considerable time During the first measurement intermediate results are displayed For the measurements that follow only the final results are shown The parameters Data Bits and Errors are continuously updated and indicate the relative values for the measurement in progress Remote control command BERT SEQ AUTO Single measurement of bit error rate The measurement is started by clicking the Execute Single button If a measurement is in progress the current values of Bit Error Rate Errors and Data Bits are cyclically displayed The measurement is terminated when either or both of the termination criteria have been reached To start a new measurement the Execute Single button must be clicked again Remote control command BERT SEQ SING TRIG BERT IMM R amp S AFQ100A Max Data Bits Max Errors PRBS 1401 3084 32 Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Enter the number of transmitted data bits to be checked before the measurement is terminated This criterion terminates the BER measurement after the specified number of data bits even if very few errors or
107. y GPIB VXI Interface 4 Serial Interface TCP IP Res GPIB Interface y lt Back Next gt US Cancel b 1401 3084 32 5 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control 4 Enterthe IP address of the R amp S AFQ and select VXI 11 Instrument the computer name may be entered instead Create New Measurement amp lt A Automation Explorer N Enter the TCP IP address of your VISA network resource in the form of xxx xxx xxx xxx the name of the computer or a computer some domain 127 0 0 1 Choose the type of TCP IP resource you d like to create C Raw Socket Port Number F e VXI 11 Instrument LAN Device Name I Try connecting to this resource lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 5 Press the Test button A message indicates whether the link to the R amp S AFQ can be set up or not If a connection cannot be set up check whether the controller and the instrument are connected to the network network cable and switched on Correct spelling of the IP address or the computer name can also be checked For further error location inform the network administrator In large networks specification of additional addresses may be required for link setup e g gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network administrator MAX E HB AN Successfully opened a VISA session to TCPIP 127 0 0 1 INSTR HAX E E AN Could not open a VISA session to TCPIP 127 0 0 1 INSTR
108. 0 Query interrupted ssuuss 9 9 410 Query unterminated 9 9 5 50 Extern reference out of range or disconnected sss 9 5 A ADOMM DUO cial ee ee er 3 101 Aborting a calculation ss 3 101 AC supply EUSe DOX ie eee redes 1 16 Power Conechor 1 16 Power sw tch 1 16 Adjust All etas 4 252 6 88 Amplitude Digital output essssssssss 4 229 6 75 Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 168 6 13 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 171 6 10 Analog oufpufe er eri a E eat AEREE 1 14 ARB Arbitrary Waveform Generator 4 162 Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB 4 163 Assemblies display 4 253 6 90 A ans ea ees 5 24 B BERT s DERBI 6 79 BERT inp ls tois 1 17 A 2 dente ain 1 18 DATA aid dd 1 18 DATA ENABL cuicos 1 18 PHOP iini nen 1 17 RESTART oe iet rel 1 18 Segment address 1 17 EOI AA 4 227 Bit Error Rate Measurement 4 232 6 79 Block data aee 5 23 1401 3084 32 10 8 Index Block data not allowed 168 9 2 Boolean parameter sss 5 21 BUSY LED atenta 1 10 C Channel x AND ects eeeenaes 4 192 Character data 5 20 Character data not allowed 148 9 2 Character data too long 144 9 2 Check box Geld 3 96 Clock mput TES 1 20 REP 5 dt t ete e t eg 1 20 e
109. 0 309017 000000 0 000000 951056 poen The decimal values in SICO TXT should be normalized such oct P that they are between 1 0 and 1 0 309017 951056 The waveform file SICO WV will be based on the contents of 000000 1 000000 this file 309017 0 951057 587785 0 809017 809017 0 587785 951056 0 309017 000000 0 000000 951056 0 309017 809017 0 587785 587785 0 809017 309017 0 951057 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1401 3084 32 6 22 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation To be read by the instrument these waveform data must be coded binary and packed into an appropriate WAVEFORM tag A tag consists of a name and a data set and is enclosed in curved brackets The tag is a kind of label carrying information about what the instrument should do with the data set see above and step 3 of the following instructions The following steps outline how to create the waveform file SICO WV Step 1 The values from the file SICO TXT must be converted into binary format consisting of integer numbers without a sign and with 16 bit width The numeric range between 1 0 and 1 0 corresponds to the modulation range of the waveform D A converter of 65535 2 1 1 0 gt 32767 Ox7FFF 0 0 gt 0 0x0000 1 0 gt 32767 0x8001 A further C program is suitable for creating the binary data set from the ASCII values stored in SICO TXT file see following example for creating a C program This
110. 000 data bits 5 error bits were measured yielding an error rate of 0 005 1401 3084 32 6 64 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT SEQuence AUTO SINGle Selects the type of measurement single or continuous measurement Parameters AUTO Continuous measurement If one or both termination criteria are met the measurement in progress is terminated At the end of a measurement the restart of a new one is delayed until the first measurement result has been queried with BERT RES The resulting brief measurement interruption is irrelevant because the subsequent measurement will be synchronized within 24 data bits SINGIe Single measurement A single measurement must be started with TRIG BERT A single measurement is terminated once the set number of data bits blocks or number of errors is reached Example BERT SEQ SING selects single measurement TRIG BERT starts the single measurement RST value Resolution Dependencies These commands are Device specific automaticaly set to AUTO by BERT STARt BERT SETup CLOCKk POLarity RISing FALLing Sets the polarity of the active slope of the feedback clock Parameters RISing the positive slope of the clock signal is active FALLing the negative slope of the clock signal is active Example BERT SET CLOC FALL selects the falling slope of the clock signal as the active slope
111. 01 3084 32 5 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller The instrument control is via the VXI 11 standard protocol Only the IP address or the computer name is required for link setup The IP address computer name is part of the resource name used by the programs for identification and control of the instrument The resource name has the form TCPIP ipaddr inst0 INSTR ipaddr has to be replaced by the IP address or the computer name of the instrument For instance if the instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 TCPIP 192 1 2 3 inst0 INSTR is the valid resource name Specification of instO in the resource name is optional In this example also TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR is therefore a valid resource name A resource name with computer name could be TCPIP RSAFQ100Axxxxxx INSTR for instance TCPIP designates the network protocol used and INSTR indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource name The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource name In the example below the program Measurement amp Automation Explorer from National Instruments is used for setting up an Ethernet remote control link Link setup with this program is easy and first tests can be performed The R amp S AFQ is preconfigur
112. 084 32 9 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Annex Contents Chapter 10 Annex 10 Pls a 1 Alphabetical List of Commande sss 1 Index 33 de dte teo etti dte a ect ed d Least 10 7 1401 3084 32 1 10 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands 10 Annex Alphabetical List of Commands B EE 6 79 LTE e 6 81 BERT SETUup CLOCKEPO Lara a 6 81 BERTESETUp DATA POLarity r nit tr RARE ABER PER ed naga 6 82 BERT EE Nee Eeler e dL UR ta 6 82 ET RRE 6 83 BERT SETup MGQunt d Rie ele EE 6 83 BERT SETUp MERROF voii E ea Eee x EYE EEN een oa En cd 6 84 BERT SET p RESTart STATe aiti a naa 6 84 BERT SETUD TYPE cat sii ehe edenda toits este t b epar eu Pee laden donde den peque de 6 85 BERTISTARIGCA iip dee Be RO o bait aee it dee etin a 6 85 BERT STATO i bet A lation A A rb int poca dedo da a riveree 6 85 BERT eene egene enin eternamente ice ien asta ats 6 86 BER TAONIT x iiti Ri a n Bet mum RR RUN A n LS a 6 86 C CAELibration ALEF MEASUre 5 ti scel serbe eerie iH CHER eH Pa coe Ha eo coe etude P qe gute ed 6 88 CA bration AO Tout CH AMPDL gude cnn cnc nnne nnne nan rns nnne nnn 6 88 CALibration A OUTput CH DELay orriren aaea EA EAE AE nennen nns annes eaae nene nent 6 89 D DIAGnostic MEA Sure POIN ssessesssssesss sees eene nnr inen nna ia REAT ea AEAT E ETRA nent 6 92 DIAGnostic AOUT put PON RR 6 90 DIAGnostic AOUTput POINECA Tal0g osineen aa EEA enne enne enean enean nens 6 90 DIAGnostic BGIN O
113. 0A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN 3 Select tab Exceptions and activate check box File and Printer Sharing Confirm entry with Ok Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is tured off Your computer is at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as the Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services Name File and Print O Message Queuing O Remote Assistance O Remote Desktop O Run UltrevNC SERVER O UPnP Framework Add Program Add Port Delete Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions 1401 3078 62 1 32 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN Accessing Directories in the Network Access to network drives depends on access rights and whether the drives in question have been enabled The complete integration of the R amp S AFQ into a larger network with the necessary allocation of rights is highly complex and normally performed by a network administrator However the hard disk of a computer also connected to the network can be accessed from the R amp S AFQ relatively easily The only precondition for this is that the desired directory the R amp S AFQ should access is enabled on the remote computer Subsequently this directory is accessed from the R amp S AFQ using a Windows XP sea
114. 1 3084 32 Baseband Block Sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event subsequent to triggering A restart can only be inhibited with an external trigger source Source External Delay 0 000 000 000 000 s Inhibit 0 000 000 000000 s Slope Positive In the Retrigger mode every trigger signal causes signal output to restart This restart is inhibited for the specified number of samples Remote control command SOUR TRIG EXT INH 10 Selects the slope of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigger signal is fed in via the TRIG connector on the rear panel The slope can only be selected with an external trigger source Positive The rising edge is selected Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge is selected Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block The Segment Trigger Configuration section is where the trigger for the switch between the segments of a multi segment waveform is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on the selected trigger source This section is indicated only if a multi segment waveform is loaded Segment Mode Trigger 1401 3084 32 Sets the segmented trigger mode of a multi segment waveform The segmented trigger mode defines the switch between the segments of the multi segment waveform The regular trigger mode for starting the waveform generation is se
115. 1 6 E 3 RES AFQ100A Legend for Rear Panel View Legend for Rear Panel View This section gives an overview of connectors on the rear panel of the R amp S AFQ they are explained clockwise starting on the top of the left hand side Each connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet Fig 1 2 Rear panel view 1 LAN interface LAN See data sheet and Ethernet interface section Connecting For integrating the instrument in a network the R amp S AFQ to a Remote control of the instrument Network LAN on Manual remote control of the instrument page 1 25 and Firmware update chapter 5 section LAN Connector and chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface 1401 3078 62 1 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Legend for Rear Panel View 2 IEC IEEE bus connector IEEE 488 ECH 3 AC supply 1401 3078 62 IEC 625 IEEE 488 See data sheet and IEC bus IEEE 488 interface for remote control of the chapter 5 section R amp S AFQ IECAEE Bus Interface See data sheet and section Connecting the R amp S AFQ to the AC Supply on page 1 16 Power switch The power switch can be set to two positions 0 The instrument is disconnected from the mains The instrument is power supplied It is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode depending on the position of the ON
116. 100A Connecting an External Keyboard Connecting an External Keyboard A commercial external keyboard with USB interface can be connected to the R amp S AFQ A keyboard is a prerequisite for manual control of the instrument and for operation of Windows XP without a Remote Desktop connection to an external PC The keyboard is connected to one of the USB interfaces type A either at the front panel of the instrument or at the rear panel The keyboard can be connected while the instrument is running rebooting is not required NOTICE Remember the USB connectors maximum load of 0 5 A USB connectors at the front panel USB connectors at the rear panel The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected The UK keyboard assignment is the default setting The keyboard assignment and special settings such as the refresh rate can be changed in the Start Control Panel Keyboard or Regional and Language Options menu of Windows XP The menu can be accessed by pressing the Windows key on the external keyboard Note A keyboard emulation can be called from the Window XP operating system START Programs Accessories Accessibility On Screen Keyboard With the On Screen Keyboard it is possible to manually operate the instrument using the mouse only 1401 3078 62 1 23 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting a Mouse Connecting a Mouse A commercial mouse with a USB interface can be connected to the R amp S AFQ A mouse simplifies control
117. 1119 The pattern bits switch the marker signal to high and low state Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE PATT SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PATT 11F 4 29 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A OnTime Off Time Marker List Marker Baseband Block Marker signal output Ratio only Sets the number of samples for the ON time and the OFF time respectively On 1 Samples oft 1 Samples A period of the marker signal lasts one on and off cycle Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE RAT SOUR TRIG OUTP1 OFFT 30 SOUR TRIG OUTP1 ONT 20 Marker signal output List only Enters a pattern of samples for the marker output signal The samples are assorted by entering either particular samples or sample ranges each defined by the sampleindex and the signal value 0 1 The arguments are separated by A hyphen between the start and the end sampleindices of a sample range A colon between the sample index and the value A semicolon between the argument entries Example 20 1 50 0 60 70 Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE LIST SOUR TRIG OUTP1 LIST 1 100 1 101 0 102 200 1 The delays for the marker output signals are entered in the Marker Delay section Delay Marker 1401 3084 32 Enters the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs and the start of the signal The input is expressed as a number of samples which refer to the data table of the current wavef
118. 123454 iv Prior to the first use the instrument and user ID of the R amp S AFQ must be entered on the external PC The instrument ID i e the computer name of the R amp S AFQ identifies the R amp S AFQ in the network Each R amp S AFQ is assigned a computer name in the factory which can be used for manual remote control The query for the computer name is described in section Query Computer Name The user name and the password is required for accessing the R amp S AFQ On the R amp S AFQ instrument is preset as the user name and password No entry need be made in the Domain field 3 Enterthe instrument and user name and the password of the R amp S AFQ in the General tab of the extended menu which is opened with the Options button SJ Remote Desktop Connection gh Y General Display Local Resources Programs Experience Logon settings a Type the name of the computer or choose a computer from the drop down list Computer Name123456 v Username instrument Password eeeeeeccce Domain C Save my password Connection settings a Save current settings or open saved connection 1401 3078 62 1 37 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller 4 Login data can be stored with the Save As button If the login data is stored as a default rdp file the connection to the R amp S AFQ is offered as the default when the program is sta
119. 1401 3084 32 6 65 E 3 1401 3084 32 6 66 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT SETup DAT A POLarity NORMal INVerted Sets the polarity of the feedback data bits Parameters NORMal High level stands for a logic 1 low level for a logic 0 INVerted Low level stands for a logic 1 high level for a logic 0 Example BERT SET DATA INV sets inversion of data signal BERT SETup DENable OFF LOW HIGH Activates deactivates the use of the Data Enable signal and the polarity of the signal if it is used The Data Enable signal marks the data that is actually to be evaluated for the BER measurement Any data in addition to the PRBS sequence is masked and thus not evaluated e g sync preambles other channels etc that are present in the data bits supplied by the DUT Parameters OFF Not Used Any signal at the Data Enable input is ignored all data at the BERT data input is used for the measurement LOW The Data Enable signal is used The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a low level of the Data Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a high level of the Data Enable signal HIGH The Data Enable signal is used The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a high level of the Data Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a low level of the Data Enable signal Example BERT SET DEN HIGH the measureme
120. 29 E 3 RES AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN Query Computer Name 1 Open the start menu select My Computer and open the context menu by pressing the right mouse key INStTUnent All Programs gt cu My Computer Open Explore gt Control Panel Search Manage 4 Search Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive 2 Click on Properties and select the Computer Name tab in the menu a Rename Show on Desktop The computer name is displayed under Full Computer Name The name can be changed in the Change submenu System Properties t3 System Restore Computer description Full computer name Workgroup To rename this computer or join a domain click Change Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Name Hardware Advanced Windows uses the following information to identify your computer on the network For example Kitchen Computer or Mary s Computer Name123456 INSTRUMENT To use the Network Identification Wizard to join a Network ID domain and create a local user account click Network A Changes will take effect after you restart this computer 1401 3078 62 1 30 E 3 RES AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN Configuring Internet Connection Firewall The Windows XP Firewall blocks all network communication which is not initialized by the controller itself or w
121. 32 6 13 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation 1401 3084 32 6 14 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce WAVeform CATalog LENGth This command reads out the number of files in the default directory for waveform files Only files with the file extension wv will be counted The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example WAV CAT LENG reads out the number of files in the default waveform directory Response 1 there is 1 file in the default waveform directory Device specific SOURce WAVeform CATalog This command reads out the files in the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory When the names of the waveform files are returned they are separated by commas Only files with the file extension wv will be listed The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR D user waveform sets the default directory to D user waveform WAV CAT reads out all the files in the default directory Response sinl wave the directory D user waveform contains the waveform files sinl wv and wave wv Device specific SOURce WAVeform DATA waveform filename gt lt binary data block This command writes the block data binary data block to the file identified by waveform filename The IEC bus delimiter should be set to EOI when this is done in order to en
122. 32 6 42 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth WIDE NARRow Reference clock external only The command sets the synchronization bandwidth e the target range of the synchronization circuit Parameters NARRow A narrow synchronization bandwidth is selected the synchronization circuit works slowly but with less jitter WIDE A wide synchronization bandwidth is selected the synchronization circuit works fast Example ROSC EXT SBAN WIDE sets a wide synchronization bandwidth NARRow Device specific SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command sets an internal or external reference oscillator source Note The Internal Reference Clock Source is available only in the reference clock synchronization modes Normal and Master If the instrument is set to Slave or Last slave mode the reference clock source is set to External Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects an external reference oscillator source INTernal Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 43 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce ROSCillator SYNC MODE NORMal MASTer SLAVe LAST The command selects the mode for synchronization with other R amp S AFQ waveform generators Note The synchronization of several connected AFQ waveform generators requires the baseboard version 1 6 or higher Up to baseboard version 1 5 only synchronization mode Normal is provided sta
123. 4 32 4 86 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Remote control commands OPT Response AFQ B18 AFQ K6 AFQ K80 AFQ K242 AFQ K243 AFQ K244 AFQ K245 AFQ K246 IDN Response Rohde amp Schwarz AFQ100A 1400 3003k02 000000 2 1 65 0 02 09 285 Release E Software Options AFQ100A Base Software 02 09 285 10 beta Debug 2008 06 11 01 13 02 RES COMPASS 2 1 65 0 Debug Digital IO Output 1 Digital IO Output 4 Digital IO Output 3 Digital IO Output 2 Pulse Sequencer Bit Error Rate Tester Dig Std GSMEDGE Dig Std 3GPP FDD Dig Std 3GPP Enh BS MS Test incl HSDPA Dig Std GPS Dio Std HSUPA Pah Module Version Description C Progr ComponentEnvironmentServer exe 2 1 65 0 Component of C Progr qtmt338 C Progr RsComponentShell dll 2 1 65 0 Component of C Progr RsParameter dll 2 1 65 0 Component of AA DeDrint AMT la ARENA A at The Firmware section of the window shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform 1401 3084 32 4 87 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings The tables in the sections Hardware Software and WinIQSIM list the installed hardware and software options Option Short name of the option Designation Name of the option Licenses Number of licenses Expiration Date Expiration date of the option For regular options Permanent is indicated
124. 4 savrcl loads the file Test4 savrcl inthe USER directory of the internal hard disk RCL 4 activates the instrument setting of the file Test4 savrcl 1401 3084 32 6 82 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section MMEMory MDIRectory directory name The command creates a new subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to create a directory tree The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MDIR carrier creates the subdirectory carrier in the current directory SCPI Device specific MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt file_destination gt This command renames an existing file if no path is specified for lt file_destination gt Otherwise the file is moved to the specified path and stored under the original file name or if specified a new file name Itis also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt msus_source gt lt file_destination gt lt msus_destination gt The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MOVE testl savrcl keepl savrcl renames the file test1 savrcls as keep1 savrcl MMEM MOVE testl savrcl lafq onelkeepl savrcl moves the file test1 savrcl to the subdirectory
125. 5 17 M Maintenance nnn 8 1 Mantissa sie 5 20 Manual operation return to 5 6 5 13 Manual Trigger ARD 6 32 1401 3084 32 Index Manually remote control 1 44 Marker MARKER 1 4 1 19 ARB ku 4 191 CHANNEL xXx 5uaes nih eds 4 192 6 46 Current Range without Recalculation 4 196 D6lay i iie ec pe a S 4 195 6 43 oi tia 4 194 4 195 6 45 OMOT lime nier 4 195 attert i e eee 4 193 4 194 PU mtus 4 193 Pulse divider esses 4 194 RAMO Ez 4 193 Restart ee ete eres 4 192 Unchanged enn 4 192 Max Data Bits BERT 4 243 6 83 Max Errors BERT sss 4 243 6 84 Memory clock CIOCK SOUCO n oA EEE 4 198 Fregtuench A iieiea ie 4 198 Memory clock external 4 198 6 51 Memory clock internal 4 198 6 51 Recommended frequency range 4 198 Input Slope tps 4 198 Input slope negative ssss 4 198 Input slope Dositive 4 198 Measured external clock 4 199 Missing parameter 109 ss 9 8 Mode BERT 4 242 6 81 MONITOR connector esses 1 18 MOVO 55h tte etu ter gd eta 4 281 Multi Segment Repeat Count 6 38 Multi segment waveform 4 180 CLOCK input vis aie eet 1 18 DATA Input 1 18 leie 1 17 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Multi seg
126. 8 62 3 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Operating Concept To offer the user a familiar environment operation is very similar to the operation of Windows user interfaces All dialogs and tables are made up of known elements e g selection lists Channel 1 Unchanged e Unchanged Channel 2 Restart Channel 3 pattern Channel 4 List Fix Delay To Current Range Y On check boxes or entry fields Amplitude 100000 v H A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active In the highlighted element entries can be made Clear settings with the aid of independent dialogs A separate dialog window is opened for each menu item The dialogs can be operated independently of each other i e none of the dialogs requires that settings in other dialogs have to be completed before it can be closed This ensures flexible operation at all times The Winbar gives an overview of dialogs and simplifies their access The dialogs are displayed on top of the block diagram but they can be hidden i e displayed in the form of a button in the Winbar of the main window Ctrl H key combination This corresponds to Windows task bar and makes room on the screen for other displays that may be required but the setting dialogs can thus be accessed any time UO Impairments The keys are assigned simple functions Most key combinations directly perform a simple function Since a great number of settings can thus be made b
127. 84 32 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Examples SOURce TRIGger SOURce EXTernal This command contains key word SOURce in the first and third command level SOURce TRIGger SEGMent SOURce EXTernal This command contains key word SOURce in the first and fourth command level Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked by square brackets in this manual The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by omitting optional key words Note An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified in detail by a numeric suffix Examples SOURce TRIGger EXTernal DELay 10 This command sets a trigger delay of 10 seconds Or TRIGger DELay 10 This command has the same effect The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Note Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case letters Example TRIGger DELay 10 TRIG DEL 10 Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma A few queries permit the parameter
128. AFQ Commande Setup Section MMEMory DCATalog LENGth path This command reads out the number of subdirectories in the specified directory If no directory is specified the directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM DCAT LENG reads out the number of subdirectories in the current directory Response 3 there are 3 subdirectories in the current directory SCPI Device specific MMEMory DELete lt file_name gt This command deletes the specified file The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM DEL D USER TEST1 SAVRCL deletes the file Test1 savrc1l in the USER directory on the internal hard disk SCPI Compliant MMEMory LOAD STATe 4 lt file_name gt This command loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory The Instrument must be activated using an RCL command with the number used after the file has been loaded see section Introduction Common Commands page 6 1 Example SAV 4 stores the current instrument setting in an intermediate memory with number 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 D NuserNtest4 savrcl stores the instrument setting stored with the SAV command under memory number 4 in the file Test4 savrcl inthe USER directory of the internal hard disk MMEM LOAD STAT 4 D NuserNtest
129. AG 3V3 DIAG 5V DIAG 12V DIAG N12V DIAG_AUX1 RF_POWER Ej The currently selected key is shown next to the Select button Remote control commande DIAG AOUT POIN CAT Response list of the available test points DIAG AOUT POIN DIAG AUXI With remote control voltage measurement starts as soon as the test point is selected Displays the measured voltage measurement at the selected test point on the analog output board Remote control command DIAG AOUT POIN DIAG N12V Response 2 Sets the fan speed Auto Default setting for fan speed Remote control command DIAG FCON AUTO Full Speed Full speed mode provided for service purposes Remote control command DIAG FCON FSP 4 95 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Memory Access Setup Test Setup Edit Help System b Remote b The Memory ACCESS dialog can be selected in the Test section of the Setup menu Note The Memory Access test is provided for service purposes and therefore described in chapter 3 of the service manual section Trouble Shooting The service manual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument Memory Test Setup Test Setup Edit Help System gt Diagnostic Remote Memory Access Protection gt Memory Test The Memory Test dialog can be selected in the Test section of the Setup menu 3 Memory Test Test Method Hardware y Memory Size Detect zl detected Size
130. Autoexec iec send i e executing GPIB commands The instrument will process remote control commands saved in an ASCII text file named Autoexec iec on an USB memory stick By launching such a command file the user can test GPIB commands without connecting a control PC Destruction hazard Starting executables other than autoexec iec might destruct the instrument We recommend to test GPIB commands using this function only NOTICE 1401 3078 62 3 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display Display The external display shows the current modulation generator state and offers graphical elements for direct operation It is divided into three sections The header along with an info line reports the current state with status error and warning messages The block diagram shows the instrument configuration the signal characteristic as well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphical user interface Active dialogs and graphs are displayed on top of the block diagram The winbar of the main window with labelled softkeys for dialog display EX AFQ100A Base Band Source CEV File Setup Edit Help waveform Sine test signal e 3 01 las Amplitude 1 000 v gt Info Marker 1 Unchanged 2 Pulse 3 Pattern 1401 3078 62 3 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display Status Information and Messages Display The status information and messages are displayed in the header section of the screen The messages
131. CREate NAMed waveform filename The command generates a sine test signal and stores the file on the local hard disk HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG TSIN CRE NAM D temp test wv writes the generated waveform file to test wv on the HD Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 FREQuency The command queries the resulting frequency of the two sine waves The values of both components of the test signal are queried separately The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example TSIG TSIN1 FREQ TSIG TSIN2 FREQ queries the resulting frequencies of the sine waves 1 and 2 Response 12 MHz for sine wave 1 and 18 MHz sine wave 2 Device specific SOURce TSIGnal TSINe TLENgth 20 256000 This command enters the number of sample values of a waveform 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Example SOUR TSIG TSIN TLEN 10000 the waveform is stored by 10000 values Device specific
132. Click on Previous or Next Select an item in the table of contents The help page of the item is displayed Activate Content window using the cursor keys left right Select the desired item using the cursor keys and activate with Enter Set indicated area by moving the vertical scroll bar Click on the item Select an index term The help page of the term is displayed Select the Go to Index button using the cursor keys and activate with the Enter key Enter the first letter of the term and press the Enter key Select the term with the cursor keys and press the Enter key Click on the Go to Index button Set indicated area by moving the vertical scroll bar Click on the term Shift the indicated area of the navigation window to the left or right Shift the entry focus up one level using the Esc key Select Scroll Right or Scroll Left button using the cursor keys and activate with the Enter key Set indicated area by moving the horizontal scroll bar 1401 3078 62 3 24 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Management File Management The instrument uses files to save all instrument data i e system and user data The user data includes saved instrument settings data for the different digital standards lists for the List mode and the user correction as well as the waveforms for multcarrier
133. E bus address Setup menu Password and settings protected by passwords Setup menu Start Stop Gui Update Setup menu Display and keyboard settings Setup menu Save and Recall settings KA A KKK 1401 3084 32 4 82 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Setup Menu This section describes the settings which do nat directly affect the signal generation They affect various functions such as storing instrument settings or setting the IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument Most of these settings can only be accessed by means of dialogs which are opened using a keyboard Selecting Setup in the windows toolbar opens the Setup menu used to set the general instrument parameters and to configure the instrument interfaces Setup Edit Help System gt Test gt Remote b Protection gt Security gt Factory Preset gt Internal Adjustments Setup System Setup Edit Help system of Internal Adjustments For calibration the Internal Adjustments Dialog can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu The R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generator is extremely accurate thanks to the integrated procedures for adjustments All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed can be started in the Internal Adjustments dialog The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Adjustment is recommended if the temper
134. External Restart BERT Extemal Trigger Delay ARB External Trigger Inhibit ARB File list File Management ARB File menu File type selection Firmware version Messages indicate the current instrument state A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen With the aid of the Ctrl 1 key combination help pages can be called for most of the messages They provide background information on the message and indicate operating steps that may be required All messages are explained in the online help which can be called with the 1401 3078 62 F1 key 3 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Operating Concept Automatically Launching a Program or a Command File RSAutoLaunch is a program which handles messages of the operating system which are sent when the user plugs in or removes devices such as drives or USB memory sticks The program will start executable files which are automatically detected After plugging in an USB memory stick the instrument looks for executable or command files and processes them immediately Depending on the kind of file found the instrument performs the following file action Autoexec exe start asynchronous R amp S service use only Autoexec cmd start synchronous R amp S service use only Autoexec bat start synchronous R amp S service use only
135. FHOP serial to mark the end of a data sequence LSB Bit 0 LSB input in mode FHOP parallel 1401 3078 62 1 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Legend for Rear Panel View 5 Monitor MONITOR ANALOG The 15 pin Sub D female connector is intended for connecting an external VGA monitor with an analog input MONITOR ANALOG Gun 6 USB connectors type A USB 2 1 One USB 2 0 universal serial bus and one USB 1 1 interface of type A host USB Connection of peripherals such as mouse and keyboard Connection of memory stick for file transmission Firmware update The interface establishes a connection to the controller 7 USB interface type B IN One USB 2 0 universal serial bus interface of type B hence the instrument is assigned as device not as host This connector may be used for remote controlling the instrument 8 Marker 1 4 MARKER 1 4 R amp S AFQ provides four marker outputs for triggering and controlling external devices The marker signals are either contained in the waveform or are user defined in the Marker dialog 1401 3078 62 1 10 See data sheet and section Connecting an External Monitor on page 1 24 See section Connecting a Mouse on page 1 23 and section Connecting an External Keyboara on page 1 23 See data sheet See data sheet and Marker Dialog E 3 RES AFQ100A Legend for Rear Panel View 9 Next yo NEXT See data sheet and LJ Ty H Di O This trigger
136. GH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid NRFD Not Ready For Data NDAC Not Data Accepted 1401 3084 32 active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus 5 33 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Remote Control Hardware Interfaces IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions The following table lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument Ie Handshake source function source handshake full capability e rat sucio capo renare Mea a immersion eme maestum CN I CIL NN o Reset function Device Clear full capability e recio Davie Tse Muy i Need Table 5 6 IEC IEEE Bus Interface functions IEC IEEE Bus Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active LOW They are used for communication between controller and instruments and can only be sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC IEEE bus 1401 3084 32 5 34 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Universal Commands Remote Control Hardware Interfaces The universal commands are encoded 10 1F
137. Hz The digital signal is resampled in realtime 1401 3084 32 4 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Baseband Block The settings for activation and configuration of the external or internal waveform signal can be accessed in the block diagram via the Baseband function block or by selecting Baseband in the Edit menu cong A Iv ARB Dialog The dialog for setting the Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB can be opened in the Baseband block of the main window clicking the config button and selecting ARB Trigger Marker Clock At Af The ARB dialog is used for powering up selecting the ARB waveform and for configuring a sinusoidal rectangular or a continuous test signal Load Waveform sinus25Khz Sine Testsignals Rect Testsignals Table Sine Testsignals Test Pattern State ARB Switches on and off the ARB modulation The output is based on the waveform file that is loaded The name of the waveform file is indicated in the header section of the display If no waveform file is loaded the ARB modulation cannot be powered up None will be displayed next to Load Waveform Additionally a message is displayed in the info line of the status bar asking the user to load a waveform file Error message displayed in the info line Settings conflict no or empty waveform selected Remote control command SOUR STAT ON 1401 3084 32 4 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Bloc
138. I Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Query interrupted 410 This query has been interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Query unterminated 420 This query is missing or incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Query deadlocked 430 This query cannot be processed Example The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot be operated SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Self test failed 330 An error was detected in the selftest named after the semicolon An error free operation of the module concerned is no longer guaranteed SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Settings conflict 221 There is a setting conflict between the two parameters indicated after the semicolon The set FSK deviation is too large for the selected symbol rate Example Remedy One of the given values has to be corrected to obtain a valid output signal SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register String data not allowed 158 The command contains a legal string data
139. IG OUTP1 MODE REST 1401 3084 32 4 27 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Pulse Pattern Ratio Baseband Block A regular marker signal strobe is generated The pulse frequency is defined by entering a divider The frequency is derived by dividing the sample rate by the divider When Pulse is selected an input box for the divider and the resulting pulse frequency are displayed see also Divider Marker on page 4 29 Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE PULS SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PULS DIV 4 SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PULS FREO A marker signal that is defined by a bit pattern is generated The pattern has a maximum length of 32 bits and is defined in an input field When Pattern is selected an additional button indicating a binary number appears on the right Clicking on this button the input field for entering the the pattern opens see also Pattern on page 4 29 Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE PATT SOUR TRIG OUTP1 PATT 11F A regular marker signal that is defined by an on off ratio is generated A period lasts one on and off cycle Start of signal ON time OFF time ON time OFF time When Ratio is selected the input boxes for entering the ON OFF time are displayed see also OnTime Off Time on page 4 30 The ON time and OFF time are each expressed as a number of samples On 1 Samples Off 1 Samples Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE RAT
140. IQ selects the data tables EQU IQ STAT OFF switches off the UO corrections Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator CATalog LENGth This command queries the number of files containing equalizer data tables for the modulator saved on local hard disk The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example EQU MOD CAT LENG queries the number of files containing equalizer data tables for the modulator SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 52 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer MODulator CATalog This command lists all files containing equalizer data tables for the modulator saved on local hard disk The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example IMEM CDIR d user Equalizer sets the default directory EQU MOD CAT lists all files containing equalizer data tables for the modulator SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer MODulator DELete lt FILE NAME gt This command deletes an equalizer data table for the modulator from local hard disk The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU MOD SEL test mod selects the file test mod afq mio to be deleted EQU MOD DEL test mod deletes the file test mod afq mfg from HD SCPI Device specific
141. IXed ON The command is a query only and therefore has no RST value Example TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range TRIG OUTP DEL MAX queries the maximum of the dynamic range Response 4000 the maximum for the marker delay setting is 4000 samples Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay MINimum The command queries the minimum marker delay for setting TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON The command is a query only and therefore has no RST value Example TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range TRIG OUTP DEL MIN queries the minimum of the dynamic range Response 0 the minimum for the marker delay setting is 0 samples Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt LIST The command defines the pattern of samples used to generate the marker signal in the setting TRIGger OUTPut MODE LIST for the selected marker output Example SOUR TRIG OUTP1 LIST 1 100 1 101 0 102 200 1 The signal starts with value 1 from position 1 start index to position 100 end index By the sample position 101 the signal changes to 0 and during the sample range positions 102 to 200 the signal is set to 1 again Alias remote control command SOUR MARK1 LIST 1 100 1 101 0 102 200 1 UNCHanged Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 37 E 3 R am
142. MOTE is displayed in the status line The instrument remains in the REMOTE mode until local control is selected either manually with the Ctrl Q key combination on the external keyboard or with the interface command amp GTL via the remote control interface Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument settings In the remote control mode an external mouse or keyboard that may be connected can be disabled with the keyboard lock command SYST KLOC ON Dialogs cannot be opened in this case and switchover from remote control to manual operation is only possible by means of a remote control command Inadvertent switchover with the Ctrl Q key combination is not possible in this case Operation of the Ctrl Q key combination alone can be disabled with interface command amp LLO 1401 3084 32 5 4 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus To be able to control the instrument via the IEC IEEE bus instrument and controller must be linked by an IEC IEEE bus cable An IEC IEEE bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller The controller must address the instrument with the set IEC IEEE bus address The IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory set to 6 It can be changed via IEC IEEE bus with command
143. Marker Clock At Af 1401 3078 62 3 11 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display The input output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used inputs and outputs of the modulation generator Unused inputs and outputs are not shown The lines indicate the signal flow Symbols and labels refer to the corresponding inputs and outputs on the front and rear panel of the modulation generator The direction input or output is indicated by an arrow Example The symbols indicate the outputs for the analog and Q signal on the instrument front panel The symbols indicate the outputs for the analog and Q signal on the instrument front panel The marker characteristics are listed next to the marker symbol of the active markers Symbols and lines are displayed in different colours depending on their function Marker 1 Restart 2 Pulse 3 Pattern 4 Ratio gt Jee M 5 en e The baseband signal is indicated by a three line arrow the l and Q components of the signal by a single line arrow Black is used for the generated signal Green is used for control signals 1401 3078 62 3 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display Winbar and Softkeys Display The Winbar with eight buttons is displayed below the block diagram Labelled buttons represent open dialogs the label indicates the dialog If several dialogs are open the button of the currently active dialog is displayed in a lighter colour
144. NPut CONTrol THReshold e iirrainn eE eene eene nnns nnns nnne enn nnn na 6 32 SOURce INPut TRIGger SEGMent SLOPE sessi eene enne enne nnne nnn 6 32 SOURGe JINPut TRiGoer St Oe 6 32 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog lt CH gt AMOD ipene taseine ean enne nennen sn nnne nnns nnn 6 71 SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced AMPLitude sse 6 71 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced B AS cccccccccesccecestscecssseceeessneceeessneeeseesneeeesssneeesssseesenes 6 71 L OUb ce OU Tur ANA og CH BAL anced DAG SrAIe seen 6 71 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH BALanced OFFSet l seen 6 72 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH BALanced OFFSet Q sss 6 72 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH TYPE o e int de dee a Re E TN YT eae x di 6 73 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH UNBalanced AMPLitude esses 6 73 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH UNBalanced OFFSet l ssssssse eene 6 73 SOURce JOUTPut ANALog CH UNBalanced OFFSet Q esses 6 73 1401 3084 32 10 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands ISQURGe JOUTPUut AOUTp l 3 3 eo t dt a io ak is e E vegies tdiaes 6 74 SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH AMPLitude sss sss 6 75 SOURce JOUTPut DIGital lt CH gt CLOCK SLOP6 sesenta 6 75 SOURce OUTPut DIGitale CH OFFSet l esses esent 6 75 SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH OFFSet Q sess sisse esee enne nnn nnn 6 75 SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH PA SS
145. NPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative SOURce TRIGger EXECute No query SOURce TRIGger MODE CONTinuous SINGle REPeatN SOURce TRIGger RCOunt 1 100 SOURce TRIGger RENable ON OFF Query only SOURce TRIGger RMODe SOURce TRIGger SEGment DELay 0 10 sec SOURce TRIGger SEGMent EXECute SOURce TRIGger SEGMent INHibit 0 10 sec SOURce TRIGger SEGMent MODE CONTinuous SEAMIess SINGle REPeatN SOURce TRIGger SEGMent RCOunt 1 100 SOURce TRIGger SEGMent SOURce MANual EXTernal BUS AUTO SOURce TRIGger SOURce MANual EXTernal BUS AUTO SOURce TRIGger EXTernal DELay 0 10 sec SOURce TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 0 10 sec SOURce WSEGment z Query only SOURce WSEGment NEXT z ooo o SOURce WSEGment NEXT Mode AlNCrement FPARallel FSERial SOURce INPut CONTrol IMPedance G50 G1K Clock source external only Sets the impedance for the three inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT segment trigger The lower value is recommended for high clock frequencies The meanings of the abbreviations G50 and G1k are 0 05 kQ and 1 00 kQ respectively Example INP CONT IMP G50 sets the input impedance to 50 Q Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 27 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce INPut CONTrol THReshold 0 2 V Clock source external only Sets the high low threshold for the three inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT segment trigger Example INP CONT TH
146. O Local Lockout SPE Serial Poll Enable SPD Serial Poll Disable PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure Table 8 2 Universal Commands Addressed Commands IBCMD controller CHR 20 IBCMD controller CHR 17 IBCMD controller CHR 24 IBCMD controller CHR 25 IBCMD controller CHR 21 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting Interface Clear Locks switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys Ready for serial poll End of serial poll End of the parallel poll state The addressed commands are encoded 00 OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners VISUAL BASIC Command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device GET IBTRG device Group Execute Trigger IBLOC device Go to Local IBPPC device data Ges Poll Configure Table 8 3 Addressed Commands 1401 3084 32 8 5 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting Triggers a previously active device function e g a Sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal inpu
147. O 14001 zertifiziert Der Umwelt verpflichtet 1 Energie effiziente RoHS konforme Produkte 1 Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte 1 ISO 14001 zertifiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem Dear customer You have decided to buy a Rohde amp Schwarz product This product has been manufactured using the most advanced meth ods It was developed manufac tured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental manage ment systems Rohde amp Schwarz has been certified for exam ple according to the ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 management systems Environmental commitment 1 Energy efficient products 1 Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability 1 150 14001 certified environmental management system Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde amp Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d velop pement la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont t effec tu s selon nos syst mes de management de qualit et de management environnemental La soci t Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu e entre autres conform ment aux syst mes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001 Engagement cologique 1 Produits efficience nerg tique 1 Am lioration continue de la durabilit environnementale 1 Syst
148. OI NIS eei niinniin rana aia ta tha aneafi i enai kiirii apain ia rii anarad 6 20 SOURCE WAVeGfOMM PURGC i seccsticcecsetedencnsediecetenscetnesad dacdenautenhesadeacetadaddensuaddeeetalederssuaddarnnadeestnesadennes 6 21 LSOUbcefWAVeiomm GEI ect 6 21 SOURce WAVeform TAG Pic a Do B E ER ee da 6 21 1401 3084 32 10 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands SQURCE WSEGMENE EE 6 40 SOURGCe IWSEGmentNNEXT 5 3 sinh Side a ha e ita tie aieo aeos 6 42 SOURce WSEGment NEXT MODBE isses eene rn 6 42 STATus OPERation CONDition eese esses einen nm 6 103 STATUs OPERalioniENABI6 5 net a 6 104 STATus OPERalion EVENI rr pega ett eee a ea eau eda edere 6 105 STATus OPERation NTRansition eese AAE nn rsen naar senes enar nnns 6 104 STAT s OPERation PTRansition 1 2 d RU da d EL ate 6 104 STATUS IPRESOLD ovis dis A eed hebt tesi ebat 6 105 STATus QUEStionable CONDition esses etnies nasse nennen nnne nnns 6 105 STATUs QUESItionable ENABle o ro ba Rd er Tub E pe b o A pays 6 106 STATusOUESztonabie EWEN 6 107 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition nn nn 6 106 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition eese E enne enn nnne nnns 6 106 STATUS QUEUO NEXT EE 6 107 SYSTem COMMunicate GPDIGL SEL ET AfDtDtdess essent nennen nnne nnns 6 109 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator cnn iiia aaan nennen
149. OM and LabVIEW drivers are available in the download area of the R amp S product website http www rohde schwarz com product AFQ 100 1401 3084 32 5 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Getting Started Getting Started The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions As a prerequisite the IEC IEEE bus address which is factory set to 28 must not have been changed 1 Connect instrument and controller using IEC IEEE bus cable and switch them on 2 Write and start the following program on the controller Dim defaultRM As ViSession Dim status As ViStatus Dim vi As ViSession Dim Cmd As String Dim retCount As ViUInt32 Dim ErrorDescription As String VI FIND BUFLEN status viOpenDefaultRM defaultRM Open default resource manager If status VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit status viOpen defaultRM Open connection to instrument GPIB 6 INSTR 0 5000 vi If status lt gt VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Cmd RST CLS WAI Reset instrument and clear status Ms registers status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount If status VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit Cmd OUTP STAT ON Switch on output status viWrite vi Cmd Len Cmd retCount If status VI SUCCESS Then GoTo ErrorExit
150. OUTPut STATe ON OFF This command switches on off the active output Example OUTP STAT ON switches on the selected output Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 62 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT Block This subsystem contains the commands for the bit error rate measurement If the BERT feature is required choose instrument option K80 Command Parameters Default unit mw A CT Berson AWojmds A S PRBS21 PRBS23 eem OPCS eem EI JL BERT RESult Queries the result of the last BER measurement The response consists of seven results separated by commas In the first measurement following the start intermediate results for the number of data bits data blocks error bits errors and error rate are also queried In the following measurements only for BERT SEQ AUTO only the final results of each single measurement are queried Note At the end of a measurement the restart of a new one is delayed until the first measurement result has been queried with BERT RES The resulting brief measurement interruption is irrelevant because the subsequent measurement will be synchronized within 24 data bits This command is a query and has therefore no RST value 1401 3084 32 6 63 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Parameters Example Value 1 Number of checked data bits data blocks Value 2 Number of error bits errors Va
151. Operating Manual RZ Q 100 1 0 MO LATION G NERATOR error 7 IQ Modulation Generator R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3003K02 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement 1401 3084 32 04 1 This document describes the R amp S AFQ100A stock no 1401 3003K02 and its options The software contained in this product makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet http www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp SO is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S AFQ100A is abbreviated as R amp S AFQ 1401 3084 32 04 2 Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde 8 Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our product
152. R 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Questionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVEN part SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVEN part of the register This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 88 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section STATus QUEStionable EVENt The command queries the content of the EVEN part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the Status Questionable Event register SCPI Compliant STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see chapter 9 Error Messages
153. R 0 temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savracl STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory D NUser contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcl and waveform wv which have different file types 1401 3084 32 6 79 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Setup Section MMEMory CATalog LENGth path This command reads out the number of files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out on the default drive selected with the MMEM MSIS command The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CAT LENG e reads out the number of files at the highest directory level of the memory stick Response 1 there is 1 file at the highest directory level of the memory stick SCPI Device specific MMEMory CDIRectory directory name This command changes the default directory This directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them It is also possible to change to a higher directory using two dots Example MMEM CDIR test changes from the current directory level to the subdirectory test SCPI Compliant MMEMory COPY lt source gt lt destination gt This command copies the first specified file to the second specified file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to
154. R 0 78 sets the input threshold to 0 78 V Device specific SOURce INPut TRIGger SEGMent SLOPe POSitive NEGative This command selects slope of the active edge of the external trigger signal of the list mode The external trigger signal is fed in via the NEXT connector on the rear panel A slope can be set only when the trigger source External is selected Example INP TRIG SEGM SLOP POS sets the segment slope to positive POSitive Device specific SOURce INPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative This command selects the slope of the active edge of the external trigger signal The trigger signal is fed in via the TRIG connector on the rear panel Example INP TRIG SLOP POS sets the slope to positive POSitive Device specific SOURce TRIGger EXECute The command generates a trigger event However this is possible only if the trigger source Manual is selected This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TRIG EXEC generates a trigger event Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 28 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger MODE CONTinuous SINGle REPeatN The command selects the trigger mode e continuous single or repeating the waveform for a defined number of outputs After a trigger event the waveform will be output continuously or once Parameter Continuous The waveform is output continuously Retrig
155. R OUTP AOUT DIGITAL1 DIGITAL2 In the following first the settings for the analog output and then the settings for the digital output are described 1401 3084 32 4 57 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block Analog Output The parameters offered in the Analog Output dialog depend on the selected output type balanced or unbalanced Two different amplitude modes Electronic or Attenuators are available They determine how precise the signals will be adjusted SS Output State Active Output Analog Out y Active Output Analog Out y Ta 1o00 w gt Amplitude osofv gt Amplitude Mode Attenuators v Amplitude Mode Electronic y Offset oofm y Offset 0 0 mv gt Q Offset 0 0 mV Q Offset 0 0 mV Enable Bias lv Bias 0 000 V Type Analog output only Selects the type of the analog output The output dialog changes depending on the selection Balanced Differential output at the and I BAR Q and Q BAR outputs The analog UO signal components are output at the Q and I BAR Q BAR connectors on the front panel of the instrument A bias for setting the operating point of the DUT can be defined In addition an offset between the inverting and the non inverting output can be set to balance a difference of the best operating points Thus the R amp S AFQ provides symmetrical signals for differential inputs of DUTs without needing external electric network additionally 4 Vost Ee Level e
156. R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section DIAGnostic POINt CATalog The command queries the test points available in the instrument The test points on the analog output board are queried with command DIAG AOUT POIN CAT Note A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example DIAG POIN CAT queries the test points available for the analog output Response DIAG GND DIAG P5V DIAG P3V3 p pa Jae E Device specific DIAGnostic MEASure POINt The command triggers voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured voltage A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument A list of the available test points can be queried using the DI AG POIN CAT command The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example DIAG MEAS POIN DIAG P5V triggers measurement at the above test point Response 0 0 the voltage at the test point is 0 0 volts Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 76 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section Mass Memory Subsystem The MMEMory subsystem Mass Memory contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and stor
157. R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section In the example below the current instrument setting is always stored in the file test1 savrcl in the directory user on the internal hard disk SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 d NuserNtestl savrcl If the complete path including the drive letter is specified the file is stored in the specified path MMEM MSIS d SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 NuserNtestl savrcl If the parameter only contains the path and file name the default drive set with the MMEM MSIS command is effective MMEM MSIS Vai MMEM CDIR user SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 testl savrcl If the parameter only contains the file name the file is stored on the default drive MMEM MSIS andin the default directory which was selected with the MMEM CDIR command Table 6 1 List of file extensions assigned automatically in Instrument List type Contents File suffix Instrument State Instrument State Instrument settings savrel Arbitrary Waveform Generator Waveform Multi segment waveform ARB waveforms WM Multi Segment Configuration Configuration information for multi segment waveforms inf_mswv These files are loadable readable only Equalizer List UO Data the instrument uses for correction dm Tod Modulator Data the instrument uses for correction dm iqc Mass Memory Command Table WwwoycWmeg Jom TT IE O A TT EE oe
158. RES resets the status registers SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Questionable Condition register SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 87 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section STATus QUEStionable ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER ENAB 1 problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVEN part of the register This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER NT
159. Remote control command RST Choose a file to open Look in afq lists A SineTriRectMarker 2 waveforms My Recent B SaveRecallTest savrcl Documents 3 Desktop My Documents 9 fisch bi on MUB OCFE My Network File name s aveRecallTest savrcl aces Files of type Save Recall Files savrcl Open Opens the window Choose a file to open for calling up a stored instrument setting Look in Selects the directory in which the file with the instrument setting is located Remote control command MMEM CDIR d user File List All files containing instrument settings are listed in the selected directory Remote control command MMEM CAT File name Selects the configuration If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used Remote control command MMEM LOAD STAT 4 d Ntest savrcl RCL 4 1401 3084 32 4 105 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Save Choose a filename to save under File of type Open Cancel Storing and Loading Instrument Data Only instrument setting files with the file extension savrcl Save Recall Files a
160. SOUR TRIG SEGM MODE SING Multiple output of the waveform segments Each segment is repeated as often as the segment Repeat Count of the particular segment is set see Repeat Count on page 4 22 Run Mode Continuous TRIG NEXT The next segment starts to be output after a segment trigger event After finishing the waveform the instrument switches to the idle mode Either a segment or a regular trigger event restart signal generation Run Mode Single TRIG NEXT The next segment starts to be output after a segment trigger event After finishing the waveform the instrument switches to the idle mode The waveform output can be restarted by switching off and then switching on the ARB state in the Baseband Block R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Repeat Count Segment Trigger Source Segment Trigger 1401 3084 32 Repeat N Times Run Mode Repeat N Times TRIGA Y NEXT The next segment starts to be output after a segment trigger event After finishing the waveform the instrument switches to the idle mode A regular trigger event restarts signal generation Signal generation is repeated as often as the Repeat Count for the waveform is set see Repeat Count Trigger on page 4 15 Then signal generation stops Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM MODE REP Segment mode Repeat N Times only Sets the repeat rate for each particular segment of a multisegment waveform The repe
161. STANDBY switch on the instrument front AC power connector When the R amp S AFQ is connected to the AC supply it automatically sets itself to the correct range for the applied voltage range see type label There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses Fuse box The fuse box containing two fuses is between power connector and switch 1 8 E 3 RES AFQ100A Legend for Rear Panel View 4 BERT See data sheet and chapter 4 section Trigger Dialog Four BERT inputs The BERT connectors either receive clock and data signals for measuring a bit error rate or they receive control signals for segment hopping FHOP while generating multi segment waveforms The sequence for segment hopping can be fed in parallel or serial Note The FHOP mode disables the BERT functionality and vice versa The FHOP mode requires the hardware revisions Baseboard 2 Rev 5 00 and SFB gt Rev 01 05 05 CLOCK Clock input from a DUT Clock input in mode FHOP serial Bit 3 MSB input in mode FHOP parallel DATA Demodulated data from DUT Data input in mode FHOP serial Bit 2 input in mode FHOP parallel RESTART This signal repeats BER measurements with short signals The signal is not used in mode FHOP serial Bit 1 input in mode FHOP parallel DATA ENABL This signal labels the payload of the data hence header or guard signals do not contribute to the BER Strobe input in mode
162. Since Factory Preset resets the remote channel and network settings to the default values executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to the instrument if these settings had been configured to values different to the default ones The Factory Preset function resets nearly all instrument settings In addition to the regular preset by means of the PRESET key a Factory Preset resets also the following values Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator dialog Network settings including hostname Setup dialog Remote Channel settings including IEC IEEE bus address and emulation Setup dialog Start Stop Gui Update Setup dialog Display and keyboard settings Setup dialog 9 1 To maintain security password settings and all settings protected by these passwords like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed Not affected by the Factory Preset are also user data lists or instrument settings files created for example by means of the Save Recall function Remote control command SYST FPR Help Menu The help system offers comprehensive online help for the instrument A desired topic can be selected via the table of contents select Manual or the index select Index For context sensitive information about a marked parameter press the F1 key 1401 3084 32 4 101 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings The F1 key opens a browser window containing a context sensitiv
163. The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command STB or a serial poll The STB is linked to the SRE The latter corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers in its function Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a Service Request SRQ is generated on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using command SRE and read using SRE Meaning Not used Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with Remote MAV bit Message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can
164. The TYPE tag identifies the file as a valid instrument file It must be present and must be the first in the waveform If a file of the same name already exists on the target medium it is overwritten Note AMIQ waveforms can also be loaded on the R amp S Signal Generator where they are converted internally into an R amp S Signal Generator waveform magic magic designates the file type and has the following values SMU WV The file contains a valid waveform XXXXXXXX Xxxxxxxx is an ASCII coded checksum of the data part of the WAVEFORM tag in the file The checksum for waveforms is used for detecting transmission errors If the TYPE tag contains 0 or a non numeric value for the checksum it is ignored It is calculated in accordance with the following algorithm where start is a pointer to the first byte after the character in the WAVEFORM tag and length is the number of bytes between start and the closing curly bracket excluding the latter length must be divisible by 4 without a remainder UINT32 checksum void start UINT32 length UINT32 i result OXABOF74FF for i 0 i length 4 i result result UINT32 start i return result Example TYPE SMU WV 106656 IEC bus query WAV TAG TYPE queries the content of the TYPE tag Response SMU WV 106656 this is a valid waveform CLOCK frequency mandatory for waveforms The tag specifies the clock frequency at wh
165. The cursor is either set on the next higher dialog level or the dialog is closed The left right cursor keys first shift the entry focus within the dialog range from left to right or vice versa in the example from the directory tree to the file list Press again and the entry focus is shifted up one dialog level Enter performs a setting In the example of the file select dialog Load Waveform this is the display of the subdirectories if a directory is marked and if a file is marked the selection of this file After a file has been selected the dialog closes automatically The Esc key moves the cursor to the next higher dialog level Function PC keyboard Mouse Selects a dialog area Select a dialog area using the cursor keys Press the Enter key The dialog area is selected by selecting The cursor keys up down move the cursor an entry only within the selected dialog area Exits a dialog area Press the Enter key The cursor keys move the cursor between The dialog area is exited by setting the different dialog areas cursor on an item outside the area 1401 3078 62 3 18 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Terminating Entries Setting Parameters Setting Parameters Variations by means of the cursor keys are immediately set e g delay settings All other parameter settings have to be confirmed by a pressing the combinations
166. Trigger mode Repeat Count only Enable Retrigger Trigger Source Trigger 1401 3084 32 Sets a repeat rate for restarting the waveform after a trigger event occurs The waveform can be repeated up to 100 times provided that Enable Retrigger is set see Enable Retrigger Trigger on page 4 15 Remote control command SOUR TRIG RCO 10 Selects whether a following trigger event resets the current signal output The minimum time interval between two retrigger events amounts to 10 us plus 25 memory clock symbol periods Remote control command SOUR TRIG REN ON Note For multi segment waveforms Enable Retrigger is always on Selects the trigger source Switching between the segments of a multi segment waveform is triggered by a segment trigger The segment trigger is configured separately in the Segment Trigger Configuration section of the dialog Note If the instrument is connected with further R amp S AFQ LO Modulation Generators all instruments which are set to Slave and the Last Slave can be triggered External only Synchronization mode see Sync Mode Reference Clock on page 4 34 Manual Sync mode Master and Normal only The trigger event is executed by the Execute button or by pressing the TRIGGER key on the front panel Remote control command SOUR TRIG SOUR MAN External The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigger signal is fed
167. URce TRIGger OUTPut 1 42 PATTern esses sessanta 6 48 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 42 PULSe DilVider sss 6 48 L OiUlf ceft RiGoer OU TPut Dt As DUL Se tbREOuenc nnns 6 48 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut DELay FlIXed rn n nn nr rn nn rra 6 43 ISOURCe Ee E ET 6 35 6 38 SQURce TRIGger RENable 2 eee A A a ia 6 35 L OUb ceffbRiGoerRMcOfenz nn rra nnne nnns nan nr rr sane rr rra rr rra nares nnns nnn 6 35 1401 3084 32 10 4 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of Commands SOURce TRIGger SEGMent DELay sss senes nennen nennen 6 37 SOURce TRIGger SEGMent ECvECute sss esee enses eene rn nennen nns 6 37 L OUlbceffbiGoer StGMent NH 6 37 SOURce TRIGger SEGMent MODE sss sensns nr 6 38 SOURce TRIGger SEGMent SOURTce sisse enne eene rn nnne nnne nnns 6 39 SQURce TRIGger S OURC 3 n et i eot RR M ce a Heo EL bee E Messed 6 39 SOURce TTSIGnal GEOGCK ito latent UO ta ME ERR EE HERR aaa 6 9 SOURce TSIGnal PAT Tern CREate EEN 6 9 SOURce TSIGnal PATTern CREate NAMed eiii iiie se asa saa ia iaa ra tha ha a sa saa a a A ARR A IA AR 24224 6 9 SOURCe TT SIGHal PAT Ternil a Ste di id di 6 9 SOURce ILSIGnaEPATT6rniQ ia a niet e ter ee ae eed etnies 6 10 SOURce TSIGnal RECT AMPLitude esses seines rn 6 13 SOURCe TSIGnal RECT CRE ate isses eias tanen rm 6 13 SOURc
168. USB type B connector at the rear panel b via a PC running Matlab or R amp S WinlQSIM2 software Note The latter possibility only applies to forthcoming versions of the instrument A Windows software package WinlQSIM2 is available for generating external waveform 2d files on a PC it is included among the items and services supplied with the instrument WinlQSIM2 can process very large data arrays Furthermore the instruments loads waveform files calculated by the previous software release A file in the Wavebase 2 directory on the WinIQSIM2 CD ROM contains a selection of predefined waveforms completed with their descriptions It is also possible to transfer signals that have been calculated using a mathematical program such as Matlab see also Application Note 1MA28 IQWizard I Q Signal Measurement and Conversion which can be obtained by visiting the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at http www rohde schwarz com 1401 3078 62 2 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Contents Manual Operation Contents Chapter 3 Manual Operation 3 Manual Operation E 3 1 Introduction Manual Operation 3 1 Legend of Manual Controls scarsie aeaa E REAA E enne 3 1 On Screen Keyboard 4 isis seine edente edited naa 3 2 Operating Concept 3 3 Automatically Launching a Program or a Command File 3 6 DISPlAY EE 3 7 Status Information and Messages Dieplay 3 8 Info Window Display 3 9 Block Diagram Display 3 11 Winba
169. Windows on page 4 108 Note If a file is selected marked the file name is entered automatically in the entry field File name Then the current data will overwrite a the data in the file Each table is saved to the hard disk as a separate file with the file ending afq iq fgp The file name and the directory to which the file has to be saved are user selectable Remote control command SOUR EQU IQ I SEL new corr i SOUR EQU IQ Q SEL new corr q Saves the edited table under its current name Remote control command n a The table is saved automatically after the values have been entered Enters the frequency gain and phase values for the equalizer data tables The charts in the Q and modulator window display the curves generated from these data tables 24 Edit Equalizer WO Data equ2 FN Ke Es GE Ess Ces ES Ces ES Ee Ee Kees Een Gees Ee Insert Fill ma ER The selected modulator s frequency entry mode applies to its data table Remote control commands SOUR EQU IQ I FREO 10000 20000 30000 SOUR EQU IQ Q FREO 10000 20000 30000 SOUR EQU IQ I GAIN 0 5 3 SOUR EQU IQ Q GAIN 0 5 2 I Q SOUR EQU IQ I PHAS 1 5 10 SOUR EQU IQ Q PHAS 0 5 9 4 56 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block Output Block Introduction The dialog for adjusting the output ports can be accessed in the Output function block by selecting config or by selecting Output in the Edit menu
170. a beep After the start up is Power completed the ON LED is on switch CAUTION Shock hazard For fuse replacement ensure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected from the power supply Prior to fuse replacement remove the plug from the AC and DC Power connector 1401 3078 62 1 16 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Switching On 4 Power connector Connect the modulation generator to the AC supply by means of the supplied power cable Press the main Power switch at the rear of the instrument to position I After power up the instrument is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode depending on the position of the ON STANDBY switch on the instrument front see below Note The power switch may remain on for any period of time Switching off is required only if the instrument ought to be isolated from the AC supply completely e Power Press the ON STANDBY key on the front panel The instrument is ready for operation All modules inside the Lal instrument are supplied with power Lighting green the LED at the top left of the switch indicates that the instrument is power supplied and ready for operation ON 1401 3078 62 1 17 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Booting the R amp S AFQ After instrument switch on the R amp S signal generator automatically performs a system check boots the Windows XP operating system and subsequently boots the instrument firmware If an e
171. a documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso D Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico Corriente continua DC d Advertencia superficie caliente TL Corriente alterna AC Q Conexi n a conductor de protecci n AS Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 08 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A PELIGRO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej
172. a the LAN interface is described in chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface A firmware update via the LAN interface is described in chapter 2 of the service manual on CD ROM Connection to the Network NOTICE Risk of network errors Connecting errors may affect the entire network We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the network administrator Do not connect or disconnect the network cable until the instrument is switched off standby Only then the network connection can be reliably detected and impairments to instrument operation can be avoided The instrument is connected to the LAN with the aid of a commercial RJ 45 cable suitable for a 10 100 1000Mbps connection attached to the LAN interface at the rear of the instrument 1401 3078 62 1 25 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN Configuring the R amp S AFQ for Network Operation The network interface functions with 10 100 1000Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured For data exchange in a LAN each connected PC or instrument must be accessible via an IP address or via an unambiguous computer name In addition network access of the different users is organized by the assignment of access rights Access rights determine which of the available network resources e g data logging systems are available to the R amp S AFQ Th
173. accident 1171 0000 42 08 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 f handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substance
174. ace connector using a shielded cable Interface Characteristics 8 bit parallel data transfer bi directional data transfer three line handshake high data transfer rate up to 15 instruments can be connected maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m single connection 2m wired OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel 94 40 4400 ATN IFC NRFD EOI D2 DO GND SRO NDAC DAV D3 D1 GND 24 GND 22 GND 20 ND 18 D7 D5 gt GND 23 GND 21 GND 19 REN D6 D4 Figure 8 1 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE Bus interface 1401 3084 32 8 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bus Lines Hardware Interfaces 1 Data bus with 8 lines DO to D7 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DO is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear ATN Attention SRQ Service Request REN Remote Enable EOI End or Identify active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller active LOW permits switchover to remote control has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3
175. al at the instrument marker output This causes the BER measurement to stop briefly at the end of the data sequence and start again Partial results number of data and error bits are added up until the predefined total number of data or error bits is reached or exceeded The measurement is reset by Pattern Ignore or Data Enable regardless of its status Remote control command BERT SET REST STAT ON Off The reset signal for the BER measurement is generated internally This setting is suitable for PRBS sequences that run continuously and thus ensure uninterrupted repetition Remote control command BERT SET REST STAT OFF Data Enable Activates deactivates the use of the Data Enable signal and sets the polarity of this signal if it is used The Data Enable signal marks the data that is actually to be evaluated for the BER measurement Any data in addition to the PRBS sequence is masked and thus not evaluated e g sync preambles other channels etc that are present in the data bits supplied by the DUT The signal is fed in at the DATA ENABL input of the BERT interface It is generated by the DUT but can also be provided by the instrument in the form of a marker signal 1401 3084 32 4 78 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Note If the data is not enabled the BER measurement is stopped completely The identification circuit for Pattern Ignore as well as the PRBS generator of t
176. al hard disk HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG PATT CRE NAM D temp test wv writes the generated waveform file to test wv on the HD Device specific SOURce TSIGnal PATTern l 0 65535 Enters the pattern number of the component Example TSIG TSIN PATT I 5 sets the test pattern for the component to 5 Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commandes Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal PATTern Q 0 65535 Enters the pattern number of the Q component Example TSIG TSIN PATT Q 2 sets the test pattern for the Q component to 2 Device specific SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 AMPLitude 0 0 5 FS The command sets the amplitude values of the sine waves The values are set separately for each sine wave of the test signal The abbreviation FS means full scale Example TSIG TSIN1 AMPL 0 3 TSIG TSIN2 AMPL 0 4 sets the amplitude of sine wave 1 to 0 3 FS and the amplitude of the second sinewave to 0 4 FS Device specific SOURce TSIGnal TSINe CREate The command generates a waveform which is output directly This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example TSIG TSIN CRE a signal is generated and output directly Device specific SOURce TSIGnal TSINe
177. alled using command RCL and the associated number of the memory e g RCL 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 D NUSERNtestl savrcl stores the current instrument setting with the sAv command under memory number 4 in the file cest1 savrcl in the USER directory on the internal hard disk SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 84 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section Status Subsystem This system contains the commands for the status reporting system RST has no effect on the status registers Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status A decimal value between 0 and 32767 94 is returned The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the instrument causes the status registers to be changed A decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 15 1 is set T iid Edad n STATus OPERation CONDition Query only E A AU oan IO 0 A O Ny FSTATUROPERatonPTRansten mmr oe smmsommsewmp A L ns CO pm A A A ICE TAN OE Les Lesen OE Jee Dese OO 0 A Dese STATus QUEStionable EVENt PT Query only smsow yoy STATus OPERation CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardwar
178. ally when the PRBS is selected Data Polarity remains unaffected Norm High level stands for a logic 1 low level for a logic 0 Remote control command BERT SET DATA NORM Inv Low level stands for a logic 1 high level for a logic 0 Remote control command BERT SET DATA INV Sets the polarity of the active slope of the feedback clock Pos The positive slope of the clock signal is active Remote control command BERT SET CLOC RIS Neg The negative slope of the clock signal is active Remote control command BERT SET CLOC FALL R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block External Restart Activates deactivates an external restart of the BER measurement On The reset signal for the BER measurement is fed via the Restart input of the BERT interface If the PRBS cannot be continued uninterruptedly the BER measurement must be stopped at the end of the data sequence and subsequently restarted at the beginning of the new data sequence The measurement is stopped and started via a 0 1 0 slope of the restart signal A transition from logic O to 1 causes a partial result to be generated and the measurement to be stopped A transition from 1 to 0 starts the measurement for the next subinterval This measurement is synchronized anew If the instrument is used as a data source a signal in which a single 1 was coded at the end of the data sequence can be used as a restart sign
179. alog Internal A sample clock is supplied internally Remote control command SOUR ROSC SOUR INT External The clock signal is fed in externally via the BNC connector REF IN at the rear panel of the instrument Remote control command SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT Sets a time shift delay to the reference clock signal for adjusting the clocks in the slaves Recommended range 0 5 ns Remote control command SOUR ROSC DEL 2 5 Note The synchronization of several connected R amp S AFQ 1 Q Modulation Generators requires the Baseboard Revision 8 or higher Up to baseboard Revision 5 only synchronization mode normal is provided stand alone mode Reference clock external only Enters the synchronization bandwidth i e the target range of the synchronization circuit The synchronization bandwidth is indicated only when an external reference clock source is selected Narrow A narrow synchronization bandwidth is selected the synchronization circuit works slowly Remote control command SOUR ROSC EXT SBAN NARR Wide A wide synchronization bandwidth is selected the synchronization circuit works fast Remote control command SOUR ROSC EXT SBAN WIDE 4 35 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Setting Up Several Connected R amp S AFQs for Precise Simultaneous Signal Output A simultaneous signal output of several R amp S AFQs requires the synchronization of the connected instruments Very precise simultaneous signal ou
180. alog output The instrument generates a series of signal levels and converts them using a precise ADC The procedure takes about 30 seconds The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL AOUT AMPL starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual Response 0 calibration was successful Diagnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic system contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing In the Test Point section provides access to the test points available in the instrument except for the analog output board see below When activated the voltage of the selected test point is measured and displayed A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument In the Analog Output Board Test Board section provides access to the test points on the analog output board In the Fan Control section the fan speed is selected Command Parameters Default unit DIAGnostic AOUTput CH POINECATalog PY Query ony DIAGnostic AOUTput lt CH gt POINt PY Quey ony DAGwsirCOMm worse T DAGwsemroPOGame J A roy FDAGresteNFOOTMe J o J fonw CTI A A T EOI JOO ow 1401 3084 32 6 73 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Setup Section DIAGnostic AOUTput POINt CATalog The command measures the
181. als Rect Testsignals Table Sine Testsignals Test Pattern Opens the dialog for creating the sine test signals ARB Sine Test Signals on page 4 5 Opens the dialog for creating the test signals ARB Rectangular Test Signals on page 4 7 Opens the dialog for creating the test signals ARB Table Sine Test Signal on page 4 8 Opens the dialog for creating test signals ARB Test Pattern on page 4 11 ARB Sine Test Signals Dialog The Sine Test Signals dialog is accessed via the ARB dialog The dialog can be used to configure a sinusoidal test signal A sine wave is always generated on the path and a sine wave of the same frequency but phase shifted is generated on the Q path The instrument cannot create test signals remote controlled via IEC bus hence the user is required to use the graphical user interface displayed on a monitor Si Sine Test Signal Sample Clock 1 000 000 000 MHz Samples Per Period 100 Phase Offset Q 90 00 deg Res Frequency 1 000 00 kHz 1 0 5 D 0 5 1 0 25 50 75 t Tsample 50 75 t Tsample Generate Signal HD Generate Signal RAM 1401 3084 32 4 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Sample Clock Samples per Period Phase Offset Q Res Frequency Generate Signal HD Generate Signal RAM 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block Enters the sample clock frequency for generating a sine test signal 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate mus
182. anual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument 1401 3084 32 4 90 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Update Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration Display Keyboard GUI Update Remote Software Options Network Settings Install 5W Options Protection b Purge Security Debug Page di The Update dialog can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu SC Update El m PCI FPGA After a firmware update it is occasionally required to update the PCI FPGA also This is enabled in the Update dialog At the first start of the new firmware a message appears during the boot process when a PCI FPGA update is required The PCI FPGA update starts by pressing the PCI FPGA button Functions of the instrument may be impaired Disrupting the update of the PCI FPGA may impair instrument functions The update of the PCI FPGA must not be cancelled and the instrument must not be switched off during this update NOTICE 1401 3084 32 4 91 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Self Test Setup Test A self test is provided for service purposes The self test is a protected test procedure which can be accessed if protection level 1 is disabled The protection dialog is called in the Setup menu see Protection Setup on page 4 98 Setup Edit Help System d i 2v rkhkar Carnaman SR Display Keyboar
183. apasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y sefializar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 A Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales
184. as displayed before the current page Remote control command Shifts the indicated area of the navigation window Remote control command Increases and reduces the font size of the help text Remote control command 4 103 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data Storing and Loading Instrument Data The instrument allows complete instrument settings to be stored on the hard disk Defined and complex instrument settings can then be reproduced at any time by loading this data If required these settings can be loaded to various signal generators The File menu is used to store and load instrument settings in a file The instrument settings are saved in files which can be stored in data directories Additionally there are intermediate memories in which the current instrument settings can be stored and called up again by just pressing a key This provides fast switching between different instrument settings Only settings which differ from the preset values are stored As a result the files remain relatively small Furthermore instrument settings can easily be transferred between different equipped signal generators since the files contain only relevant information When loaded the referenced settings are implemented and all non referenced parameters are set to the associated preset values If list data is part of the instrument settings e g a list of frequency level values a reference to this list is stored not t
185. at count is entered in a list of numbers separated by semicolons Each segment can be repeated up to 100 times Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM RCO 1 1 3 1 4 Selects the segment trigger source of a multi segment waveform Manual External The segment trigger event is executed by clicking Execute Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR MAN The segment trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigger signal is fed in via the NEXT connector The active edge is selected under Slope Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR EXT 4 22 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Segment Address Segment Trigger 1401 3084 32 Bus Auto Baseband Block The segment trigger event is executed by remote control using the command TRIG SEGM EXEC Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR BUS segment mode Single or Repeat N Times only The segment trigger event is executed internally by the firmware Segment trigger events are ignored Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM SOUR AUTO Note The trigger source Auto disables the segment trigger modes Continuous and Continuous seamless and vice versa Selects the segment sequence mode of a multi segment waveform Note The Segment Address mode can be selected only by using external segment trigger sources such as Manual External or Bus With segment trigger source Auto the Segm
186. ature range in which the instrument is operated changes or prior to all applications which require maximum accuracy During adjustment a bar indicates the status of progress The result is indicated in the dialog Pass or Failed If an error occurs adjustment is terminated and an error message is output in the info line Note Make sure that the instrument has reached the operating temperature before performing adjustments The warm up time amounts 30 minutes 1401 3084 32 4 83 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings 3 Internal Adjustm E m Result Stopped Analog Output Adjust Amplitude Result Stopped Adjust Delay Result Stopped Analog output calibration only applies to the attenuator mode The instrument generates a series of signal levels and converts them using a precise ADC The procedure takes about 30 seconds All Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed Note Adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in chapter 2 of the service manual section Adjustments The service manual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument Remote control command CAL ALL Adjust Amplitude Starts every internal adjustment procedures which affect the amplitude at the analog output Remote control command CAL AOUT AMPL Adjust Delay Starts every internal adjustment procedures which affect the delay at the analog output Remo
187. aveforms and configuration of trigger marker an clock signals is performed in the Baseband block Baseband Block on page 4 3 Impairments of the digital UO signal like offsets or phase shifts are defined in the Impairments block Impairments Block on page 4 40 Shifts in time or frequency like IF generation in the Time and Frequency Shifts section Time and Frequency Shifts on page 4 38 The frequency response of external measurement equipment can be taken into account for signal generation in the Equalizer block Equalizer Block on page 4 45 Several output types can be selected and configured in the Output block Output Block on page 4 57 The integrated bit error rate tester is configured and activated in the BERT function block in section Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block on page 4 66 The general instrument settings do not directly affect signal generation They include various functions such as configuring the modulator and its interfaces in the Setup menu e g setting the IEC IEEE bus address starting an adjustment and querying instrument data Menu and Status Line Es AFQ100A Base Band Source CEV File Setup Edit Help wee E Eee Bon fee vd am Several menus displayed in a toolbar offer access to the main instrument functions File Setup Edit Help The File menu offers access to functions for loading or saving instrument settings The Setup menu covers all the instrument settings which do nat directly influe
188. avisos sobre posibles da os materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 08 Page 9 Instrucciones de segur
189. ay consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header Note The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and one or more parameters if any Common Commands Examples RST RESET resets the device ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable register ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Hierarchy Device specific commands are of hierarchical structure The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the command system SOURce For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Instrument control commands IMPaiment The tree structure of the command system SOURCe Some key words occur on several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command i e on the position in the command header they are inserted in Multiple key words 1401 3084 32 5 16 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Optional key words Long and short form Parameters Numeric suffix 1401 30
190. be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit Master Status Summary Bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is Set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE Table 5 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte 1401 3084 32 5 27 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE By analogy with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit lt can be queried by means of a parallel poll cf section Parallel Poll on page 5 30 or using the command ETOT The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using command PRE Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE CONC Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands ha
191. between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a co
192. ble File Transfer Log debug infos to the WinVNC log file Allow Loopback Connections Default Server Screen 1 E Apply Cancel Query on incoming connection Display Query Window Timeout s 7 After the installation the VNC connection must be enabled in the ICF firewall see following section Aer the installation the program and the operating system are always started automatically An icon is placed on the right side of the Windows XP task bar notification area On mouse over the IP address of the R amp S AFQ is indicated This IP address and the user defined password are the prerequisites to enable manual remote control on the PC A cut connection is indicated by a changed color of the icon Cutting the connection does not disable it It can be established again any time rmm KEE ECKE E 1401 3078 62 1 43 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Configuring Internet Connection Firewall for VNC Connection To enable manual remote control by other controllers in a local network via VNC connection the connection must be specifically permitted in the firewall 1 Open the start menu select Control Panel and open the context menu by pressing the right mouse key 2 Click on Switch to Classic View and select the Windows Firewall Windows Firewall t3 General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall helps protect your computer by preventing unauthoriz
193. board Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in chapter 3 section Legend of Manual Controls on page 3 1 In contrast to Remote Control Desktop direct control on the R amp S AFQ is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the manual remote control 1401 3078 62 1 46 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Install VNC Viewer and Establish VNC Connection on the Windows PC The Ultr VNC program is available on the Internet as a free of charge download Following the instructions on the Internet the program can be copied onto the external Windows PC Only the program component VNC Viewer is required Note The VNC Viewer program is included in the download for the installation of the Ultr VNC program on your modulation generator if Full installation was selected in the Select Component panel In this case the program ultr vncviewer exe can be copied to your Windows PC 1 Install VNC Viewer program component on the PC 2 Start VNC Viewer program component on the PC Connection x a VNC Server 192 168 1 1 zm host display or host port r Quick Options AUTO Auto select best settings C ULTRA 2Mbit s Experimental Cancel C LAN gt IMbit s Max Colors _ Cancel C MEDIUM gt 128Kbit s Max Colors C MODEM 19 128Kbit s 256 Colors C SLOW
194. c To get rid of DC components a DC balance bit is added after the 6th bit so that seven bits are transmitted per sample The associated clock line transmits 100 MHz 100 Mbits s whereby the positive clock slope denotes a new multiplex word National Semiconductor s 48 Bit Channel Link Deserializer DS90CR484 can receive this data stream see http www national com pf DS DS90CR484 html Apart from the multiplexed data stream the instrument transmits the following data SYNC_IN The desired memory clock rate may be set here I2CD I2CC The interface transmits supplemented signal data e g signal name word width length clock rate usage of IF etc See TVR290 for details Digital Resolution The user may set digital resolution to 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 or 16 bits Marker The marker is inserted at the mentioned position into the output stream Clock Generation The output signal at Port 1 will be generated at a base clock rate or 100 MHz Since the data stream is multiplexed 7 to 1 this corresponds to a data rate of 700 Mbit s The memory clock may run at a rate selected by the user the rate must not exceed 100 MHz of course Filters In mode a all features of the instrument can be used e g time and frequency shifts Af At or the correction filters in the impairments and equalizer block 1401 3084 32 8 13 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Specifications of Digital Interfaces Port 2 The memory data are output in
195. can check the influence on the rate of successfully transmitted bits Differences in amplitude between the and Q channels give rise to an offset in the constellation diagram and thus to a narrower eye width for the modulation Quadrature offsets can be illustrated by an UO vector diagram Resulting modulation vector Error vector Constellation Diagram The main applications are bit error rate testing of baseband and RF devices testing semiconductor devices which process baseband signals testing transceivers and demodulators developing wireless communication systems checking how sensitive devices are with regard to impairments adjusting UO RF modulators 9 14 1401 3078 62 2 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Feature Summary Feature Summary The instrument s main features are The system clock frequency fsystem amounts to 300 MHz thus processing a large amount of digital data per second The maximum resolution of the and the Q signals is 16 bits each During signal processing the clock frequency is converted from the symbol rate f ympo of the incoming signal to the instrument s system rate fsystem which amounts to 300 MHz i e digital signals are resampled in real time This saves memory space because the data need not to be calculated and saves using a greater symbol rate than desired The symbol rate may vary from 1 kHz to 300 MHz the latter figure is the clock frequency at which the signal is calculated in th
196. ccur only once in the whole sequence Hence an advantage of the PRBS data is that the bit error detector must know only the polynomial but not the entire sequence At the start of a measurement the feedback shift register is filled once with the applied data sequence which corresponds to the synchronization time and is subsequently switched from fill to teedback This creates a defined initial status and generates exactly the same data that the applied data stream should have Faulty bits can thus be identified and counted by comparing the received data with the results obtained from the shift register Creating a defined initial status makes it possible to start the analysis anywhere in the bit stream i e the bit stream source and the analyzer need not be synchronized Delays of the DUT and transmission over long air Paths where the transmitter and the receiver are located at separate sites therefore do not present a problem Clock signal Usually the clock signal is provided by the DUT A marker signal can be used as a clock As the DUT causes a delay the ratio of clock to data travel times must always be taken into account and checked with an oscilloscope if necessary The instrument indicates the status of the clock and data lines and of the synchronization in the dialogs Ending the measurement The measurement results usually lie in the range of 107 to 10 for the bit error rate This means that a very large number of bits may have
197. ch is currently example it contains all parameter being displayed in the right names and all IEC IEEE bus hand help window The commands The associated help associated page can be opened page can be opened by selecting an by selecting an entry entry verview of Instrument Functions SYSTem VERSion ER Dap itrary Waveform Generator ARB Table Sine Test Signals ARB Tag CLOCK SYSTemTIME eh Baseband Block QQARB Menu Tag COMMENT State ARB Test point voltage display jail rae Test Signal ARB Bee TEST CONNectorBNC Sine Testsignals TEST LED Rect Testsignals TEST MEMory Table Sine Testsignals TEST SINE FREQuency E sine Test Signals ARB Menu TEST SINE PHASe H E Rectangular Test Signals ARE TEST SINE STATe H Qj Table Sine Test Signal ARB mi Threshold BERT m Ey Trigger Menu Trigger BERT zi Trigger Delay External ARB Es Rg Marker Menu Trigger Delay Other Baseband ARB EN Clock Menu Trigger Inhibit External ARB ER intermediate Frequency Trigger Inhibit Other Baseband ARB e i impairments Block Trigger Mode ARB B Equalizer Block Trigger parameters ARB H Pg Output Block Trigger Source ARB Be pit Error Rate Measurements BER TRlGger BERT IMMediate Unit BERT H A General Instrument Settings Volt Test point B Storing and Loading Instrument Da PEN fe la a Waveform File G emote Control Commands SOURce Opens the page which w
198. cimal gooimt an nneennnnna 5 20 Default factory settings 00000100eeeeaneeean 6 112 Default instrument settings 1 31 4 249 6 113 Delay External segment trigger 4 188 External rioger 4 178 Marker iau des 4 195 Segment trigger ssesssssss 4 188 Trigger i e de 4 178 Marker ARB 2 cssseccecesecctecseeeseeeeeneneseeenes 6 43 Trigger ARB wcsccisesceccccsteeeetdentensetneresteeees 6 40 Delete AO 4 281 Delete instrument settings 6 99 Delin al iii bibi ded 5 25 Device specific error 300 9 3 DHCP ot ene anes 1 37 1401 3084 32 10 9 Index Dialog 8re8 te eb tid 3 96 Dialog header see 3 95 Digital OUPS eene 1 13 Amplitude essesss 4 229 6 75 SIODG a st SU T 4 231 6 75 Directory 4 273 4 276 4 278 4 280 6 96 FE SE iiis 4 273 4 276 DISplay coil leia 3 88 Double dagger a 5 24 E Enable retrigger ssssssss 4 177 Entry Milicia ral sei 3 96 EOI command ne 5 19 ERROR LEDs sects evo de dor do 1 10 Error messages 3 89 9 1 9 2 Error messages display list 6 113 Error oueue enne 5 32 Error queue query 6 107 6 111 6 112 ErtorS BERT suas 4 238 6 79 ESE event status enable register 5 30 Ethnic lb 1 36 Ethernet Remote control 5 7 Event status enabl
199. component analog baseband signal is forwarded to a vector signal generator such as R amp S SMU The vector signal generator modulates it onto an RF carrier and transmits the radio signal to an antenna Finally the device under test will receive the radio signal The received signal can be checked for transmission errors using the instrument s bit error rate measurement feature Usage of AFQ Remote Control amp Waveform Calculation AFQ100A Vector Device Modulator under Sample D A SMU RF Test Memory M Q DUT Bit Error Measurement Clock Data The graphic shows the signal flow from baseband processing i e waveform calculation to the receiver the DUT 1401 3078 62 2 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Main Applications Main Applications R amp S AFQ is mainly used for generating modulation signals for an RF generator to check the data taken by a receiver Moreover RF generators with UO inputs can also be tested Gain and phase of the two channels and Q can be adjusted hence accounting for non ideal characteristics of the RF generator to be driven For test purposes modulation signals are output at the digital output option R amp S AFQ B18 of the instrument prior to D A conversion In addition the impairment of the digital signal is possible delay gain voltage offset and phase mismatch Pre distortions are useful for compensating calibration errors of the instrument to be driven Beyond this the user
200. ct Save Instrument Settings File Management The File menu offers access to functions for loading or saving instrument settings File New Open save Save As New Clears the current instrument settings All devices are reset and conform to the default settings as it is called by the RST command Look in la a q lists Sine TriRectMarker CO Waveforms a SaveRecallTest savrd SaveRecallT est savicl Save Recal Files savicl Open Opens the window Choose a file to open which is similar to a Windows explorer user interface Stored instrument settings can be recalled by selecting a setting file 1 Click on the selection list Look in or move the cursor with the aid of the Tab key to activate the selection list 2 Click on the pop up button or press the cursor down key to pop up the selection list The available drives are listed 3 Mark the drive where the setting file is stored The directories and files are displayed in the area below 4 Shiftthe entry focus to the area underneath the Look in selection list and select the directory Similar to Windows user interfaces the Look in selection list changes and displayes the currently selected directory Only the relevant files of type Instrument State are available and therefore only the files with the file extension savrcl Save Recall Files are displayed This suffix is preset in the field Files of type 5 Select the file The file name is entered
201. d Enters the frequency gain and phase values for the equalizer data tables The charts in the Q and modulator window display the curves generated from these data tables amp Edit Equalizer WO Data equ2 m m x E PEE EE CENE Ges Ges Ces ek ES ket Es K sse GE Es The selected modulator s frequency entry mode applies to its data table Remote control commands SOUR EQU MOD FREQ 10000 20000 30000 SOUR EQU MOD GAIN 0 1 2 SOUR EQU MOD PHAS 0 45 90 4 51 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A UO Dialog Equalizer Block The dialog for setting the UO values can be opened in the Equalizer block clicking the config button and selecting UO or by selecting UO in the Edit Equalizer menu amp Equalizer 1 0 ne sx List Data I equ_l_test Edit Data 1 List Data Q equ q test Edit Data oa i f kHz Phase 20 f kHz State Switches On or Off the loaded UO correction Remote control commands SOUR EQU IQ STAT ON List Data Opens a dialog for selecting or entering or Q data tables These dialogs are standard Windows dialogs The upper pane displays recent data sets in the left pane a directory can be selected the file is selected in the right pane Opens a dialog for selecting or entering modulator or Q data tables New List File Manager SOURCe HW D EQUalizer IQ I 8Sl TEMP TESTPREDIQ D TEMP T ELect ESTPR EDIQ afq
202. d gt Diagnostic Remote Memory Access Network Settings gt Memory Test The Self test dialog can be selected in the Test section of the Setup menu SC Selftest Execute Front Panel Test Execute BNC Test Execute Memory Test Execute Voltage Test Execute IO Port 2 Test LVDS Test Note The Self test is provided for service purposes and therefore described in chapter 1 of the service manual section Test Procedures The service manual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument 1401 3084 32 4 92 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Diagnostic Setup Test Setup Edit Help System gt ee gt Test Diagnostic The Diagnostic dialog can be selected in the Test section of the Setup menu amp Diagnostic Analog Output Board Test Point Select Voltage Fan Control Speed Control The Diagnostic dialog provides access to the internal diagnosis facilities of the instrument The Test Point section provides access to the test points available in the instrument except for the analog output board see below When activated the voltage of the selected test point is measured and displayed A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument The Analog Output Board Test Point section provides access to the test points on the analog output board In the Fan Control section the fan speed is
203. d the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution degree 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the
204. d in the New Filename window Remote control command MMEM MOVE test02 dm iqd set2 dm iqd Deletes the selected file Before the file is deleted a confirmation query is displayed to confirm deleting the file Remote control command MMEM DEL E Ntest savrcl Creates a new directory The name of the new directory can be entered in the New Directory window The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level Note When the subdirectory is entered it is possible to enter an absolute path name e g D USER MEAS or the path relative to the current directory e g MMEAS Remote control command MMEM MDIR D user test 4 111 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Contents Remote Control Basics Contents Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 5 Remote Control Basics eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 Introduction Remote Control Basics 5 1 Getting Started cic cena nade eget e ete devant dee dev ade dee dica 5 3 Switchover to Remote Control 5 4 Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus eee 5 5 Remote Control via LAN Interface 5 7 Remote Control via USB Interface sss 5 13 Interface and Device Messages emere 5 14 Interface Messages ne eene nnne 5 14 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses 5 15 SCPI Command Structure and Gvntan ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 16 Structure of a Command Line ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee
205. d there as well 1401 3084 32 5 30 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems Commands RST DCL and SYSTem PRESet and switching on the supply voltage also affect the status reporting system None of the commands except for RST and SYSTem PRESet influences the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 5 4 Resetting the Status Reporting System Switching on supply voltage DCL SDC Power On Status Device Clear RST or STATus PRESet CLS Clear Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear eat wo o p ea mese fw JO pese lo Me qp 1 see de EE eese Je Je mel EE and input buffer Table 5 5 Resetting the Status Reporting System 1 Every command being the first in a command line Le immediately following a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer 1401 3084 32 5 31 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Remote Control Hardware Interfaces Remote Control Hardware Interfaces The following section describes the remote control interfaces of the modulation generator Further interfaces are described in chapter 1 sections Legend for Front Panel View and Legend for Rear Panel View For specifications refer to the data sheet IEC IEEE Bus Interface The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connector An IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel An external controller for remote control of
206. dard event status enable ESE The IST flag Individual STatus and the parallel poll enable register PPE allocated to it are also part of the status reporting system The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB Overview of the Status Register The following figure shows the status registers used in the R amp S AFQ Power on User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control Operation Complete SRQ BRRRRRRR OO AM oa E Oo OO Y ESE ESR SRE Error Queue Output Buffer amp amp amp amp amp logical AND PPE 09 DL of all bits o ISTflag response to parallel poll Figure 5 2 Overview of status registers 1401 3084 32 5 26 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers It assummes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte
207. ditions under which a service request is triggered The SRE query command reads out the content of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always O STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the content of the status byte in decimal form TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions which are waiting for a trigger event Specific trigger events can be triggered by means of the TRIGger command system sweep and lists or the SOURce subsystems basebana TST SELF TEST QUERY triggers all self tests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument WAI WAIT to CONTINUE does not allow subsequent commands to be processed until all previous commands have been executed and all signals are in their transient condition 1401 3084 32 6 3 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation AFQ Commands Signal Generation Baseband Block Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB Command Parameter Emer LL BEE cx z o o o Lt Q SIS 5 0 lt l lt Query only No query MHz SOURce HW TSIGnaPATTem CREate NAMed fle name Noquery E LL E A BETEN BEE BEER EES E FFSOURce TSIGra TSNeOFFSt OOOO e RI SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 PHASe SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate We We EA E quy HEN NEN EA EA qt RENI TEN E E E SOURceTTSIGmarSINEFREQueny 1 Queyeny SOURCeJTSIGnal SINEPHASe gt L
208. ds on the settings of the Gain in the Q path After entering the gain the instrument calculates the accessible data range of the offset in order not to output an amplitude exceeding 1 0 full scale Example IMP OFFS Q 0 10FS sets a negative DC offset to 10 FS SCPI Device specific SOURce IMPairment PHASe 20 20 deg The command sets an UO mismatch Ag from 20 deg to 20 deg i e a deviation from 90 deg The impaired signals I and Q are given by the phase missmatch AQ and the proper ones Q F 1 qxQ Q q Q with qi sin Ag qq cos Ag Example IMP PHAS 4 9DEG sets the phase mismatch to 4 9 deg SCPI Device specific SOURce IMPairment STATe ON OFF The command activates On and deactivates Off impairments Example IMP STAT OFF deactivates impairment SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 47 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Equalizer Block Command Parameters Default unit EITC EA d EII EAT de EII A EII ETA d E EAT dm EII A EII CIC E iSOUmceFEQUaeMODumerCATapgENGM eo Egon Lienen Egon Lage J o E BEE m E COTA ds ISOUmceFQUaerMODumorPHASS 39 904 dm EI O TT FTSOURCe EOUatzerMODultorRFFRequeney 0 106 Jl Egal Egon Jm ll ET CCA SOURce EQUalizer IQ CATalog LENGth This command queries the number of files containing UO
209. e SOURCeJTSIGnal SINE SAMPIes 4 1000 Samples SOURce TSIGnal TSINe TLENgth SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed E ET EII E FFSOURceIWAVetomRESempe LL EI sWemme E SOURce WAVeform TAG comment copyright date Query only lacpfilter marker name poweroffset 1401 3084 32 6 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce CREStfactor This command queries the crest factor of the generated signal The crest factor of a waveform is equal to the peak amplitude divided by the root mean square value The program calculates the power ratio not the voltage ratio Hence the crest factor of a sine function amounts to 2 instead of sqrt 2 equal to 3 01 dB The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CRES queries the crest factor of the generated signal Response 3 01 the crest factor amounts to 3 01 dB SOURce PRESet The command sets all ARB generator parameters to their default values The default settings are listed in chapter 4 section Default instrument settings This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example PRES resets the ARB generator to default values Options Device specific SOURce STATe ON OFF The command switches the ARB generator on STAT ON is only possible after the selection of a waveform The selected waveform is output straight away
210. e Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 08 Page 10 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde 8 Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una ten
211. e TSIGnal RECT CREate NAMed sss sienne intent entente ennt 6 15 SOURce TSIGnal RECT OFFSet isses as esta aai iaaa aaa teneis saa ds s nennt 6 15 SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate isses eias nm 6 15 SOURce TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed sss sisse ennt entente nnn 6 17 SOURce TSIGnal SINE FREQuency sisse enne nnne enne rr naar rr senes sane rns 6 17 SOURce T SIGnal SINE PHAS8 siiis seines mn 6 17 SOURce TSIGnal SINE SAMPIES esses seinen enne nennt ne snnt nnne nnns 6 15 6 17 SOURCe TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 AMPLitude sess nennen entente nnn 6 10 SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 FREQuenoy sss eene nennen ene 6 12 SOURCe TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 PERIOOS sisse eene enne entere 6 13 SOURce TSIGnal TSINe 1 2 PHASe sss siesta entente ennt 6 13 SOURce TSIGnal TSINe CREate siesta eite teen eta ena e nnne 6 10 SOURce TSIGnal TSINe CREate NAMed sisse nennen entente nnn 6 10 Kee EE TTT 6 12 SOURce TSIGnal TSINe TLENgth rm 6 12 SOURCe JWAVe fOr CA Talog seien nennen nana nans sh nens naar a ntes nnns aia ma 6 19 SOURce WAVeform CATalog LENGtR sss esee nnne enne nnn 6 19 SOURce WAVeform DATA esses sisse sias tane nennen sitas sint E A AENA DAKEE EEEE as snas sensns 6 19 ISQURce IWAVeform DELete 2 d n ERR hant e itae he 6 20 SOURce WAVeform P
212. e external control computer processing the digital baseband signal The sample memory size amounts to 256 MS or 1 GS the numerical values apply to instrument version B10 or B11 respectively The accessible RF bandwidth amounts to 200 MHz which corresponds to an and Q bandwidth of 100 MHz each This large bandwidth applies to forthcoming RF standards e g future WLANs RF modulation could be done by a separate instrument e g the R amp S SMU Vector Signal Generator The overall frequency response of the modulation generator is smoothed using correction filters which compensate deviations of the analog l Q output s low pass filter The frequency response varies within an interval of 0 05 dB even if the whole UO bandwidth of 100 MHz is used The client may use his own RF generator in this case the frequency response of its input amplifier and its RF modulator has to be accounted for and can be corrected without modifying baseband processing done by the control PC The modulation generator also compensates phase mismatches The user can intentionally apply impairments which will result in greater bit error rates and Q path delay and Q attenuation and Q voltage offset and the relative phase error The Spurious Free Dynamic Range SFDR of a signal whose bandwidth is 1 MHz amounts to 80 decibels below carrier dBc The SFDR indicates the logarithmic power ratio of a converted main signal and the greatest undesired one Exact skew adju
213. e see section Editing 1 Q Data on page 4 54 Remote control command n a 1401 3084 32 4 53 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Editing UO Data Equalizer Block Goto EE Save As Save Goto Selects the row of the table to be edited Goto last Goto row Goto first Goto last Goto row 1401 3084 32 Selects the first row of the table Remote control command n a Selects the last row of the table Remote control command n a Opens an input box for entering the number of the row to be edited e g Remote control command n a 4 54 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Insert Fill Rows 1401 3084 32 Equalizer Block Opens the dialog for adding and filling rows to an equalizer table Insert Range Fill Insert row Insert range Fill Inserts a new row above the marked one Remote control command n a Inserts the entered number of rows above the marked one e g 4 new rows efi oK Cancel Remote control command n a Opens a window to enter the data for automatically filling an equalizer table e g Se Fill Table From Select column to fill Phase deg al Start Value 360 00 Remote control command n a 4 55 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Save As Save Frequency Gain Phase 1401 3084 32 Equalizer Block Opens the window Create List File Which Name to save the table under a new name see section File Select
214. e 6 50 Clock output ists 1 20 REP aane nidis 1 20 Clock Parameter ARB 4 196 4 198 4 199 4 200 4 201 6 51 Jmpedance cooocccccccccccconancononccnnncnnnanencnnnons 4 199 Clock Slope BERT od i ette dte 4 244 6 81 Digital output ssssssss 4 231 6 75 CEOCK tag iio 6 23 Colon eeparaior 5 24 Comma separator sssssssss 5 24 Command Addressed 2 eeu 5 37 8 5 Header cte 5 16 Elli is ct a 5 19 Parameters esseri 5 20 ET 5 20 Question mark 5 20 Sequence DEET 5 27 SITUCIUTe i ai en 5 16 DUDE Si e Ip bn e f 5 17 Synchronization sse 5 27 Universal ads 5 37 8 5 L 9 2 Protected 20721 9 3 R amp S AFQ100A COMMENT fag 6 24 Common Commande sss 6 2 Connection to external controller 1 44 Controller external eese 1 44 CODY ciii din ua s 4 281 Copy instrument settings 6 96 A p iced detis 6 91 Create New Directory susss 4 281 Cross over RJ 45 cable inneineneeeneeee 1 37 Current Range without Recalculation 4 196 6 45 Cul sudo a Ao DE 4 281 D Data Bits BERT ooocioccnninconciccicccccnn 4 237 6 79 Data Enable BERT s 4 245 6 82 Data out of range 222 ssssuss 9 3 Data Polarity BERT aaaaaaaaaaaaeaaaaaa 4 244 6 82 Data type error 7021 9 3 DCL A ecient es 5 25 De
215. e Window XP operating system is protected by an activated firewall per default The configuration of the firewall has to be adapted according to the required network communication needs Networks using DHCP The R amp S AFQ is preconfigured for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol In these networks an available IP address is automatically assigned to the R amp S AFQ In this case the generator is identified via an unambiguous computer name in the network Each R amp S AFQ is assigned a individual computer name in the factory This name can be queried and changed in the Start My Computer menu of Windows XP see Query Computer Name below Networks using fixed IP addresses In networks using fixed IP addresses the addresses are mostly assigned by the network administrator A fixed IP address must be entered in the Start Control Panel menu of Windows XP Point to Point Connection To build a simple network just an LAN connection between the R amp S AFQ and a controller without integration into a larger network an IP address has to be assigned to the R amp S AFQ and the controller For such purposes the IP addresses 192 168 xxx yyy are available The value range for xxx and yyy is 1 254 the value for the subnet mask is always 255 255 255 0 For this type of connection a commercial cross over RJ 45 cable is used User name and password The user instrument is assigned to the R amp S AFQ The user name is used
216. e cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Notice general danger location O ON OFF Power Observe product documentation gt Caution when handling heavy equipment Ch Standby indication Danger o
217. e description of the highlighted parameter amp Help 4 Instrument Functions Overview of instrument Fundi d Instrument Functions S Arbitrary Waveform Gene More Baseband Block 9 Impairments Block Y Equalizer Block I Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB Q Output Block D n Error Rate Measurem 24 Baseband Block y General Instrument Settir 4 Impairments Block Q Storing and Loading Insti a WI Remote Control Command Equalizer Block I Overview of Instrument Functions Common Commands Ly Common Commands gt QAFO Commands Signal 4 Gen ral Instrument Settin gy Baseband Block Ark QARB Waveform and LP 2I Storing and Loading Instrument Data Baseband Block Trid QQ Marker QQ Clock Outline Y impairments Block y Equalizer Block QQ Output Block analog H QAFA Commands BERT H QAFA Commands Setup Q Supplements D The context sensitive page which is opened with the F1 key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system The following navigation aids are available Internal links in the text They open pages which are directly linked to the described function In this way it is possible for example to call up the description of the IEC IEEE bus command for any particular function Previous Next links The Previous Next links allow scroll through the
218. e must only be modified with update software released by Rohde 8 Schwarz Likewise only programs authorized by Rohde 8 Schwarz for use on the instrument must be executed The following program packages have been successfully tested for compatibility with the measurement instrument software Windows XP Remote Desktop Symantec Norton AntiVirus Virus protection software 1401 3078 62 1 21 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Windows XP The UO modulation generator is equipped with the Windows XP operating system The configuration of the operating system is optimally adapted to modulation generator functions in the factory Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like a keyboard is installed or in the event that the network configuration does not comply with the default settings see section Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN After power up of the modulation generator the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automatically without a password query auto login Note Auto login is performed with the user name and the password instrument The standard user has administrator rights so that peripherals and network installations are possible The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and or a mouse and an external monitor are connected an access via remote control commands is not possible Windows XP provides an on screen keyboard that can be operated using a mou
219. e register ESE 5 30 Execute Segment Irioger 4 188 AA A N 4 178 Execute Trigger AND 6 32 Expiration date of option 4 256 EXPONE tada 5 20 Exponent too large 123 ssss 9 3 Extended Trigger mode ARB 4 174 Extern reference out of range or disconnected 50 ssssss 9 5 External Restar BERT 4 245 6 84 External Trigger Delay ARB 6 40 External Trigger Inhibit ARB 6 40 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A F Factory Preset s esie 4 268 File distin caves 4 279 4 280 6 95 File Management ARB cusa uns eee ees 4 164 COVA 4 281 Create new drechor eeeeeeeteeeeteeeenteees 4 281 Cut ic CRDI e 4 281 Delet t eerte nte 4 281 DIECON oeeo top cs 4 280 File list tea des 4 280 MOVE iii 4 281 Pastrana 4 281 e 4 281 File Men ii 4 272 NAM apu id des 4 279 File type selechon sess 4 280 EW lia Enn 1 42 Firmware Update inci ti invade 1 23 VerSIOn i is ein eel een 4 255 6 3 Fix marker delay to current range 4 196 6 43 Frequency Sine Test Signal ARB 4 166 6 17 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 6 12 Front panel siege doeet 1 9 ANALOG QUT bus 1 14 ARM LED eee breed 1 12 BUSY LED epi iaa 1 10 Digital interface sssssssssss 1 13 DIGITAL OUT aida 1 13 ERROR LED ciet aede 1 10 I BARQ BAR connectors
220. e status The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Operation Condition register SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 85 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Setup Section STATus OPERation ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus OPERation register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered e g the end of an adjustment This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Operation register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is
221. e test signal as provided in section Sine 1 and section Sine 2 of the dialog Remote control command SOUR TSIG TSIN1 AMPL 0 3 SOUR TSIG TSIN2 AMPL 0 4 Phase Table Sine Sets the phase offset values of the sine waves The values are set Test Signal separately for each sine wave of the test signal as provided in section Sine 1 and section Sine 2 of the dialog Enters the phase shifts of the two sine waves Remote control command SOUR TSIG1 TSIN1 PHAS 360 SOUR TSIG2 TSIN2 PHAS 360 Res Frequency Displays the resulting frequencies of the sine waves The values of Table Sine Test Signal both components of the test signal are indicated separately in section Sine 1 and section Sine 2 respectively Remote control command SOUR TSIG1 TSIN1 FREQ SOUR TSIG2 TSIN2 FREQ Generate Signal HD Generates a signal and saves it to a file on HD Table Sine Test Signal The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file Remote control command SOUR TSIG1 TSIN CRE NAM Generate Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Table Sine Test Signal Remote control command SOUR TSIG TSIN CRE 1401 3084 32 4 10 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block ARB Test Pattern Dialog The Test Pattern dialog is accessed via the ARB main dialog The dialog can be used to configure a continuous signal Each path I and Q gets a pattern for the signal The patt
222. eactivate the protection level The password for the first level is 123456 This protection level can be used to lock out internal adjustments Example SYST PROT1 ON activates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are only possible after deactivating the lock out SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 deactivates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are enabled again SCPI Compliant SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST SERR queries all errors existing in the error queue Response 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range the two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was last queried SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 94 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section SYSTem STARtup COMPlete This command queries the booting process If start up is completed the instrument is ready for operation The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYSTem STARtup COMPlete queries the state of the start up process SCPI Compliant SYSTem TIME 0 23 0 59 0 59 The command sets the time for the instrument internal clock Example SYST TIME 12 0 0 sets the time to precisely 12 pm SCPI Compliant
223. earCase_Storage SinusAFQ Documents and Settings TriangleMarker DOKUME 1 DRV H Flare_Test mvfslogs National Instruments Dow PrintMig Program Files e Programme date 2004 02 17 10 26 34 samples 100 clock 1e 008 comment Sinewave with restart marker Recent data sets Displays the files last used The entire Path is shown in plain text A maximum of ten files is displayed If the desired file is in the list it can be selected in this window Remote control command n a Directory Selects the drive and the directory where the file is located Load Waveform Select List or in which the file is to be stored New List The currently selected path is displayed above the directory area A new directory can be created in the File Manager File Manager button Remote control command MMEM CDIR D USER 1401 3084 32 4 108 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File list File Name Select Save File Management 1401 3084 32 Storing and Loading Instrument Data Displays the files which are in the selected directory Only the relevant files of the individual functions are displayed without file extensions Remote control command MMEM CAT New list only Enter the file name of the file without file extension This file is then created If a file is highlighted it is overwritten when the file is stored Remote control command n a Load waveform create test signal a
224. ecae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde 8 Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde 8 Schwarz GmbH 8 Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej
225. ed for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol If this configuration is used the computer name must be entered at the position of the IP address It is also possible to assign a fixed IP address to the R amp S AFQ see chapter 1 section Configuring the R amp S AFQ for Network Operation 1401 3084 32 5 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Setting up Control of the R amp S AFQ in the Measurement amp Automation Control Program 1 Startthe program on the controller 2 Open the Create new menu with the right mouse key ox File Edit view Tools Help Configuration 3 Devices and Interfaces Devices and Interfaces gi GPIBO PCI GPIB Y Ports Serial amp Parallel EI Software What is Devices and Interfaces CVI Run Time aie D OD The Devices and Interfaces category lists installed and detected DAQ py GPIB IMAQ IVI Motion VISA and Vx hardware Y NI 488 2 Software NI PAL Software NI VISA eae If you do not see your devices Your device may not be Windows Plug and Play compatible View the confiquration help file for your device from the Help Help Topics menu or the instructions below for additional xl 3 Select TCP IP Resource and open the next page of the Create new menu with the right mouse key Measurement amp b wd Automation Explorer B Bg Devices and Interfaces
226. ed in by pressing the left mouse button and selecting the desired area in the graphic window directly A Zoom Out button is shown for returning to the original size Zoom Out The instrument compensates frequency responses of RF modulators The region of interest is the accessible bandwidth of 200 MHz centered on the RF carrier frequency 1401 3084 32 4 45 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Equalizer Block Modulator Dialog The dialog for setting the Modulator values can be opened in the Equalizer block clicking the config button and selecting Modulator or by selecting Modulator in the Edit Equalizer menu E Equalizer Modulator List Data Edit Data Frequency Entry Mode Absolute y RF Frequency 1 000000000 GHz Gain 2500 5000 7500 10000 f Hz Phase 2500 5000 7500 10000 f Hz State Switches On or Off the loaded modulator correction Remote control commands SOUR EQU MOD STAT ON 1401 3084 32 4 46 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Equalizer Block List Data Opens a dialog for selecting or entering modulator data tables These dialogs are standard Windows dialogs The upper pane displays recent data sets in the left pane a directory can be selected the file is selected in the right pane New List File Manager Modulator Remote control commands MMEM CDIR d user Equalizer SOUR EQU MOD CAT SOUR EQU MOD SEL corr MOD Select List Selects an existing equalizer table Remote contro
227. ed users from gaining access to your computer through the Intemet or a network This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab C Don t allow exceptions Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored Y O Off not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders What else should know about Windows Firewall 3 Select tab Exceptions and call sub menu Add Program Add a Program E To allow communications with a program by adding it to the Exceptions list select the program or click Browse to search for one that is not listed Programs Calculator E MS logon test utility T Notepad E On Screen Keyboard y Paint E Run Ult NC Repeater Sz Run Ule VNC SERVER ZS Run UNC VIEWER E Upgrade Q Windows Explorer A WordPad Path C Program FilessUltrav NCSwinvnc exe 1401 3078 62 1 44 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller 4 Select Run Ultr VNC SERVER and click on Ok 5 Activate check box Run Ultr VNC SERVER in the Exception tab and click on Ok Windows Firewall General Exceptions
228. eed is recognized as the terminator regardless of whether it is sent with or without EOI Example SYST COMM GPIB LTER EOI only a character which is sent simultaneously with the line message EOI is accepted as the terminator 1401 3084 32 6 90 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 30 The command sets the IEC IEEE bus address Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 14 sets IEC IEEE bus address 14 SCPI Compliant SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM USB RES queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 72 000000 INSTR SCPI Device specific SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt The command sets the date for the instrument internal calendar Example SYST DATE 2005 11 01 sets November 1 2005 SCPI Compliant SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON OFF The command switches the update of the display on off A switchover from remote control to manual control always sets the status of the update of the display to ON Example SYST DISP UPD OFF switches update of displayed parameter values off SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 91 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section SYSTem ERRor ALL
229. eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaas 5 18 Responses to Ouertes nenns nennen na 5 19 Parameters o ERR ate emt on 5 19 Overview of Syntax Elements sssssseeeeenn 5 22 Instrument Model and Command Processing sseeeeeee 5 23 Input ln E E ente elo e Ms 5 23 Command Recoontton nano nan nnnnn nc rnnn enne 5 24 Data Base and Instrument Hardware 5 24 Status Reporting Gvsiem ecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeetaeeesenaas 5 25 OUtpu t eet ee eius 5 25 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization 5 25 Status Reporting Gvsiem emen eene 5 26 Overview of the Status Register 5 26 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 27 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE 5 28 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 5 28 Application of the Status Reporting System ssseessseeesennnen nsere 5 29 Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems 5 31 Remote Control Hardware Interfaces eccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeenteeeetneeeeeeae 5 32 IEC IEEE Bus Interface niinen ieren iaieiiea iea aa 5 32 LAN GOnneCtor tice ia irt reda m e ated etes 5 36 1401 3078 62 5 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Remote Control Basics 5 Remote Control Basics Introduction Remote Control Basics This chapter provides Instructions on how to set up the modulation generator for remo
230. eldas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 08 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo r
231. element which is not allowed at this point Example A text parameter is set in quotation marks SOURce FREQuenc y MODE FIXed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Suffix not allowed 138 A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this point of the command Example Command RCL does not permit indicating a suffix SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Suffix too long 134 The suffix contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Syntax error 102 The command is invalid Example The command contains block data the instrument does not accept SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register System error 310 This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform the R amp S Service SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Too many digits 124 The decimal numeric data element contains too many digits SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Too much data 223 More data were sent by the host than the signal generator can handle SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Undefined header 113 The sent command header has not been defined Example Header XYZ is undefined for every instrument SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1401 3
232. eme de management environnemental certifi selon ISO 14001 1171 0200 11 V 05 01 1171020011 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S AFQ100A User Documentation Contents of User Documentation for the I Q Modulation Generator R amp S AFQ100A The user documentation describes the UO Modulation Generator R amp S AFQ100A and all o
233. ems First pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument s rear feet and then carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles at the front Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the instrument handles and remove it Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage immediately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument In this case make sure not to discard the box and packing material It is advisable to keep the original packing material in order to prevent control elements and connectors from being damaged in case the instrument is to be transported or shipped at a later date Installing the Instrument in a 19 Rack The instrument is designed for indoors use It can either be set up independently or mounted in a 197 rack Installing the instrument in a rack requires a rack adapter refer to data sheet for Order No The mounting instructions are supplied with the adapter NOTICE Risk of overheating Insufficient airflow for cooling may cause overheating of the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation always check for space between the ventilation holes and the rack casing to get sufficient air supply in the rack 1401 3078 62 1 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Putting into Operation Safety Instructions General Precautions NOTICE Instrument damage ca
234. ent Address mode is not displayed With the aid of external signals the sequence of the segments can be set The signals are fed in via the BERT BNC connectors at the rear panel of the instrument These control signals for segment hopping can be fed in parallel or serial Note The Segment Address mode FHOP disables the BERT functionality and vice versa Auto Increment The indices of the segments are incremented automatically Remote control command SOUR WSEG NEXT MODE AINC 4 23 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A FHOP Parallel FHOP Serial FHOP Bus Baseband Block The index of the next segment is determined via a data signal on the parallel FHOP bus The signal is fed in parallel as a binary digit via the BERT BNC connectors With the next segment trigger event the signals are loaded as segment index The parallel data lines allow to address up to 16 segments index 0 to 15 Note The FHOP mode requires the hardware revisions Baseboard 2 Rev 5 and SFB Rev 01 05 05 BERT CLOCK bit 3 MSB BERT DATA bit 2 BERT RESTART bit 1 BERT DATA ENABLE bit O LSB Remote control command SOUR WSEG NEXT MODE FPAR The index of the next segment is determined via a data signal on the serial FHOP bus The data and control signals are fed in at the BERT BNC connectors at the rear of the instrument BERT CLOCK fhop ck BERT DATA fhop data BERT DATA ENABLE fhop_strb Data transmission start
235. ent reset to the original state of delivery This includes also the parameters that are unchanged when executing a regular Preset with the RST command e g IEC IEEE bus address However password settings and all settings protected by these password are not changed e g disabled USB connections LAN settings and reference oscillator setting The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST FPR all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to the factory values Resolution SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 93 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the the RST command The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST PRES all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to their default values SCPI Compliant SYSTem PROTect lt n gt STATe ON OFF password The command activates and deactivates the specified protection level There are several protection levels which disable specific service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only These levels are identified by the suffix under PROTect The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation A password must be entered to d
236. entaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Conexi n a tierra El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de peligro general O Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN MARCHA PARADA Observar l
237. equalizer data tables saved on local hard disk The command reads out the number of files in the specified directory The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example EQU IQ CAT LENG queries the number of files containing UO equalizer data tables 1401 3084 32 6 48 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer IQ CATalog This command lists all files containing UO equalizer data tables saved on local hard disk This command reads out the subdirectories and files in the specified directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR d user Equalizer sets the default directory EQU IQ CAT lists all files containing UO equalizer data tables SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ DELete lt FILE NAME gt This command deletes the selected I Q equalizer data table from local hard disk The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ SEL iqdata 1 selects the file iqdata 1 afq iq fgp to be deleted EQU IQ DEL iqdata 1 deletes the file data 1 afq iq fgp from HD SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ I FREQuency 0 1 GHz This command enters frequency values into the current data table of the path selected using the EQU IQ I SEL command Examp
238. er signal is supplied via the TRIG connector on the rear panel Bus The trigger event is executed by remote control using either the command GET TRG or TRIG EXEC Auto The trigger event is executed internally by the firmware Example TRIG SOUR EXT sets an external triggering 1401 3084 32 6 33 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger EXTernal DELay 0 10 sec The command specifies the trigger delay for external triggering It enables the instrument to be synchronized with the device under test or other external devices A delay can be entered only when an external trigger source has been selected Example TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger via the TRIG connector TRIG DEL 10 sets a trigger delay of 10 seconds Device specific SOURce TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 0 10 sec The command specifies the time interval by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger event This command applies only in the case of external triggering Example TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger via the TRIG connector TRIG INH 2 sets a restart inhibit for 2 seconds following a trigger event Device specific SOURce WSEGment This query command indicates which segment the instrument is generating The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SOUR WSEG indicates which segment the instrument is generating Device s
239. erface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The Visual Basic command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet 1401 3084 32 5 29 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System Parallel Poll In a parallel poll the controller uses a single command to request up to eight instruments to transmit one bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable register PPE This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll by means of the command IST The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the Visual Basic command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself
240. ern is entered as a decimal number which is decimal to binary converted internally The signal is provided as a 16 bit wide digital signal for both and Q channels The digital signal is output at Port 2 X2 connector on the front panel of the instrument Converted to analog the signal is output directly at the BNC connectors and Q on the front panel of the instrument For differential output the signal is provided at the four connectors I and I BAR Q and Q BAR amp Test Pattern Pattern Q 0 Generate Signal HD Generate Signal RAM Pattern Enters the pattern number of the component Remote control command SOUR TSIG PATT I 1234 Pattern Q Enters the pattern number the Q component Remote control command SOUR TSIG PATT Q 4567 Generate Signal HD Generates a signal and saves it to a file on HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file Remote control command SOUR TSIG PATT CRE NAM D temp test wv Generate Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Remote control command SOUR TSIG PATT CRE 1401 3084 32 4 11 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Trigger Dialog The Trigger dialog is accessed via the Baseband block The Trigger dialog is used to enter trigger settings The dialog offers selection of internal triggering as well as external triggering via the external trigger connectors TRIG and NEXT In case a multi segmen
241. ern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g IEC IEEE bus address or reference oscillator source settings Note Resetting the instrument to the factory state is possible using the Factory Preset command see Factory Preset Setup on page 4 100 Remote control commands RST SOUR PRES When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched on since all user settings are saved of HD when shutting down User defined instrument states can be stored and called up by calling the file manager in the File menu The preset values can be found in the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands The following table gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings The other presets can be found in the preset tables of the individual dialogs and the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands The list below the table shows the settings that are not affected by the PRESET key Table Error No text of specified style in document 1 Preset state important generator settings Reference frequency internal calibration off Offsets 0 Modulations switched off IEC IEEE bus address not changed Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator dialog Network settings Setup menu IEC IEE
242. es a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 08 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specifie
243. ettings It is opened by selecting the menu item Security in the Setup menu Setup Edit Help System a riRectMar D Test Remote D Protection The menu is divided into the Change Security Password section and the Security Settings section In the password section the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are defined and changed In the security section the remote interfaces are enabled and disabled amp Security Change Security Password New Password Ee Confirm Password Change Password Security Settings USB Device Lan Connections Enable Security Password Accept A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Old password Enters the currently used password Default is 123456 Remote control commands n a New Password Enters the new password Remote control commands n a Confirm New Enters the new password for conformation Password The new password is only valid after the Change Password button is pressed Remote control commands n a 1401 3084 32 4 99 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings USB Device Enables disables the USB interfaces Any device connected to the USB interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The sett
244. event occurs the following segment is output after finishing the current one A trigger event during output of the last segment effects that signal generation switsches to idle mode after completing the segment A segment trigger event is without effect The next regular trigger event activated automatically after a system imposed signal gap restarts signal generation Signal output is repeated as often as Repeat Count of the regular trigger mode is set Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM MODE SEAM The current segment is output once Then the instrument switches to the idle mode waiting for the next segment trigger event The next segment trigger event switches to the next segment A regular trigger event restarts signal output Run Mode Continuous Trg Segm Trg Each segment trigger event switches to the next segment After the last segment the first segment is generated again 4 20 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Repeat N Times Baseband Block Run Mode Single Trg Segm Trg Each segment trigger event switches to the next segment A regular trigger event resets signal generation Run Mode Repeat N Times Trg Segm Trg Each segment trigger event switches to the next segment A regular trigger event resets signal generation Generation of the multi segment waveform is repeated as often as Repeat Count of the regular trigger mode is set Remote control command
245. ever it is not possible to enter or change values BUSY Indicates that the instrument is executing a command READY Indicates that the instrument is ready for operation after booting the instrument 1401 3078 62 1 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 2 Switch E POWER Putting into Operation On Off Switch See section Switching On on The On Off switch switches the instrument from the page 1 17 standby mode to the operating state provided the power switch at the instrument rear is switched on The standby key switches the instrument from the standby mode to the operating mode and vice versa toggle switch provided that the power switch at the instrument s rear panel is switched on POWER LED The LED at the top left of the switch indicates the standby and ready state of the instrument Green Lighting green the power LED indicates that the instrument is power supplied and ready for operation Orange Lighting orange the LED indicates that the instrument is in standby mode CAUTION Danger of shock hazard The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode 3 Status LED for LXI LAN connection Sn 1401 3078 62 LAN See data sheet and section Connecting the RES AFQ to a Network LAN on page 1 25 and chapter 5 section LAN Connector and chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface Indicates that the R amp S AFQ is connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network The color of
246. external signal is applied or the signal is out of range Remedy Check the selected reference signal source internal or external in the Reference Oscillator menu Setup Change setting to internal if no appropriate external source is available SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register GET not allowed 105 A Group Execute Trigger GET is within a command line Note A Group Execute Trigger GET is only allowed at the end of a command line or in a separate command line SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Hardware error 240 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the device SCPI Exection error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Hardware missing 241 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a missing device hardware Example An option is not fitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Header suffix out of range 114 The command contains an illegal numeric suffix Example SOURce22 is not defined for the signal generator SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Illegal parameter value 224 The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is indicated SOUR BB GSM TRIG SOUR TASTe SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 4 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Invalid bloc
247. f electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 08 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning d Caution Hot surface Paw Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Earth Ground Class Il Equipment to identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class Il equipment device protected by double or reinforced insulation Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicat
248. for marker 2 Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 39 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt PATTern The command defines the bit pattern used to generate the marker signal in the setting SOURce TRIGger OUTPut MODE PATTern 0 is marker off 1 is marker on Example TRIG OUTP2 MODE PATT activates the marker signal according to a bit pattern on output MARKER 2 TRIG OUTP2 PATT 11D sets a bit pattern for MARKER 2 Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt PULSe DIVider 2 1024 The command sets the divider for the pulsed marker signal in the setting SOURce TRIGger OUTPut MODE PULSe The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider Example TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 2 sets the divider for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 2 TRIG OUTP2 FREQ queries the resulting pulse frequency of the marker signal Response 66000 the resulting pulse frequency is 66 kHz Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt PULSe FREQuency The command queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal in the setting SOURce TRIGger OUTPut MODE PULSe The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider The divider is defined with command TRIG OUTP PULS DIV The command is a query only and therefore has no RST value Example TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 4 sets the divider for
249. ge 3 18 By using the cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by using the Enter key The up down cursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys it is possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory will only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the Esc key again shifts the entry focus up one level The buttons softkeys can be selected and activated Shift file Mark file and then press the Cut button Mark the directory to which the file is to be shifted and then click on the Paste button If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file Copy file Mark file and then press the Copy button Mark the directory to which the file is to be copied and then click on the Paste button If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file Rename file Mark file and then press the Rename button An entry window for entering the new file name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key If a file with the same name already exists a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file 1401 3078 62 3 30 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Fi
250. ge of the data clock can be selected Positive The rising edge of the clock signal is active Remote control commands SOUR OUTP DIG CLOC SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the clock signal is active Remote control commands SOUR OUTP DIG CLOC SLOP NEG 1401 3084 32 4 65 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Introduction The instrument contains an integrated bit error rate tester which makes it possible to evaluate a signal demodulated and decoded by a DUT by measuring the bit error rate A known PRBS modulated data sequence PRBS pseudo random binary sequence is sent to the DUT The PRBS data sequence is decoded by the DUT and sent to the instrument in the form of clock and data signals The bit error rate tester of the instrument synchronizes to the known PRBS sequence and counts the bit errors The ratio obtained by dividing the number of error bits by the total number of bits is the BER The dialog for adjusting the BERT settings can be accessed in the block diagram via the BERT function block or by selecting BERT in the Edit menu The equipment layout for the basic unit R amp S AFQ with R amp S AFQ B10 B11 waveform memory option includes the option R amp S AFQ K80 Bit Error Rate Tester The BERT interface is located on the rear panel see chapter 1 section Legend for Rear Panel View Besides the data and clock input it provides other inputs with whic
251. gement File Manager The File Manager allows general file management such as copying shifting renaming and deleting files as well as generating new directories Thus also externally created files for example waveforms created by using the R amp S WinlQSIM2 program can be saved to the instrument by copying them from a memory stick or a network to the internal hard disk The File Manager can be called up via the File Manager button in any menu to which files can be saved In the upper area File Type the File Manager allows the type file selection to be displayed This can be used to process either all files all files selection or a specific selection of files e g waveforms wv selection The table at the end of this section contains a list of the file types The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed above the windows If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed Unlike the file select windows the File Manager displays the full file names including the extensions The buttons softkeys trigger the associated actions such as copying shifting or deleting the marked files A new directory can be created in the level below the marked directory Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Dialog Area Setting Parameters on pa
252. generator settings The other presets can be found in the preset tables of the individual menus and the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g IEC IEEE bus address or reference oscillator source settings The list below the table shows the settings that are not affected by the PRESET key t P key combination Reference frequency internal calibration off Offsets 0 Modulations switched off IEC IEEE bus address not changed With preset all parameters and switch states are preset including those of deactivated operating modes Presettings beyond those in the above list can be seen in the preset tables in chapter 4 or from the RST values of the associated IEC IEEE bus commands Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key Reference frequency settings Ref Oscillator dialog Network settings Setup menu IEC IEEE bus address Setup menu Password and settings protected by passwords Setup menu Start Stop Gui Update Setup menu Display and keyboard settings Setup menu Save and Recall settings KA KKK Windows XP NOTICE Functions of the instrument may be impaired Using not specifically authorized software may impair instrument functions Drivers and programs used in the instrument under Windows XP have been adapted to the modulation generator Existing softwar
253. ger Off When retrigger is disabled a subsequent trigger after the start of signal generation is without effect The waveform output can be restarted by switching off and then switching on the ARB state in the Baseband Block Retrigger On When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a subsequent trigger after start of signal generation Single The waveform is output once after a trigger event occured Every subsequent trigger event internal by clicking the Execute button or external causes a restart Retrigger Off When retrigger is disabled a trigger during signal generation is without effect Retrigger On When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a trigger during signal generation Repeat N Times Multiple output of the waveform when a trigger event occurs Note Run mode Repeat N Times is enabled only in combination with Segment Trigger Source Auto If Segment Trigger Source is set different to Auto the instrument operates in run mode Continuous Retrigger Off When retrigger is disabled a trigger during signal generation is without effect Retrigger On When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a subsequent trigger event after start of signal generation The waveform is repeated as often as the number of Repeat Count is set After finishing the last run signal generation stops The waveform output can be restarted by retriggering or switching off and then
254. ght help the user to get familiar with the instrument The chapter includes a description of screenshots operation of menus and the block diagram and the setting of parameters in dialogs The introduction into remote control is provided in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics The instrument can be operated manually either via the interactive block diagram or via a menu tree All menus are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way Key combinations on the external keyboard or alternatively a mouse allow direct access to entries and settings A keyboard emulation menu can be called from the Windows XP operating system START Programs Accessories Accessibility On Screen Keyboard Thus operation via mouse only is possible An overview of the key combinations can be found in the following section Legend of Manual Controls The clear cut display shows the current modulation generator state Graphs can be called for a visual check of the output signal Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration Chapter 4 Instrument Functions includes a detailed description of modulation generator functions Remote control of the instrument is described in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics and chapter 6 Remote Control Commands Legend of Manual Controls The following table lists all available key combinations used on the PC keyboard to trigger functions on the instrument Keyboard labels are described in alphabetica
255. gin name and password used on the computer must be entered 1401 3078 62 1 33 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Manual Remote Control via an External Controller The R amp S AFQ can be manually remote controlled from an external PC via a network link This allows convenient operation of the vector modulation generator from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack in the next room Manual remote control in contrast to remote control does not use remote control commands but a separate software which is installed on the external PC After its start the software simulates the user interface of the R amp S AFQ The instrument can thus be manually operated from the PC as on the unit itself A precondition for manual remote control is a connection between modulation generator and PC via a LAN network and the installation of the software on the PC and on the R amp S AFQ Two free of charge programs are available for setting up the connection for manual remote control The Windows program Remote Desktop Connection for PCs with Window operating system and the program Ultr VNC for PCs with Linux Unix or Windows operating system After the connection is established the modulation generator screen with the block diagram is displayed on the external PC and the R amp S AFQ can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specif
256. gt void main void const unsigned int samples 20 Number of samples to convert FILE fp sour fp dest float i float q float unsigned short i usint q usint INE diz fp sour fopen SICO TXT rt if fp sour 0 return fp dest fopen SICO WV wb if fp dest 0 fclose fp sour return Write required tags to waveform file fprintf fp dest TYPE SMU WV 0 fprintf fp dest CLOCK 10e6 fprintf fp dest SAMPLES Sd samples fprintf fp dest WAVEFORM d samples 4 1 for i 0 i lt samples 1 Read I Q pair from ASCII file if fscanf fp sour sf cf amp i float amp q float EOF break Convert I Q pair to unsigned short i usint unsigned short floor i_ float 32767 0 q usint unsigned short floor q_ float 32767 0 zk 08 5 t 0 5 Write converted I Q pair to waveform file fwrite amp i usint 2 1 fp dest fwrite amp q usint 2 1 fp dest fprintf fp dest fclose fp dest fclose fp sour 1401 3084 32 6 26 DH R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Baseband Block Trigger and Input Settings The Trigger and Input system contains the commands for configuration of the trigger settings xil ind Eu MN SOURce INPut CONTrol IMPedance G50 G1K SOURce INPut CONTrol THReshold 0 2V SOURce INPut TRIGger SEGMent SLOPe POSitive NEGative SOURce I
257. h the user data containing the PRBS sequence can be masked Test setup The following figure shows the test setup for the bit error rate measurement The data used to drive the DUT can be generated by an R amp S modulation generator or an user defined external source The instrument can generate any externally computed modulation signals that were created using e g WinIQSIM2 software A known PRBS sequence must be used for the bit error rate measurement PRBS Data RF UO R amp S Modulation DUT A Generator SD BERT ei Interface Data Enable Restart Clock Demodulated Data Fig 4 3 Test setup for bit error rate measurement The DUT is driven using a known data sequence It demodulates the data and sends it together with a clock signal to the instrument The Data Enable signal marks the user data of the signal The restart signal for restarting the PRBS calculation is only important for the bit error rate measurement 1401 3084 32 4 66 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block PRBS data To be able to detect faulty bits by a BER measurement the data generation polynomial must be known PRBS sequences are therefore used as the method for computing the data These quasi random bit sequences are repeated periodically depending on the polynomial selected A randomly selected initial status yields exactly one subsequent status The initial status and therefore the subsequent status o
258. han R amp S AFQ B10 see data sheet the sample memory sizes amount to 256 MS and 1 GS respectively The instrument can process waveforms generated by WinlQSIM2 or Matlab software or generate ARB waveforms internally These files are created and saved in the ARB dialog It is possible to use either predefined or subsequently defined markers that are sent to the marker outputs in synchronicity with the UO output signals The markers have to be set in the Marker dialog and a delay can be selected by the user Multi segment waveforms consisting of a combination of multiple waveforms can be defined in order to enable rapid alternation between different waveforms with differing test signals Such waveforms can be used in test systems for example Each segment represents a completely independent waveform that is output with its own marker The entire multi segment waveform is loaded into memory The segment intended to be output at any given moment can be selected by the user It is therefore possible to alternate between the individual waveform segments without experiencing any delay due to the loading operation If very high switchover speeds are required the test signals can be continuously scrolled through with the aid of an external trigger The ARB has been produced in the form of an interpolating ARB generator For modulation signals with a sample rate less than 300 MHz a resampler interpolates the sample rate to the instument s system rate of 300 M
259. has no query and no RST value Example Bi RST value Resolution ERT STAR starts a continuous measurement Dependencies These commands automatically set Device specific BERT SEQuence AUTO BERT STATe to BERT STATe Switches on off the BERT measurement Depending on the selected mode either a continuous measurement BERT S EQ AUTO or a single measurement BERT SEQ SING is carried out A single measurement must be triggered TRIG BERT Example B ERT S EO SING RIG BI ERT STAT ON switches the BER measurement on ERT selects a single measurement starts the single measurement Dependencies set to BERT STARt and to BERT STOP 1401 3084 32 6 69 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT STOP Stops an ongoing measurement This command triggers an event and hence has no query and no RST value Example BERT STOP stops the measurement To start a new measurement the BER measurement must be switched on again by BERT STAT ON Dependencies These commands automatically set BERT STATe to OFF Device specific BERT UNIT ENGineering SClentific PCT PPM Sets the unit for the error rate display on the screen BERT RES always specifies the error rate as the quotient of Number of errors and Number of data items unaffected by this command Parameters ENGineering The error
260. hat are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde 8 Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the produc
261. he BER measurement wait as long as the data is not enabled If the data is enabled the measurement is continued Example frame access header user data guard data clock if m NNUU data enable The figure shows a TDMA signal with user data that contains the PRBS data sequence and various check fields which should be ignored for the bit error rate measurement Below that are the associated clock and Data Enable signals Not Used Any signal at the Data Enable input is ignored all data at the BERT data input is used for the measurement Remote control command BERT SET DEN OFF Low The Data Enable signal is used The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a low level of the Data Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a high level of the Data Enable signal Remote control command BERT SET DEN LOW High The Data Enable signal is used The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a high level of the Data Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a low level of the Data Enable signal Remote control command BERT SET DEN HIGH 1401 3084 32 4 79 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Pattern Ignore Activates deactivates ignoring of pure 0 or 1 bit sequences at least 32 bits long Activating Pattern Ignore excludes faulty frames from the measurement In
262. he ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0 ON or OFF is returned by a query Example Setting command SOURce EQUalizer STATe OFF Query SOURce EQUalizer STATe Answer 0 Text parameters observe the syntax rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command SOURce TRIGger SOURce MANual 5 20 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Strings Strings must always be entered within quotation marks or Example DIAGnostic MEASure POINt DIAG P5V Block data Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example MMEMory DATA test file wv 45168xxxxxxxx Test file wv denotes the name of the file to which the data are written The comma is followed by the binary data block The hash symbol introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data byte
263. he instrument or contact the R amp S support center The hard disk needs to be installed at an authorized R amp S service shop 1401 3078 62 1 15 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Connecting the R amp S AFQ to the AC Supply The R amp S AFQ is automatically matched to the applied AC voltage see rear panel There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC supply connector is at the rear of the unit see below The nominal voltage and frequencies ranges are displayed on the rear panel and quoted in the data sheet Since the instrument is in compliance with safety class EN61010 1 it should only be connected to a Socket with earthing contact Power Fuses The R amp S AFQ is fully fused by two fuses IEC127 T4 0H 250 V The fuses are accommodated in the pull out fuse holder next to the power connector Before replacing the fuses disconnect the power cord from the R amp S AFQ the fuse box is locked mechanically as long as a power connector is plugged in Use two screwdrivers simultaneously to lift the fuse holder below the power connector and pull it out Use only fuses of the mentioned type Y Fuse box Use the power cord supplied with the R amp S AFQ for connection to the AC supply Since the R amp S AFQ is designed in line with protection B class requirements to EN61010 it may only be connected to an m earthing contact type connector As soon as the connection has been established R amp S AFQ outputs
264. he list itself The list is reactivated when the associated settings are loaded but the list may have been modified or deleted in the meantime or may not be available on a different instrument If the list has been modified the new entries will be used An error message appears if an attempt is made to access a non existing list or to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument Note Network settings and remote settings are not saved and restored Lists are stored and loaded in the appropriate menus For example an equalizer I Q correction data list is created in the Editing Q Data menu File extension for the different data lists are automatically assigned to the user files File name and directory to which a file has to be saved is user selectable When loading an instrument setting it is possible to select wether the current frequency and level settings are to be retained or wether the stored settings are to be activated It is possible to delete stored instrument settings General file management functions such as copying and moving files are available in the File Manager dialog File Menu The File menu offers access to functions for loading or saving instrument settings File Setup Edit New Open Save Save S Exit 1401 3084 32 4 104 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data New Clears the current instrument settings All devices are reset and conform to the default settings
265. hen the data signal applied is stable Reflections on the clock line occur clocking the data signal into the BER measurement twice e g on lines without termination The instrument input is not terminated Incorrect polarity of data signal or Data Enable signal In this case the PRBS cannot synchronize Note that an inversion of the output signal specified for some cases by the PRBS standard is performed automatically upon PRBS selection Manual inversion of the data signal is therefore not required No Sync status and an error rate of approx 50 1 1401 3084 32 4 74 A bit error occurs during synchronization e g nine data bits with PRBS9 The BER measurement is set up incorrectly This fault is internally detected and automatically corrected If data that is not cyclically continued i e when a break in the sequence occurs at the memory wrap around the measurement will not be started at the right time The signal on the Restart line enables the measurement to be started optimally at the beginning of the sequence E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block The Configuration section is used to select the type of measurement the data source and the termination criteria If the data is not cyclically continued the measurement can be selectively interrupted and restarted Certain data areas and frames that have been marked as faulty can be excluded from the measurement Mode Selects the
266. her tags are optional and can be inserted after the TYPE tag in arbitrary order e g TYPE SMU WV 0 COMMENT I Q sine cosine 20 points clock 10 MHz CLOCK 10e6 Samples 20 WAVEFORM 81 4IQIQIQIQIQIQ IQ C program for creating the file SICO TXT containing 20 sine and cosine pairs finclude lt stdlib h gt Contents of the file include lt stdio h gt SICO TXT include lt math h gt Sine 1 Cosine Q 0 000000 1 000000 VOL main vol oid main void 0 309017 0 951057 0 587785 0 809017 const unsigned int samples 20 0 809017 0 587785 const float pi 3 141592654 0 951057 0 309017 1 000000 0 000000 Eod eder spa 0 951056 0 309017 ESTE fp 0 809017 0 587785 int i 0 587785 0 809017 0 309017 0 951056 0 000000 1 000000 fo f n SICO TXT w E ET e i d 309017 0 951057 if fp 0 587785 0 809017 return 809017 587785 951056 309017 000000 0 000000 951056 0 309017 809017 0 587785 grad 360 0 float samples float i 587785 0 809017 rad grad pi 180 0 309017 0 951057 for i20 i samples 1 fprintf fp Sf sf n sin rad cos rad fclose fp 1401 3084 32 6 25 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Extract from a C program generating a binary data set from the I Q pairs in the file SICO TXT and storing the result to file SICO WV include lt stdlib h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt math h
267. hich is defined as unwanted It protects the controller from an attack of hostile users and programs On the R amp S AFQ the Internet Connection Firewall ICF is activated for all network connections per default to enhance protection of the instrument To enable data transfer with other controllers in a local network file and peripherals sharing must be specifically permitted 1 Open the start menu select Control Panel and open the context menu by pressing the right mouse key 2 Click on Switch to Classic View and select the Windows Firewall Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is helping to protect your PC Windows Firewall helps protect pour computer by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to your computer through the Intemet or a network Y oa This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this computer with the exception of those selected on the Exceptions tab dj C Don t allow exceptions Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure locations such as airports You will not be notified when Windows Firewall blocks programs Selections on the Exceptions tab will be ignored Y O Off not recommended Avoid using this setting Turning off Windows Firewall may make this computer more vulnerable to viruses and intruders What else should know about Windows Firewall 1401 3078 62 1 31 E 3 R amp S AFQ10
268. his command can be used to read transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from to the instrument The binary data block has the following structure 234 lt block_data gt always comes first in the binary block lt number gt indicates how many digits the subsequent length entry has 2 in example lt number gt indicates the number of subsequent bytes 34 in example binary block data binary block data for the specified length The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM DATA TEST1 WV 3767 lt binary data writes the block data to the file test1 wv MMEM DATA TEST1 WV sends the data of the file Test1 wv from the instrument to the control computer in the form of a binary block SCPI Compliant MMEMory DCATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories of the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The directories are output in a list the list entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM DCAT reads out the subdirectories of the current directory Response test wave digital the subdirectories test wave and digital exist in the current directory SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 81 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A
269. hronized to the clock signal of the synchronizer and then forwarded to the DAC Filter In parallel mode the data is not resampled Time and frequency shifts as well as equalizer features are not accessible 1401 3084 32 8 15 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Contents Error Messages Contents Chapter 9 Error Messages 9 Error Messages iii 9 1 Introduction Status Information and Messages 9 1 E TE 9 1 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages 9 2 Block data not allowed 7168 9 2 Character data not allowed 71481 9 2 Character data too long C71A4 nara 9 2 Command Error 100 sessssssseeeene een eene 9 2 Command protected 203 E emen 9 3 Data out of range 222 9 3 Data type error 2104 ET 9 3 Device specific error L 2001 9 3 Exponent too large C7123 en 9 3 Expression data not allowed 178 sse 9 3 External reference out of range or disconnected 50 9 4 GET not allowed 2108 9 4 Hardware error 240 asesinar 9 4 Hardware missing 241 essen 9 4 Header suffix out of range 2141 9 4 Illegal parameter value C2241 eee eeceeeeeeeeneeeeteteeeeetteeeeeeeneeeeeees 9 4 Invalid block data 2161 9 5 Invalid Character 20711 9 5 Invalid separator 103 ssssssse m 9 5 Invalid Suffix 21 91 TE 9 5 Lists not same length 226 9 5 Missing parameter 100 9 6 No error Oli E 9 6 N
270. i 1 36 Running Trigger ARB 6 35 6 38 S Sample Clock Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 168 Sine Test Signal ARB s 4 166 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 4 170 Samples Clock Rectangular Test Signal ARB 6 9 Sine Test Signal ARD 6 9 Table Sine Test Signal ARB 6 9 1401 3084 32 10 15 Index Samples per Period Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 168 Sine Test Signal ARB 4 166 Rectangular Test Signal ARB 6 15 Sine Test Signal ARB sss 6 17 Save File name sena 4 276 Flia a 4 279 INNO AAA 6 4 Instrument settings 4 275 4 276 6 4 6 102 SCPI Error messages 9 2 Version iua Pie im 5 1 Segment address mode 4 186 Auto increment sss 4 186 FHOP oarallel 4 187 FHOP serial ee 4 187 Segment trigger Delay ioi ba ets 4 188 Exec lte cs t ee 4 188 Jmpedance 0 escccccccceeeneeteeceeeeeeetentenaeess 4 190 Inhibit zie IRR 4 189 DIODEO ep E 4 190 Negaliv ioi p ER ERES 4 190 Positive eise tede 4 190 Threshold eeaeee 4 190 Segment trigger mode ss 4 180 Conftinuous 5 nri deed 4 180 Continuous seamless 4 181 Repeat Count 4 185 Repeat N Umes ccceccceeeeeteteetteees 4 183
271. iaeeeeees 4 86 Software Options Setup System sssssssssssssss 4 86 Install SW Options Setup System cccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesneees 4 88 Purge Setup System occccoinnccccncononccnnononcnnncnnncnnn nano rana tenent nnne 4 89 Debug Page Setup Gvstem n 4 90 Update Setup System sssssssssssseseeeeenne 4 91 Self Test Setup Test 4 92 Diagnostic Setup Test 4 93 Memory Access Setup Test 4 96 Memory Test Setup TeSt errietan neni entree nnne 4 96 GPIB Setup Remote 4 97 Protection Setup Protection sss 4 98 Security Setup Gecurty eee cent eee eeeteeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeeaas 4 99 Factory Preset Setup Factory Preset AA 4 100 Help Menu nic Ue ee PE Lit 4 101 Storing and Loading Instrument Data 4 104 File Meng icio oe diae peractae dada 4 104 File Select Windows c cccceceeccceeeseeceeeeseecensneeececnseeceeenseeaeeentenees 4 108 File ManaQement ccccceccccceceeccceeeeeeceeeeneecensnseceeenseeceeenseaceeenenanes 4 110 1 4 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Overview of Instrument Functions 4 Instrument Functions Overview of Instrument Functions This chapter explains the functions of the UO modulator and the options available in the setting dialogs The associated IEC IEEE bus command is specified for each parameter where applicable The largest part of the chapter describes the functions used for the internal generation of the signals Loading of w
272. ial amp Parallel VISA Alas AFQ Unique VISA alias to access this device e VISA Ethernet Devices Static Device 1 Tells whether this device was statica Enabled 1 Tells whether this device is enabled 89 1 2 110 Name of the host for this device wh 4 On the viWrite tab under Basic I O commands can be sent to the instrument Instrument responses are displayed on the viRead tab for further program operation refer to the online help of the program TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0x001AD688 viwriteFromFile viReadToFile viwiite viRead vidssertTrigger viReadSTB viClear system error all n EJ m Return Count Asyne fe Write data to a message based bus or device Execute 1401 3084 32 5 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Switchover to Remote Control Return to manual operation is possible either manually with the Ctrl Q key combination on the external keyboard or via the LAN interface Manually Press the Ctrl o key combination Note The ctr Q key combination can be disabled by the universal command amp LLO see section VXI 11 Interface Messages on page 5 38 in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is possible only via remote control The Ctrl Q key combination can be enabled again by the interface message amp NREN see section VXI 11 Interface Messages on page 5 36
273. ic SOURce TRIGger SEGMent SOURce MANual EXTernal BUS AUTO The command selects the segment trigger source of a multi segment waveform Parameter Manual The segment trigger event is executed by clicking the Execute button or the TRIGGER key on the front panel 1401 3084 32 6 32 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation External The segment trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigger signal is supplied via NEXT connector Bus The segment trigger event is executed by remote control using the command TRIG SEGM EXEC Auto The segment trigger event is executed internally by the firmware Signal output starts immediately when ARB modulation is enabled trigger events are ignored segment mode Single or Repeat N Times only Note The Trigger Source Auto disables the Segment Modes Continuous and Continuous Seamless and vice versa Example TRIG SEGM SOUR AUTO selects the segment trigger source SOURce TRIGger SOURce MANual EXTernal BUS AUTO The command selects the trigger source Parameter Manual The trigger event can be executed by pressing the TRIG key on the front panel or by clicking the Execute button which is displayed in Manual mode only As a precondition a trigger mode other than Auto must be selected External The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigg
274. ic instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in chapter 3 section Legend of Manual Controls on page 3 1 Installation of the remote control software and establishing the connection between external PC and modulation generator is described in the following 1401 3078 62 1 34 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Configuration for Manual Remote Control via Windows Remote Desktop Connection The instrument is operated with the aid of the Windows program Remote Desktop Connection which is provided free of charge by Microsoft in the download area of the Internet http www microsoft com Manual remote control of the modulation generator via Remote Desktop is possible under the following conditions 94 90 The Windows 95 operating system or higher and the Remote Desktop Connection program are installed on the external PC and a LAN interface is configured for the network The modulation generator and PC are linked via a LAN The Remote Desktop Connection is enabled on the R amp S AFQ R amp S AFQ data IP address or computer name of the R amp S AFQ in the network is entered in the Remote Desktop Connection program of the external PC Login on the external computer for the R amp S AFQ was carried out with the correct user name instrument and the correct password instrument NOTICE Risk of unauthorized access After activation of the remote de
275. ich establish a connection to the controller They can be used for connecting peripherals such as mouse and keyboard or a memory stick for data transmission Two of the master USB 2 0 connectors are at the instrument front A third one is fitted at the rear panel along with an USB 1 1 connector labeled as USB 2 and USB 1 respectively USB IN The fifth connector is an USB 2 0 type B interface device USB and located at the rear of the instrument labeled as USB IN It can be used for remote control The device ID required in this case is 31 HEX for remote control The vendor ID is AAD HEX 1401 3084 32 8 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Specifications of Digital Interfaces Specifications of Digital Interfaces Option R amp S AFQ B18 provides two ports Note If digital ports are required choose instrument option R amp S AFQ B18 Port 1 is a connector with 26 pins which outputs IQ signals multiplexed this port is appropriate for connecting other R amp S instruments The maximum system clock frequency amounts to 100 MHz Port2 is a HD SCSI connector with 68 pins which outputs memory data parallel not multiplexed The maximum system clock frequency amounts to 300 MHz This port is appropriate for driving DACs Fig 8 5 Pin Assignment of Port 1 and Port 2 1401 3084 32 8 10 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Specifications of Digital Interfaces Port 1 Port 1 drives instrument equipped with a digital UO input providing two modes
276. ich the waveform has to be output in Hz A query of CLOCk after loading the waveform returns the value set using the CLOCK tag This value can subsequently be altered with the aid of the CLOCk command Example CLOCK 54000000 IEC bus query WAV TAG CLOCK queries the content of the CLOCK tag Response 54000000 the clock frequency is set to 54 MHz 1401 3084 32 6 19 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation COMMENT string optional The tag contains a plain text ASCII string of arbitrary length The string is not analyzed in the Instrument It is used to describe the file The string is allowed to contain all printable ASCII characters except the closing curly bracket Example COMMENT File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels IEC bus query WAV TAG COMMENT queries the content of the COMMENT tag of the selected waveform file Response File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels the comment on the waveform reads File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels COPYRIGHT string optional for waveforms The tag contains an ASCII string of arbitrary length The string is not analyzed in the R amp S Signal Generator It is sed to store copyright information about the file content Example COPYRIGHT RohdesSchwarz IEC bus query WAV TAG COPYRIGHT queries the content of the COPYRIGHT tag of the selected waveform file Response Rohde amp Schwarz copyright res
277. idad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m Sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 96 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 96 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 ndice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente
278. ides with Rohde amp Schwarz DATE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss optional The tag contains the date and time at which the file was created The year must be expressed as four digits The instrument does not analyze this tag Example DATE 2003 04 02 14 32 12 IEC bus query WAV TAG DATE queries the content of the DATE tag of the selected waveform file Response 2003 04 02 14 32 12 the waveform was created on April 2 2003 at 14 hrs 32 min 1401 3084 32 6 20 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation LEVEL OFFSET RMSOffset dB PeakOffset dB optional for waveforms The tag determines the level of the ARB signal in the waveform file The offset levels define the offset of rms and peak value relative to the 16 bit full scale modulation 32767 to 32767 0 dB RMSOffset dB RMSOffset dB defines the rms level offset of the signal relative to full scale ARB signal in the WAVEFORM tag The offset is defined in ASCII float format The value is always positive A 3dB value indicates that the rms level of the signal is 3 dBs below the full scale full scale max amplitude of vector of I Q samples SIQ max sqrt I2 Q2 max 0 dB PeakOffset dB PeakOffset_dB defines the peak level offset of the signal relative to full scale for the ARB signal in the WAVEFORM tag The offset is defined in ASCII float format The value usually equals O dB as in the majority of cases the I Q samples signed 16 bi
279. ied file does not exist the instrument will create a new one assigning the entered file name If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out on the default drive selected with the MMEM MSIS command The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ I SEL corr il selects a file containing a data table previously entered by the user SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 50 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q FREQuency 0 1 GHz This command enters frequency values into the current data table of the Q path The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU 1Q O FREO 10000 20000 30000 enters three frequency values into the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q GAIN 5 50 dB This command enters gain values into the current data table of the Q path The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ Q GAIN 0 5 3 enters three gain values into the current data table SCPI 0 001 dB Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ Q PHASe 360 360 deg This command enters phase values into the current data table of the Q path The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ Q PHAS 0
280. igger The lower value 50 Ohm is recommended for high clock frequencies or signals with high slew rates The impedance can be set only when the clock source External is selected Remote control command SOUR INP CONT IMP The reference clock source can be selected in the Reference Clock 10 MHz section In addition synchronization of several R amp S AFQs is enabled and configured Reference Clock 10 MHz Sync Mode Normal D Source Internal Y Delay ns 0 000 Reference Clock 10 MHz Normal External e Sync Mode Source Delay ns 0 000 Synchronisation Bandwidth Narrow D Reference Clock 10 MHz Sync Mode Normal i Master Slave Last Slave 1401 3084 32 4 33 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Sync Mode Reference Clock NOTICE 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block Analog signal output only Selects the mode for synchronization with other R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generators This clock is used for synchronizing several connected R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generators see also the following section Setting Up Several Connected R amp S AFQs for Precise Simultaneous Signal Output on page 4 36 Note The synchronization of several connected R amp S AFQ 1 Q Modulation Generators requires the Baseboard Revision 8 or higher Up to baseboard Revision 5 only synchronization mode normal is provided stand alone mode With several connected instruments the con
281. ighlighted the file name is entered automatically in the entry field File name Then the current settings will overwrite the settings in the file Remote control command MMEM CAT Enter the file name of the file without file extension This file is then created To modify an existing configuration a file can be selected also Then the current settings will overwrite the settings in the file Remote control command SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 d Ntest savrcl The instrument assigns the file extension savrcl Save Recall Files to the file automatically This suffix is preset and cannot be entered Remote control command Stores the current instrument settings under the specified path and closes the window Remote control command SAV 4 MMEM STOR STAT 4 d Ntest savrcl Terminates the action and closes the window The current settings remain unsaved Remote control command 4 107 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Select Windows File select windows as Load Waveform Select List Create Test Signal Create List file Which name or New List provide options for loading and storing user data Lists complex modulation and control data or waveforms are handled within these windows Pi Load Waveform recent data sets c afq_lists SineTriRectMarker SinewaveMarker c afq_lists SineTriRectMarker SineTriRectMarker a RectangleMarker SineTriRectMarker SinewaveMarker Cl
282. ignment lIO seen 6 77 SOURce OUTPut DIGitale CH PA SSignment l1 essen 6 77 SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH PASSignment QO sse enne nnns 6 77 L OiUlf ce OUT Pur DlGmtalcCH DA GionmentO eee 6 77 L OiUlf ce OUT Pur DlGmalzCH DOT 6 78 SOURce OUTPut DIGital CH RESolution nn narrar 6 78 SOURc6e JOUTPut STATO i e D t ee eel ee ge 6 78 Ier 6 7 SOURce ROSCillator DELay 4 d et de de ev eee auae n cioe ga ena e VR ode Rupe 6 51 SOURce JROSCillator EXTernal SBANQWIdth sese 6 53 SOURce JROSCillator SOURCE sss essen nnne nhan shes nannten nnns ann 6 53 SOURce JROSCillator S YNC MODE sessanta A eaei aeee aaaeeeaa 6 54 SOURCES TA TO std E e tete te Bia Nasi Ra E EB ERE DR E oe a exu dun 6 7 SOURce TRIGger EXTernal DELay essi aed ie 6 40 SOURce TRIGger EXTernal INHibit esses sessi nnns 6 40 Leer RR ee EE 6 32 SQURGe ITRIGger MODE at o iia 6 34 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 42 DELay sisse 6 43 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 42 DELay MAXimum 0 sss eene 6 45 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 42 DELay MINimum esses esee 6 45 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 4 LIST iiie seinen nennen nennen nennen nnne nn 6 45 SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt MODE enenatis nans 6 46 SOURCce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt ON Time 6 47 SO
283. ilable under R amp S part number 1415 0201 02 1410 9069 32 4 65 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block The word width in bits the low to high level difference and the offsets of the UO components are set in the Signal section Signal Resolution 16 Bits Amplitude 0 800 FS Offset 0 000 FS D Q Offset 0 000 FS Resolution Setting the word width in bits to specify the digital resolution of the signal The analog signal is not influenced Value range 6 Bits 16 Bits Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG RES BIT6 Amplitude Sets the amplitude value for a fully modulated input signal The value range depends on the signal resolution Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG AMPL 1FS Offset Sets an offset to the component of the digital signal The abbreviation FS means full scale Value range 0 1FS 0 1 FS Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG OFFS I 0 01 Q Offset Sets an offset to the Q component of the digital signal The abbreviation FS means full scale Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG OFFS Q 0 01 1401 3084 32 4 63 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block The output pins can be mapped to the signal or to a marker in the section Output Pin Assignment Note The section Output Pin Assignment is displayed only if PORT2 is activated Interface 2 Parallel LVDS Output Pin Assignment 1 0 LSB maps to Signal D 1 1 maps to Signal D Q 0 LSB maps to Signal D Q 1 ma
284. ime a SYSTem ERRor or STATus QUEue query is sent the oldest entry in the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared in the list 1401 3078 62 3 10 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display Block Diagram Display The block diagram in the main window shows provided options signal configuration and the currently selected signal flow of the modulator with inputs and outputs used Signal generation can be completely operated from the block diagram The highlighted function block can be directly switched on and off with the Ctr T key combination Pressing the Enter key opens the associated setting dialog Marker 1 Restart 2 Pulse 3 Pattern 4 Ratio ec como Aij DH 6 Gea 0 Each block represents a function of signal generation The function is indicated in the headline of the block e g Baseband In this block the arbitrary waveform generation is set for instance cm In the check box L2 the respective function can be quickly activated a deactivated with the Ctrl T key combination After activation the block is displayed in blue Status information is displayed below the check box It is different for the different blocks In the output block for instance the selected type of output is indicated Pressing the Enter key or clicking on the config button opens the associated setting dialog Trigger
285. in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expiration date After this date the option is no longer available on the instrument The section Loaded Modules is provided for service purposes It lists all loaded software modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module Install SW Options Setup System Setup Edi Help Internal Adjustments Test A Hardware Configuration Remote gt GUI Update Protection gt Software Options The Install SW Option dialog can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu amp Install SW Option aE Option Key tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt tt A Newly purchased software options are enabled in the Install SW Options dialog They are ready to operate after they are enabled by means of a key code supplied with the option Note Only if the instrument is equipped with an older firmware version a firmware update prior to enabling the software option may be required The information on the valid firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option The firmware update is described in the service manual instrument chapter 4 on CD ROM supplied with the instrument 1401 3084 32 4 88 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Purge Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration Remote GUI Update Protectio
286. ing complete instrument settings in files The various drives can be selected using the mass storage unit specifier lt msus gt The internal hard disk is selected with D and a memory stick which is inserted at the USB interface is selected with EN The resources of a network can also be selected with lt msus gt in the syntax of the respective network e g using the UNC format Universal Naming Convention server share The default drive is determined using the command MMEMory MSIS lt msus gt Note The C drive is a protected system drive This drive should not be accessed Reconstruction of the system partition will not be possible without loss of data To enable files in different file systems to be used the following file naming conventions should be observed The file name can be of any length and no distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase letters The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitted at the beginning of the file name Where possible special characters should not be used Use of the slashes and should be avoided since they are used in file paths A number of names are reserved by the operating system e g CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COM4 LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN In the instrument all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic extension The extension is separated from
287. ing requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a LAN Connection Enables disables the LAN interfaces Any device connected to the LAN interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Security Password Enters the security password that is required to enable or disabled the LAN or USB interface Default is 123456 All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Accept Security Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings Settings accordingly Remote control command n a Factory Preset Setup Factory Preset The Factory Preset dialog provides a function to reset the instrument s settings to their factory state This function is activated by pressing the Execute Factory Preset button Setup Edit Help System gt Crest E Test gt Factor Display Keyboard Remote gt Network Settings fc ged Protection gt hged Security y pued Factory Preset l FactoryPreset C 1401 3084 32 4 100 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Si Factory Preset E O Execute Factory Preset as Resets instrument to factory configuration Security settings and user data are not effected Note
288. input indicates the next i e the 2nd 3rd aag Y Ath segment of a multi segment waveform which can be a compound of e g a sine a rectangular and a sawtooth signal 10 Trigger input TRIG See data sheet and Ti H Di J The output of the stored waveform can be triggered DTE with a TTL signal applied to this connector Trigger condition and polarity are user selectable The termination impedance is either 0 05 or 1 kOhm X 11 Clock signal input output i CLOCK IN OUT See data sheet and Vi IN Clock Dialog O O Input for external clock Output with current memory clock rate 12 Reference clock signal input output REF IN OUT See data sheet and Clock Dialog IN Input for external 10 MHz reference clock OUT Output of internal 10 MHz reference clock 1401 3078 62 1 11 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Putting into Operation The following section describes the procedure for putting the instrument into operation and the connection of peripherals such as keyboard mouse and monitor H contains general safety instructions for instrument operation The installation of options and the firmware update are described in chapter 4 of the Service Manual which is supplied with the instrument on the CD ROM Unpacking the Instrument Remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various it
289. interfaces can be seen in the data sheet Chapter 2 Getting Started gives an overview of the instrument s functions Detailed operating instructions follow in chapter 3 Manual Operation Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics describes how to switchover to remote control The R amp S AFQ is primarily intended to be remote controlled via the GPIB interface USB or a LAN connection see chapter 5 section Switchover to Remote Control Alternatively it is possible to control the instrument manually using an external monitor in combination with a keyboard and a mouse see Introduction Manual Operation or by accessing the instrument via the remote control desktop of an external PC see Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Manual and remote control of the R amp S AFQ are described in separate chapters Background information about the settings is reported in the reference chapter for manual control chapter 4 Instrument Functions together with the menus and dialogs that may be displayed on an external monitor To avoid redundancy the reference chapter for remote control chapter 6 focuses on program syntax and parameter ranges but contains only a short description of the command functions The complete manual on the CD ROM in printable PDF format provides chapters 4 to 9 Legend for Front Panel View This section gives an overview of control elements on the front panel of the R amp S AFQ and explains their meaning from
290. introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data Binary HB 10110 Octal 07612 Hexa HF3A7 Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1401 3084 32 5 22 E 3 RES AFQ100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Instrument Model and Command Processing The block diagram in the figure below shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the instrument The individual components work independently and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of so called messages Input unit with input buffer Y Command recognition Y Data set IEC IEEE bus Ethernet Status reporting system vov Instrument hardware Y IEC IEEE bus a Output unit with Ethernet output buffer Figure 5 1 Instrument model in the case of remote control via IEC IEEE bus or TCP IP network Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the traffic is stopped and the data received up to then i
291. ipu 4 248 6 86 External segment frioger 4 190 UA 4 190 Inhibit External segment frioger os 4 189 External trigger ssssssss 4 179 Segment Trigger 4 189 TODO ed ER s 4 179 Input BERT CLOC Kentine iei a aaa 1 18 BERT DATA eb 1 18 BERT DATA ENABL senes 1 18 BERT RESTART rouina e 1 18 BERT Segment address 1 17 BERT Segment hopping 1 17 CLOCK sii c dee Mase 1 20 Clock REP E niet a 1 20 Trigger NEXT sse 1 20 Trigger TRIG iia 1 20 Inp t buffer sienien iaeia 5 25 Input line Setup Impedance cococcccccccccccncncnononononononos 4 190 4 199 Threshold ioen 4 190 4 199 SOCUON A o ee eeu uns 4 199 Install SW Option sss 4 256 Instrument Config uuses 4 253 6 90 1401 3084 32 10 11 Index Instrument settings 3 108 4 161 4 272 5117 ing RER 4 275 4 276 NIE 3 110 POS i epis 4 273 4 276 FIC nates eae estre 4 273 4 276 File OT tlyp6 idees 4 276 Files of type 4 275 LOOKIN errre vi 4 273 NOW tiui na 3 108 4 273 OP cera 3 109 4 273 4 275 Recall nndis 4 273 6 4 6 99 DC m 1 31 Save ss 3 109 4 275 4 276 6 4 6 102 SQVOG A e t e aia ode 3 109 4 276 SAVE Ins xcu i icti b p e ds 4 276 Interface IEC 625 IEEE 488 rear panel 1 15 IECHEEE DUS eio Lieu 1 15 LAN rear oanel 1 15 USB 2 0 type A front panel
292. is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value Query by Means of Commands Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries The individual commands are listed in the description of the STATus Subsystem The returned value is always a number that represents the bit pattern of the register queried This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control or queried via the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet using command SYSTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorde
293. ital Interfaces Depending on the selected port the output dialog changes Interface Port Interface 1 R amp S Standard 2 Parallel LVDS 4 The interface PORT1 at the front panel of the R amp S Standard instrument is selected R amp S Standard Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PORT PORT1 2 The interface PORT2 at the front panel of the Parallel LVDS instrument is selected parallel port LVDS standard Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PORT PORT2 Notes on connecting an output device on Port1 and Port 2 the LVDS output is held higher than 0 6 V The output common mode voltage is not properly established if the LVDS output is held higher than 0 6V when the R amp S AFQ is switched on As consequence the output will not work properly the common mode voltage is held higher than 2 5 V Even if the the common mode voltage is applied for only a very short time the output will back off Example If a DUT has pullups to 3V3 on both LVDS lines it will pull these lines to 3V3 When the DUT is now connected to the AFQ the AFQ will see this 3V3 at least for short time Countermeasure Power Up the DUT after powering the R amp S AFQ In both cases the output of the R amp S AFQ will not be damaged and will return to work after reinitializing Note To avoid electromagnetic interference EMI only the cable R amp S SMU Z6 must be used for the connection to the digital interface The associated cable is ava
294. ith 50 Ohms USB devices must keep within permissible EMI limits Note For the multiplexed R amp S digital data stream only the cable R amp S SMU Z6 is permitted for connection at the digital interfaces The associated cable is available under R amp S part number 1415 0201 02 1401 3078 62 1 13 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Setting up the Instrument CAUTION Safe operation with support feet Stacked instruments may slip off Secure stacked instruments against slipping e g by locking the feet to the top of the front panel frame The feet must be fully folded in or folded out Only then a stable position of the instrument and reliable operation can be ensured The uniform pressure on the folded out feet must not exceed 500 N weight of instrument and of equipment stacked on top When using the instrument with expanded feet the feet might collapse and fold in Do not shift the instrument with the feet out Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument NOTICE Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Prior to cleaning disconnect the product from the AC supply Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use chemical cleaning agents such as solvents e g diluent for lacquers thinners acetone alcohol etc or acids bases or other
295. ith commands SYSTem ERROr ALL SYSTem ERRor NEXT and SYSTem SERRor See chapter 6 section System Subsystem and chapter 9 Error Messages If an external monitor is connencted to the instrument ERROR is displayed in the info line together with a brief error description For in depth identification of the error click on the INFO button In response a description of the error s is displayed Besides automatic monitoring of instrument functions other capabilities in the R amp S AFQ ensure correct functioning Internal Calibrations Calibrations can be performed with commands of the CALibrate Subsystem or in the Internal Adjustments dialog of the Setup System menu with external monitor and keyboard Thus maximum level accuracy can be obtained for instance See chapter 6 section Calibration Subsystem and chapter 4 section Internal Adjustments Setup System Test points Internal test points can be queried by the user with commands of the DIAGnostic Subsystem or in the Diagnostic dialog of the Setup Test menu with external monitor and keyboard See chapter 6 section Diagnostic Subsystem and chapter 4 section Diagnostic Setup Test 1401 3078 62 1 20 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Default Settings Default Settings The instrument is set to a defined state with common command RST or the A on an external keyboard The following table gives an overview of the presets for the most important
296. itor is connected the instrument must be switched off standby mode to prevent damage to the monitor and the R amp S AFQ After connection the external monitor is detected when the instrument is started The generator screen with all elements e g block diagram Winbar etc is then displayed on the external monitor and on the R amp S AFQ Further settings are not required 1401 3078 62 1 24 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN The R amp S AFQ is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator and the Window XP firewall configuration is adapted accordingly files can be transmitted via the network and network resources e g a network folder can be used The instrument can also be remote controlled and manually controlled in the network Manual network control means that the user can operate the R amp S AFQ from any remote PC in the network via the Remote Desktop Connection which is provided for Windows PCs or via the UItr VNC connection which is provided for Linux Unix and Windows PCs For instance the user can control one or more R amp S AFQs from a desk that is part of a test assembly located in another section of the building see section Manual Remote Control via an External Controller on page 1 34 Remote control of the instrument vi
297. itude is added to the signal In the diagram all values or Q values are offset by a fixed amplitude value depending on the entered percentage Effect of offset for the component Graphics Vector Diagram der 2 El d 3 ER 08 06 04 02 00 02 04 05 08 11 Inphase ift Effect of offs Graphics Vector Diagram Quadrature at 1 05 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 08 0 6 04 02 00 02 04 06 08 14 Inphase i t 4 42 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Impairments Block Effect of an identical offsets for both signal components Quadrature o 08 06 04 02 00 02 04 06 08 11 Inphase ift Remote control commands SOUR IMP OFFS I 0 12FS SOUR IMP OFFS Q 0 10FS Phase error The command sets an l Q phase mismatch Ag i e a deviation from 90 deg An ideal UO modulator sets the phase angle to exactly 90 degrees With a phase error the phase angle between the and Q vector deviates from the ideal 90 degrees the amplitudes of both components are of the same size In the vector diagram the quadrature offset causes the coordinate system to shift A positive quadrature offset means a phase angle greater than 90 degrees Graphics Vector Diagram Quadrature alt S IS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 08 0 6 04 02 00 02 04 06 08 14 Inphase ift 1401 3084 32 4 43 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Impairments Block A negative error means a phase angle less than 90 degrees Quadrature
298. ively Remote control command SOUR CLOC 10MHz Clock source external only Sets the slope polarity active edge of an externally applied clock signal The external clock signal is fed in via the CLOCK BNC connector at the rear panel The clock input slope is indicated only if an external clock source is selected Positive The rising edge is selected Remote control command SOUR CLOC INP SLOP POS Negative The falling edge is selected Remote control command SOUR CLOC INP SLOP NEG 4 32 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Measured External Clock source external only Clock Memory Clock ndicates the measured frequency of the external clock signal Thus a screening of the external clock is possible The measured frequency is indicated only when the clock source External is selected Remote control command CLOC INP FREQ Threshold and impedance of the external clock signal are entered in the Input Line Setup CLKIN TRIG NEXT section This section is indicated only when clock source External is selected Threshold Input Line Clock source external only Setup Sets the high low threshold for the three inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT segment trigger The threshold can be set only if the trigger source external is selected Remote control command SOUR INP CONT THR Impedance Input Line Clock source external only Setup Sets the impedance for the three inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT segment tr
299. k Load Waveform Calls the dialog for loading a waveform file 4 Load Waveform recent data sets d juser sinus250kHz d user sawtooth d user SinRectTableAFO d user SineTriRectMarker sinus250kH7 rectangle sawtooth sin_cos_marker j DATA SineTriRectMarker K DATA2 m CCase n DATA2 0 DATA3 p DATA3 S DATA2 v CCase X SYSVOL p vr racal i 4 2005 09 19 09 46 20 32 8e 006 File Manager The files last used are listed in the Recent Data Sets section on top of the dialog The directory can be selected down to the left Waveform files are stored with the predefined file extension wv Available waveform files in the selected directory are listed on the right File information on the selected file is displayed below eg tag contents multi segment state or clock rate The Select button selects the marked file This file is loaded when the ARB modulation is enabled State On The File Manager button leads to the file manager which may be used to look for a file File name and crest factor of the loaded waveform are indicated in the status bar of the display Remote control commands SOUR WAV SEL SineTriRectMarker if the file is stored in the default directory and SOUR WAV SEL d user SineTriRectMarker if the file is in a different directory 1401 3084 32 4 4 E 3 RES AFQ100A Baseband Block Sine Testsign
300. k data 161 The command contains illegal block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data had been received or no numeric data element is sent after the introductory SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid Character 101 The command contains an invalid sign Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE amp SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid separator 103 The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator Example A semicolon is missing after the first command in a command line with several commands FREQ 2MHz POW 25 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid suffix 131 The suffix is not appropriate for this command Example nHz is not defined SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Lists not same length 226 The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via IEC bus All parts of the list have to be transmitted always before it is executed Example The POWer list content is longer than the FREQuency list content or only the POWer content is transmitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 5 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Missing parameter 109 The command does nat contain the required parameters Exa
301. kers and additional controller cables are mapped to 48 data bits The option R amp S AFQ B18 generates serial data streams from the 48 bits which are specified below 1401 3084 32 8 11 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Specifications of Digital Interfaces Mapping of and Q to Muxed Data Stream Data Bit Content 47 Q Data Bit 15 MSB 46 Q Data Bit 14 45 Q Data Bit 13 44 Q Data Bit 12 43 Q Data Bit 11 42 Q Data Bit 10 41 Q Data Bit 9 40 Q Data Bit 8 39 Q Data Bit 7 38 Q Data Bit 6 37 Q Data Bit 5 36 Q Data Bit 4 35 Q Data Bit 3 34 Q Data Bit 2 33 Q Data Bit 1 32 Q Data Bit O 31 reserved 30 reserved 29 reserved 28 reserved 27 reserved 26 Marker 2 25 Marker 3 24 Marker 4 23 l Data Bit 15 MSB 22 l Data Bit 14 21 l Data Bit 13 20 l Data Bit 12 19 Data Bit 11 18 I Data Bit 10 17 l Data Bit 9 16 Data Bit 8 15 Data Bit 7 14 l Data Bit 6 13 Data Bit 5 12 Data Bit 4 1401 3084 32 8 12 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Specifications of Digital Interfaces Mapping of and Q to Muxed Data Stream Data Bit Content l Data Bit 3 I Data Bit 2 l Data Bit 1 l Data Bit 0 reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Marker 1 ENABLE VALID OJAIN WIH AIM IN O0 q As the bits are being collected serially consecutive groups of six are transmitted on line 1 line 2 line 3 et
302. l command n a New List Creates a new equalizer table Remote control command n a File Opens a dialog for managing all files Manager amp File Manager All Files D Sapp_fdd_K242 s wv 3gpp fdd K242 wv SineTriRectMarker 3gpp fdd K242 Noise s wv Waveforms The File Manager dialog consist of several areas The File Type entry field enables to select specific file types Only the relevant files with the selected file extension are displayed All Files displays all files that are saved in the currently selected path The available paths are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed in the status line of the path window If the File Manager dialog is opened several times the path last selected is displayed Each table is saved to the hard disk as a separate file with the file ending afg mfg The file name and the directory to which the file has to be saved are user selectable The extension is saved automatically and cannot be entered Remote control command n a Edit Data Opens the currently loaded modulator data table see section Editing Modulator Data on page 4 48 Remote control command n a 1401 3084 32 4 47 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Equalizer Block Frequency Entry Mode Absolute v RF Frequency 1 000 000 000 GHz Frequency Entry Mode Selects the frequency entry mode The frequenc
303. l order Key of PC keyboard Function Short description of Function Button function LEE Enters a special character e g a period or decimal point Enters the sign shift a z Switches between upper case and lower case letters Backspace Clears the last entry number sign or decimal point Cursor keys Moves the cursor 0 9 a z IO Enters the number letter Ctrl D Diagram Sets the cursor on the block diagram and hides all dialogs Ctrl F1 F8 Button 1 8 Triggers the function assigned to the eight buttons of the Winbar 1401 3078 62 3 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Legend of Manual Controls Key of PC keyboard Function Short description of Function Button function Ctrl G Closes dialogs Closes an active dialog Ctrl H Hide Minimizes the active dialog Pressing the respective button in the Winbar opens the dialog again Ctrl Q Local Local Switches the instrument from remote control to manual control Ctrl T Toggle on off Switches a block or parameter on off Toggles between the different possibilities of setting a selection parameter Ctrl Hardcopy Hardcopy Opens the dialog for configuring and starting a hardcopy Ins Insert Activates the insert mode Enter Enter Terminates an entry Esc Esc Selects the next higher menu selection
304. las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n EI dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesibl
305. ld to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 08 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental pr
306. le Both paths and Q get the same signal amp Rect Test Signal Sample Clock 100 000 000 000 MHz e Samples Per Period 100 Amplitude 0 800 FS D Offset 0 000 FS D Generate Signal HD Generate Signal RAM Sample Clock Rect Test Signal Samples per Period Rect Test Signal Amplitude Rect Test Signal 1401 3084 32 Enters the sample clock frequency for generating a rectangular test signal 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Remote control command SOUR TSIG CLOC 300e6 Enters the number of sample values required from the rectangular wave per period The resulting clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Remote control command SOUR TSIG RECT SAMP 500 Enters the digital amplitude of the rectangular wave The abbreviation FS means full scale Remote control command SOUR TSIG RECT AMPL 0 5 4 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Offset Rect Test Enters a DC component Signal Remote control command SOUR TSIG RECT OFFS 0 1 Generate Signal HD Generates a signal and saves it to a file on HD Rect Test Signal The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored a
307. le EQU IQ I FREO 10000 20000 30000 writes three frequency values into the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ I GAIN 5 50 dB This command enters gain values into the current data table of the path Example EQU TIO I GAIN 0 5 3 writes three gain values into the current data table SCPI 0 001 dB Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 49 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce EQUalizer IQ I PHASe 360 360 deg This command enters phase values into the current data table of the path The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example EQU IQ I PHAS 0 5 10 writes three gain values into the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ I POINts This command queries the number of data points of the current data table of the path i e the number of filled rows The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example EQU IQ I SEL D TEMP TESTPREDIQ selects the data table EQU IQ I POIN Response 5 queries the number of data points of the current data table SCPI Device specific SOURce EQUalizer IQ I SELect FILE NAME gt This command loads the specified file containing a data table for the path All new data points will be saved in the selected file hence there is no save or save as command If the specif
308. le Management Delete file Mark file and then press the Delete button Prior to deletion a confirmation query is displayed which the user must confirm for this file to be deleted Create new directory Mark drive or directory level where the new directory is to be created and then press the Create New Directory button An entry window for entering the directory name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key Table 3 1 List of file extensions for user files the instrument assigns automatically List type Contents File suffix Instrument State Instrument State Instrument settings savrel Arbitrary Waveform Generator Waveform Multi segment waveform ARB waveforms WV Multi segment configuration Configuration info for multi segment waveforms these inf mswv files can only be loaded Equalizer List Q data table the instrument needs for corrections afq iq fgp Modulator data table the instrument needs for corrections afq mfg 1401 3078 62 3 31 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Management Contents Chapter 4 Instrument Functions 4 Instrument FUNCtiONS EEN 4 1 Overview of Instrument FUNCTIONS 0 eee eee eee eeeee eee eteeeee teats ee etaeeeetnnaeeeeeae 4 1 Menu and Status Line sssssseeeeeme ee 4 1 Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARD 4 2 Introduction Dt tia 4 2 Baseband Block 5 dnb coronae eolit baie 4 3 ARB Dialog cii ti ek E e ce e d heel
309. litudes by applying a gauge circuit ELECtronic Device specific SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced AMPLitude 0 1 5 V The command sets the maximum output voltage for the balanced signal Small differences at the inputs can be taken into account via the impairment settings offset and bias Example OUTP ANAL BAL AMPL 1 234V sets the maximum output voltage of the analog output to 1 234 V Device specific SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced BIAS 2 5 V 2 5 V The command sets the bias A DC voltage is superimposed upon the symmetric and Q signal Example OUTP ANAL BAL BIAS 2 5V sets a DC offset of 2 5 V Device specific SOURce OUT Put ANALog lt CH gt BALanced BIAS STATe ON OFF The command switches on off the bias amplifier Example OUTP ANAL BAL BIAS STAT ON switches on the bias amplifier Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 57 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced OFFSet l 10 mV 10 mV The command sets an offset between the inverting and the non inverting output Value range 10 mV 10 mV The entered value is set half in the positive and half in the negative direction A positive offset is set with half of the value in positive direction at the non inverting outputs in negative direction at the inverting outputs respectively For example if a 10 0 mV offset value is set for the signal component
310. lly after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signalled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history 1401 3078 62 3 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display Info Window Display A few operating states and the current message are displayed in the info line see also chapter 9 Error Messages The info window with a list of current permanent messages and a detailed description of each message can be opened by clicking on the Info softkey The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages in the order of their occurrence i e the most recent message is displayed first In the lower section of the window additional information on the highlighted message is displayed A history of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on can be called with the History Softkey The most recent message is displayed first Info line A UCorr ALC Auto B ALC Auto List of current messages with short message text Nc Em 463 Filename mi ng Info D Sav Rcl Manage
311. log for adding and filling rows to an equalizer table Insert Range Fill Insert row Insert range Fill Inserts a new row above the marked one Remote control command n a Inserts the entered number of rows above the marked one e g 4 new rows Remote control command n a Opens a window to enter the data for automatically filling an equalizer table e g Es Fill Table From Select column to fill Phase deg al Start Value 360 00 th Increment 3 Edit Equalizer HO Data equ2 AAN amen Ces GEN S Ces Ess ES SS Ee Ee Ess S Ga Ces Remote control command n a 4 50 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Save As Save Frequency Gain Phase 1401 3084 32 Equalizer Block Opens the window Create List File Which Name to save the table under a new name see section File Select Windows on page 4 108 Note If a file is selected marked the file name is entered automatically in the entry field File name Then the current data will overwrite the data in the file Each table is saved to the hard disk as a separate file with the file ending afg mfg The file name and the directory to which the file has to be saved are user selectable Remote control command SOUR EQU MOD SEL new corr MOD Saves the edited table under its current name Remote control command n a The table is saved automatically after the values have been entere
312. ls refer to the VXI 11 specification TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI 11 Revision 1 0 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXIbus and TCP IP IEEE 488 2 Instrument Interface Specification VXI 11 3 Draft 0 3 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXIbus al i Fi Core channel program response control messages Instrument Ai gt Controller Abort channel abort Interrupt channel Service request Fig 5 3 VXI 11 channels between instrument and controller The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This distinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a PC are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller Fig 5 4 Remote control via LAN from several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers 1401 3084 32 5 37 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Remote Control Hardware Interfaces In the Measurement amp Automation Control program this setting is made on the Template tab Y TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0x001B36E0 Template Basic 1 0 Interface 170 _viEnableE vent viDisableE ven
313. lti segment waveforms Parameter Continuous The current segment is output continuously i e cyclically until the next segment trigger event Then the trigger immediately switches to the next segment Continuous Seamless The current segment is output continuously i e cyclically until the next segment trigger event Then the trigger switches to the next segment after finishing the current one Single The current segment is output once Then the instrument switches to the idle mode waiting for the next trigger event The next trigger event switches to the next segment Repeat N Times Multiple output of the waveform segments Each segment is repeated as often as the segment Repeat Count of the particular segment is set Then the instrument switches to the idle mode The next trigger event switches to the next segment A regular trigger event restarts signal generation Example TRIG SEGM MODE SING selects segment trigger mode single Device specific SOURce TRIGger SEGMent RCOunt 1 1 1 100 100 100 This command sets the repeat rate for each particular segment of a multi segment waveform The repeat count is entered in a list of numbers separated by semicolons Each segment can be repeated up to 100 times Example SOUR TRIG SEGM RCO 1 1 3 the first segment of the multi segment waveform will be output once as well as the second and the third segment will be restarted 3 times in series Device specif
314. lue When the parameter is edited the unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front panel keys When the entry is completed the unit can be changed In this case the value remains unchanged but is automatically adapted to the new unit 1401 3078 62 3 14 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Fix Delay To Current Range v On Display Check box field If the check box is ticked the associated parameter setting is active e g switched on Path Delay ns 0 00 Q Path Delay ns 000 I Gain 0 000 dB y Q Gain 0 000 dB Offset 0 000 FS z Q Offset ooo FS gt 0 00 deg D Phase Error Dialog area Several fields of associated but separately set parameters can be organized in a dialog area The dialog area is framed and labelled with the function common to all parameters e g Impairments Hz dB deg 10 000 00 bn 2 00 0 00 10 5 2 00 10 000 00 0 0 10 90 20 000 00 0 7 0 00 Tables Tables are made up of a header which normally contains the column labels and lines containing the text Gain Graphical display Graphical displays show signal characteristics this S chart plots user input of the equalizer The R amp S AFQ compensates these distortions f f RF kHz Phase En 1 10 0 10 20 f f RF kHz State Off Buttons List Data Edit Data equ mod test 1401 3078 62 3 15 The buttons either trigger a single actio
315. lue 3 Error rate If no termination criterion has been reached since the beginning of the measurement the current quotient of Number of error bits errors and Number of data bits data blocks is entered As soon as at least one final result has been reached in continuous measurement the most recent final result is entered Value 4 Status of measurement 1 Measurement has been terminated i e the number of data bits data blocks or error bits errors preset by the commands BERT SETup MCOunt and BERT SETup MERRor has been reached or the measurement has been stopped by the command BERT STOP 0 Measurement has not been terminated Value 5 Status of clock line 1 Clock line active 0 Clock line not active Value 6 Status of data line 1 Data line active only clocked data is detected if the clock signal is missing a data change is also not detected 0 Data line is not active Value 7 Synchronization status 1 The measurement is synchronized i e the clock and data lines are active and the Number of error bits errors to Number of data bits data blocks ratio is better than 0 1 so that the measurement ratio can be assumed to be realistic 0 The measurement is not synchronized BERT RES queries the result of the bit error rate measurement Response 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 the measurement has been terminated and synchronization has been performed Out of 1
316. ment or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC IEEE bus e g for identification of the device or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Instrument control refer to functions depending on the features of the commands instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee Device specific extensions following the SCPI rules are permitted by the standard Device are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can responses contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the Response instrument status cf section Responses fo Queries on page 5 19 Messages and Service Request Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following section 1401 3084 32 5 15 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI Command Structure and Syntax The commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and parameter are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers m
317. ment waveform Input segment address bit 0 LSB 1 18 Input segment address bit 1 1 18 Input segment address bit 2 1 18 Input segment address bit 3 MSB 1 18 Repeat count moree 4 185 Segment address mode 4 186 6 42 Auto increment AA 4 186 FHOP Serial esses 4 187 Parallel coccion aa 4 187 Segment mode 4 180 Segment Trigger Configuration 4 180 Segment trigger mode Continuous c cooccccccnccnanccnnnnnccnnnnnnarnnnnnnn 4 180 Continuous seamless 4 181 Repeat N times cccccececeeeeeenenteees 4 183 e 4 182 Strobe pute 1 18 Trigger source 4 185 Alli 4 186 BUS oa 4 186 External ide Rn Mi 4 185 Man al eder edes 4 185 N Network car 1 36 Network drives ooooooociccccccnnnnnccccnccnccnnnonnnno 1 43 New List DI e Vii 4 278 Fil list ia aH tetto 4 279 File name nsien r iaaa 4 279 Recent data seis 4 278 SAVE oie iL ei each ieee fnis 4 279 No Clock BERT sse 4 240 No error O tintas 9 8 No Sync BERT 4 241 Norton Antivirus 2005 sss 1 60 1401 3084 32 10 13 Index Number of licenses sssssssssss 4 256 Numeric data not allowed 128 9 8 Numeric Suffix sss 5 17 O Offset Analog Output 4 226 Rectangular Test Signal ARB 4 169 6 15 Table Sine Test Signal ARB
318. message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history 1401 3084 32 9 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages The following list contains all error messages defined in SCPI in alphabetical order SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments The errors are assigned negative numbers The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Note The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Block data not allowed 168 The command contains legal block data which are not allowed at this point Example The command SOUR FREQ requires a numeric parameter FREQ 13a SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data not allowed 148 The character data is prohibited for this command or at this point of the command Example Command SOURce FREQuency requires a numeric parameter SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data too long 144 The character data element contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Command Error 100 Generic error message that cannot detect a more specific error SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register
319. mote control command n a 1401 3084 32 4 97 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Protection Setup Protection Setup Edit Help System Test D D Remote b D EI The dialog Protection can be started in the Protection section of the Setup menu Protection amp Protection Protection Level 2 On Password Protection Level 3 On Password ccce Protection Level 4 On Password E Protection Level 5 On Password Q The Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only The correct password is required to deactivate the protection levels After the instrument has been switched on the protection levels 1 to 5 are active On If the instrument is equipped with the software option R amp S AFQ KO Protection level 1 is always deactivated Note Protection Level 1 can be deactivated to access the self test The password is 123456 The Self Test is provided for service purposes and therefore described in chapter 3 of the service manual section Trouble Shooting The service manual is available on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument Remote control command SYST PROT1 STAT ON SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 123456 1401 3084 32 4 98 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Security Setup Security The Security dialog provides access to the passwords and mass storage security s
320. mp A 7 m 7 e e ei Bias positive 0v 1401 3084 32 4 58 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Amplitude Amplitude Mode 1401 3084 32 Unbalanced Output Block 0v SN Bias negative Level eur Offset positive X x m as X d V 4V K Remote control command SOUR OUTP ANAL TYPE BAL Alias remote control command SOUR OUTP TYPE BAL The unbalanced analog output at and Q is selected A bias between UO OUT and ground can be defined Remote control command SOUR OUTP ANAL TYPE UNB Alias remote control command SOUR OUTP TYPE UNB Sets the maximum output voltage for both signal components balanced or unbalanced Small differences at the inputs can be taken into account via impairment settings Balanced Output Value range 0 1 5 Volt open circuit voltage Unbalanced Output Value range 0 0 75 Volt peak peak Remote control commands SOUR OUTP ANAL BAL AMPL 1 50 SOUR OUTP ANAL UNB AMPL 0 75 Selects the amplitude mode Two modes are possible Electronic or Attenuators They determine how precise the signals will be adjusted Electronic Attenuators The instrument generates signal amplitudes by scaling the waveforms The adjustment can be performed very fast The level resolution is low if a small signal amplitude 1V is selected Remote control command SOUR OUTP ANAL AMOD ELEC The instrument generates signal am
321. mple Command SOUR FREQ requires the indication of a parameter FREQ POW 35 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register No error 0 This message is output if the error queue does not contain entries Numeric data not allowed 128 The command contains a numeric data element the device does not accept in this position Example The command SOUR BB MCCW SEQ requires the indication of a text parameter SOUR BB MCCW SEQ AUTO SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Out of memory 225 The storage space available in the instrument is exhausted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Parameter not allowed 108 The command contains too many parameters Example Command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency permits only one frequency indication FREQ CENT 30 kHz 40 kHz SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1401 3084 32 9 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Program mnemonic too long 112 The header contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Queue overflow 350 This error code is entered into the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full It indicates that an error has occurred but not been recorded in the queue The original error message is lost Remedy Reading out the error messages e g with command SYSTem ERRor ALL clears the error queue SCP
322. n e g Off or call the next dialog level to be identified by 3 dots e g Edit Data Some dialogs contain buttons that assign a function to the front panel softkey below These dialogs cover the Winbar E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Setting Parameters Setting Parameters The instrument offers several and sometimes alternative possibilities for setting parameters Manual operation is possible with the aid of a mouse and or from an external keyboard Operation of the instrument with the aid of these control media is shown in the tables below Most of the parameters are set in dialogs The dialogs can be opened from the function blocks of the diagram either with the aid of the external keyboard or by clicking on the Config button With the exception of the Setup and the File menus which are called in the windows toolbar solely In the Setup menu general settings are made which are not directly concerned with signal generation e g setting of the IEC IEEE bus address In the File menu files and lists are managed Specific settings can also be made directly in the block diagram e g activating a function block by means of the Ctrl T key combination Changes affecting the signal flow are immediately visible in the graphics display The instrument uses the Windows XP operating system Settings at system level are only rarely required For operation of Windows XP a keyboard and a mouse are required the operating sys
323. n gt Software Options Install 5W Options The Purge dialog can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu Safely erase overwrite and delete all waveform files from the hard disk Erase Confirm erase command The Purge dialog is provided for security reasons It can be used to delete all waveform files wv on the hard disk of the instrument Before deletion of the files the erase command has to be confirmed Remote control commands WAV PURG Response lt purge key gt WAV PURG lt purge key gt 1401 3084 32 4 89 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Debug Page Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration Remote GUI Update Protection gt Software Options Install SW Options Purge Debug Page The dialog Hardware Debug Page can be started in the System section of the Setup menu 2 Hardware Debug Page Select Debug Page Update Debug Page Recent Hardware Message For real debug output please press button Update Debug Page This text should be replaced with every key press If this text consists database is not connected Scrolling with mouse only The Hardware Debug Page displays information about the internal parameters of the instrument Note Troubleshooting using the Debug Page is described in chapter 3 of the service manual section Trouble Shooting The service m
324. n standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Application SCPI SCPI 3 Presentation XDR VXI 11 RFC 1014 1 2 Session ONC RPC REC 1057 Transport TCP UDP RFC 793 Network IP RFC 791 Data Link Ethernet 802 3 8802 3 Physical 802 3 10BASE T 8802 3 Fig 5 2 Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR legal RPC messages are known as VXI 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups program messages control command to the instrument response messages values returned by the instrument service request Spontaneous queries of the instrument and low level control messages interface messages 1401 3084 32 5 36 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Remote Control Hardware Interfaces A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels a core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel program response and low level control messages The abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more detai
325. n the keyboard next to the Ctrl key or by moving the mouse to the bottom of the display and subsequent clicking on Start 5 Click on Control Panel and then System m Control Panel Se File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay 27 pis Search lie Folders EEE Address Control Panel zl Go Controllers Graphics eme Q3 o gt e gt 3 SEES Y e Je Switch to Category View Internet Keyboard Mouse Network Options Connections b amp amp a See Also A Windows Update s Phone and Power Options Printers and Regional and 9 Help and Support Modem Faxes Language g CG i Y Scanners and Scheduled Sounds and Speech Cameras Tasks Audio Devices d W ose System Taskbar and User Accounts Start Menu 6 Select the Advanced and click on Performance Settings 1401 3078 62 1 49 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Advanced E System Restore Remote You must be logged on as an Administrator to make most of these changes Performance Visual effects processor scheduling memory usage and virtual memory User Profiles Desktop settings related to your logon Startup and Recovery System startup system failure and debugging information Settings Environment Variables Error Reporting App 7 Click on the Change button Visual Effects Advanced Processor scheduling By default the computer is set to use a greater share of processor time to run your programs
326. nce signal generation The Edit menu along with its submenus corresponds to the blocks of the main window the settings there control the instrument s signal generation Help calls the R amp S AFQ s Online Help The main characteristics of the waveform file name crest factor and amplitude are permanently displayed in the header section of the instrument screen Additionally if a multi segment waveform is loaded the index of the currently generated segment is displayed Waveform name segment and crest factor are indicated only whereas the amplitude can be edited directly in the header Status messages for the instrument state are displayed in the info line besides the Info button Additionally the state of remote control is indicated besides the info line The information manager is opended by clicking on the Info button 1401 3084 32 4 1 E 3 RES AFQ100A Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB Introduction The Arbitrary Waveform Generator is an UO modulation source forming an integral part of the instrument It can be used to output any externally calculated modulation signals or internally generated test signals Waveform files can be loaded into the instrument via one of the computer interfaces USB memory stick or Ethernet interface network drive or via the IEC bus The equipment layout includes one of the waveform memory options R amp S AFQ B10 B11 R amp S AFQ B11 features a much larger DRAM size t
327. nd alone mode Parameters NORMal The instrument is working in stand alone mode MASTer The instrument provides all connected instruments with its reference clock signal SLAVe The instrument receives the clock signal from another AFQ waveform generator Master LAST This instrument receives the clock signal from another AFQ waveform generator Master It is appointed to be the last one in the chain of the connected AFQs Example ROSC SOUR SYNC MODE SLAV sets the instrument to Slave The instrument receives the reference oscillator signal from another AFQ waveform generator Master for synchronization 1401 3084 32 6 44 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commandes Signal Generation Baseband Block Time and Frequency Shifts SE ado Fi an RD SOURce IMPairment DELay 2 2 ns Pas do SOURce FOFFset 0 100 MHz G E SOURce IMPairment DELay l 2 2 ns The command sets a delay in the path Example IMP DEL 1 1 99 sets a delay of 1 99 ns SCPI Device specific SOURce IMPairment DELay Q 2 2 ns The command sets a delay in the Q path Example IMP DEL Q 1 99 sets a delay of 1 99 ns SCPI Device specific SOURce FOFFset 0 100 MHz This command sets an intermediate frequency Example FOFF 1MHz selects a frequency offset of 1 MHz 0 001 Hz Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 45 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Impairmen
328. nd makes it available to the output unit on request The exact structure and function are described in section Status Reporting System on page 5 26 Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data set management It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends theerror message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI Command Sequence and Command Synchronization What was said above makes clear that overlapping execution is possible in principle for all commands Equally setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WAI must be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set and has settled By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur
329. nd select list dialogs Loads the data of the selected file and closes the window Remote control command New list only Stores the current data under the specified path The file extension is different for each list type and is assigned automatically by the system Remote control command Calls the File Management dialog Directories can be created and files managed in this dialog see the section File Management on page 4 110 Remote control command 4 109 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Management Storing and Loading Instrument Data The File Manager dialog provides all the functions required for file management Directories and files can be created copied deleted and moved renamed between the directories on the drives hard disk memory stick and network drives E File Manager ee ClearCase Storage H Documents and Settings H DRV Flare Test Program Files H Adobe Common Files H ComPlus Applications B ComponentOne e corel amp dotnet 20 Create New Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete Daectory File Type Directory File list 1401 3084 32 ARB Waveform wv y Cdma2000 wv CustomDigmod wv MultiCarrier wv Multisegment wv TdScdma wv Wimax wv Wlan wv Selects the file types to be indicated Either All files or a file type with a specific file extension e g ARB Waveform wv is selected Then only files with this e
330. necting cables from the master instrument to the slave instrument must be of same length and type concerning both the REF OUT to REF IN connection and the MARKER1 to TRIG connection Avoid unnecessary cable lengths and branching points Normal Master Slave Last Slave The instrument is working in stand alone mode Remote control command SOUR ROSC SYNC MODE NORM The instrument provides all connected instruments with its reference clock signal Remote control command SOUR ROSC SYNC MODE MAST Ref clock external only The instrument receives the clock signal from another R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generator Master Remote control command SOUR ROSC SYNC MODE SLAV Ref clock external only This instrument receives the clock signal from another R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generator It is appointed to be the last one in the chain of the connected R amp S AFQs Remote control command SOUR ROSC SYNC MODE LAST 4 34 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Source Reference Clock Delay ns Bandwidth Reference Clock Synchronization Bandwidth Reference Clock 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block Selects the reference clock source Note The Internal Reference Clock Source is available only in the reference clock synchronization modes Normal and Master If the instrument is set to Slave or Last slave mode the reference clock source is set to External The entry field is not displayed in the Clock di
331. ng of parameters in section Setting Parameters on page 3 16 The dialogs are in Windows format They differ in details depending on their function but they consist of the same main elements EEN Modulator E m Dialog header The header line contains the name of the dialog and the buttons for minimizing amp and closing the dialog The buttons can be operated with the mouse For operation from the external key board the key combnation Att the underscored character the cursor keys and the Esc key can be used The remaining dialog area is variable and comprises various fields for setting parameters Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name The kind of setting varies depending on the parameter to be set Amplitude 100000 V e Entry field FileName A numeric value e g frequency or an alpha numeric value e g file name can be entered in this field Channel 1 Unchanged Selection field Unchanged ee Channel 2 Restart The H button indicates that a selection can be Channel 3 al made from a list The fold down selection list is E te displayed below the selection field Depending on the number of entries the full list or only part of it is shown One entry at a time can be selected from the list If an item is not available for selection it is printed in grey and cannot be accessed Units The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the va
332. ng one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example SOURce OUTPut STATe ON SOURCe OUTPut ANALog TYPE BALanced This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the SOURce command system subsystem OUTPut i e they have two common levels When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below SOURce OUTPut The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows SOURce OUTPut STATe ON ANALog TYPE BALanced Anew command line always begins with the complete path Example SOURce OUTPut STATe ON SOURce OUTPut ANALog TYPE BALanced 1401 3084 32 5 18 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example DIAGnostic POINt CATalog Answer DIAG GND DIAG P5V DIAG P3V3 2 Maximum values minimum
333. nnns 6 108 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource coociciocinicicinonoccnnnccnonnnn nano cnn nana nn 6 109 CCRN RRE 6 109 SYSTem DISPlay UPDale iei EE iain Renee aa iF 6 109 EC E ERROGNEX RE 6 112 SYSIemERROFTAEE 4 ied bibi aa 6 111 SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT iii a a daa odere 6 111 SYS FENFERROMCODE ALP oia RO HERI CUL e ap ERRARE 6 111 SYSTem ERRO ee 6 112 SS LON E Ee ii A EE SE 6 112 SYSTem PRESet EE 6 113 CA CR PRO Tea e STA LC EE 6 113 E EE 6 113 SYSTem STARtUup COMPlelte ate s lcd it dpa epos dana odo tinta 6 115 SYS lem TME i aano Bd M hut a ebore Een 6 115 SYSTem VERSIOh 2 er a e tian etal beet e ate Pe Du ENEE 6 115 T TRIGger BERT IMMediate od e a d ua e OR ee ee aed 6 87 1401 3084 32 10 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Index 8 E o 5 4 ACT Mau wee ae aia ial ate 5 4 GEO tise Eet SEA 5 4 SOLS ui tue AA d 6 2 g meu 6 3 ESB e eras 6 3 ER eheu 6 3 ION Lt oe tre p tech 6 3 EE Ee 6 3 K 6 3 OPO s aula pit d deett 6 3 ORT an ep b et 6 3 PRE rasta 6 3 RE 6 3 PS Ces ites arate aes Neben 6 3 ROL dtd 6 4 RST sia eat nte eee aei 6 4 TSAV cisco E RD bim 6 4 A diete 6 4 SRE dist bad 6 4 STD Lit bt etta 6 4 TAG ata 6 4 EE aa 6 5 MVA ii id 6 5 0 A A dEAENEeEEEEN 9 8 1 100 Command Emor 9 2 101 Invalid Character usuuss 9 6 102 Syntax error 9 11 103 Invalid separator 9 6 1401 3084 32 10 7 Index 104 Data type erfor 9 3 108 Parameter not
334. none at all have been detected With a low number of bit errors the measurement result may be statistically unreliable If the measurement is terminated because the number of data bits entered here was checked Number of Data Bits appears to the right of Terminated By Data excluded from the measurement by Data Enable or Pattern Ignore is not counted Remote control command BERT SET MCO 1000 Enter the number of bit errors to occur before the measurement is terminated This criterion terminates the measurement relatively quickly if the error rate is high The measurement result is statistically reliable since many errors were already counted If the measurement is terminated because the number of bit errors entered here was reached Number of Errors appears to the right of Terminated By Remote control command BERT SET MERR 1E4 Selects the PRBS sequence The data generated by the PRBS generator is used as a reference for the measurement Note Standard compliant data inversion for PRBS15 and PRBS23 is performed automatically when the PRBS is selected Data Polarity remains unaffected Remote control command BERT SET TYPE PRBS15 4 76 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Data Polarity Clock Slope 1401 3084 32 Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Sets the polarity of the feedback data bits Note Standard compliant data inversion for PRBS15 and PRBS23 is performed automatic
335. nt is interrupted during the low level of the Data Enable input E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation BERT SETup IGNore OFF ONE ZERO Activates deactivates ignoring of pure 0 or 1 bit sequences at least 32 bits long The activating of Pattern Ignore excludes faulty frames from the measurement In the case of some mobile radio standards pure 0 or 1 bit sequences are generated when errors e g an incorrect checksum are detected within a frame These sequences instead of the frame data are provided for the BER measurement and signalize that the frame in question should not be used for the measurement Parameters OFF Pattern Ignore is not active ONE AII 1 Bit sequences consisting of 32 or more consecutive 1 data are not used i e ignored for the BER measurement ZERO AIl 0 Bit sequences consisting of 32 or more consecutive 0 data are not used i e ignored for the BER measurement Example BERT SET IGN ONE specifies that bit sequences of 1 data at least 32 bits long are not used for the measurement Device specific BERT SETup MCOunt 0 0 2 32 1 Enters the number of transmitted data bits data blocks to be checked before the measurement is terminated With a BER measurement data that was suppressed by BERT SETup DENable is not counted This termination criterion always terminates the measurement after the specified number of data bits data blocks Starting from
336. ntrol mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned Error Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Brief messages Brief messages report automatic settings in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Brief messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the
337. ntry focus to the area underneath the Save in selection list and select the directory Similar to Windows user interfaces the Save in selection list changes and displayes the currently selected directory If a file is highlighted the file name is entered automatically in the entry field File name Then the current settings will overwrite the setttings in the file Exit 1401 3078 62 5 Move the cursor to the entry field File name and enter the file name The instrument assigns the file extension savrcl Save Recall Files to all files of type Instrument State automatically The extension cannot be entered 6 Press the Enter key or click on the Save button to save the instrument settings The window is closed automatically Shuts down the windows operating system The current settings are stored on the hard disk before the system is shut down 3 27 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Management Select Save Lists File Management File select windows as Load Waveform Select List or New List offer access to functions for loading and saving user data Lists Complex modulation and control data or Waveforms are handled within these windows A file select menu consists of several areas In the upper area recent data sets the files last used are listed a maximum of ten files is displayed The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The
338. o Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o dafio a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marc
339. of the block diagram and of associated menus in manual control It is sufficient for operation of Windows XP when used together with the on screen keyboard The mouse is connected to one of the USB interfaces type A either at the front panel of the instrument or at the rear panel The mouse can be connected while the instrument is running rebooting is not required USB connector at the front panel USB connectors at the rear panel The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected Special settings such as mouse cursor speed etc can be made in the Start Control Panel Mouse menu of Windows XP The menu can be accessed by pressing the Windows key on the external keyboard Connecting an External Monitor NOTICE Overvoltage hazard Connecting a monitor while the instrument is switched on the monitor and instrument may be impaired A monitor must not be connected until the instrument is switched off standby Prior to connect a monitor switch off the instrument Do not modify the screen driver Display type and the display configuration since this will impair instrument operation An external monitor with an analog interface can be connected to the MONITOR connector on the rear panel of the R amp S AFQ An external monitor is a prerequisite for manual control of the instrument and for operation of Windows XP without a remote desktop connection to an external PC MONITOR ANALOG Ginn Connection Before the external mon
340. on AFQ Commands Setup Section Calibration Subsystem The Calibration system contains the commands for adjustment Adjustment is triggered by the query commands The response 0 indicates error free adjustment and the response 1 means that an error occurred during adjustment Command Parameters Default unit CALibration ALL MEASure PY Query ony CALibration AOUTput lt CH gt AMPLitude Query ony CALibration ALL MEASure The command starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed Example CAL ALL MEAS starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument Response 0 adjustment has been performed successfully Compliant CALibration AOUT put lt CH gt AMPLitude The command adjusts the amplitude of the selected analog output The instrument generates a series of signal levels and converts them using a precise ADC The procedure takes about 30 seconds The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL AOUT AMPL starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual Response 0 calibration was successful Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 72 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section CALibration AOUT put lt CH gt DELay The command adjusts the amplitude of the selected an
341. on or off toggle function Colour and label of a button change the check box is ticked or the tick is removed Fix Delay To Current Range Y On Fix Delay To Current Range On Function PC keyboard Mouse Switches on off Press the Enter key Click on the check box or the button 1401 3078 62 3 17 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Setting Parameters Selecting and Exiting a Dialog Area Setting Parameters Some dialogs are organized in areas The cursor can be moved either only within an area or between the higher level dialog areas This applies to the file select dialogs when files are saved or loaded e g when loading a waveform file When the dialog is called one of the dialog areas is highlighted by a blue frame Load Waveform E 5 d Rect_test_signal Rect_test_signal_0 sine_test_signal Test_RECT Test_T_Sine Tsin_test_signal date 2004 01 22 11 10 23 samples 6400 clock 1e 008 comment no information Another dialog area can be selected highlighted by means of the cursor keys Clicking on the Enter key moves the cursor to the highlighted dialog area When the cursor is placed on a lower level area in the dialog the area is highlighted by a grey frame The currently selected item is printed on a blue background in the example the selected directory The cursor keys up down move the cursor only within the grey framed area Enter terminates the setting i e selection of a file
342. or Remove Programs Regional Options Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options Performance and Maintenance Security Center A7 1401 3078 62 1 27 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN 3 Click on Network Connections at the bottom right of the Network and Internet Connections menu 1 i e File Edit View Favorites Tools Help AN See Also SG My Network Places ae ities os bet Pick a task Y Remote Desktop Be Phone and Modem Options a Set up or change your Internet connection a Create a connection to the network at your workplace Troubleshooters A EI Set up or change your home or small office network Home or Small Office gt Set up a wireless network for a home or small office Networking en Internet Explorer 3 Change Windows Firewall settings Network Diagnostics or pick a Control Panel icon Internet Options Network Connections Windows Firewall 4 Click on Local Area Connection in the Network Connections menu at the right p J Co ctio Lo File Edit View Favorites Tools Adva Address a Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection Connected Firewalled Intel R PRO 100 Network Co 1401 3078 62 1 28 E 3 RES AFQ100A Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN 5 Onthe General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP in the field This connection uses the following items and then click on the Properties but
343. or after the first trigger event depending on the trigger settings Example SOUR TRIG SOUR AUTO The segment trigger event will be executed internally by the firmware The Signal output starts immediately when the ARB modulation is enabled trigger events are ignored WAV SEL FG 32Seg loads waveform file FG_32Seg wv from the default directory SOUR STAT ON switches on the ARB generator The selected waveform is output straight away 1401 3084 32 6 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation 1401 3084 32 6 7 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TSIGnal CLOCk 1 kHz 300 MHz The command enters the sample clock frequency for generating either a sine rectangular or a table sine test signal 1 kHz 300 MHz The sample clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Example SOUR TSIG CLOC 300e6 sets sample clock frequency to 200 MHz Device specific SOURce TSIGnal PATTern CREate The command generates a waveform which is output directly This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example PATT TSIN CRE a signal is generated and output directly Device specific SOURce TSIGnal PATTern CREate NAMed waveform filename The command generates a sine test signal and stores the file on the loc
344. orm A sample does not correspond to a constant time interval The throughput of the waveform is limited by the maximum memory clock of 300 MHz If the setting Fix marker delay to dynamic range is enabled the setting range is restricted to the dynamic range In this range the delay of the marker signals during signal output can be set without restarting the marker and signal Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP2 DEL 2 4 30 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Current Range Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker Without Recalculation signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal Marker Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP2 DEL MAX SOUR TRIG OUTP2 DEL MIN Fix Delay to Current Selecting this check box restricts the marker delay setting range to the range Marker dynamic range In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and the signal Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON Clock Dialog The Clock dialog is used to select and configure the clock source The Clock dialog is accessed via the Baseband block To enable a very precise simultaneous signal output of several connected R amp S AFQs a special synchronization mode can be selected in the Reference Clock area see also following section Setting Up Several Connected R amp S AFQs for Precise Simultaneous Signal Output on page 4 36 Note The clock signal also
345. otection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments t
346. ously see following figure Ref Clock Sys Clock Trigger Marker 1 ih Pretrigger a Dutput gt Fig 4 2 Multitriggering of several connected R amp S AFQs for precise synchronization Note Variation in temperature may impact timing accuracy Keep temperature constant in running mode to ensure a stable simultaneous signal output Time and Frequency Shifts The user can set time and frequency shifts in the Af At dialog of the Baseband Block Time shifts are implemented using a digital filter whose range and accuracy are 2 ns and 10 ps respectively Time Shifts The time shifts are defined in the upper part of the Af At dialog If the and Q delays are 1 ns and 0 ns respectively then the signal will be delayed by 1 ns whereas the Q signal is not changed ARB Trigger Marker Clock 1401 3084 32 4 38 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block E At J Af Path Delay ns 0 Q Path Delay ns 0 Frequency set 0 000 Hz Path Delay ns Sets a delay in the path in ns Remote control command SOUR IMP DEL I 2 Q Path Delay ns Sets a delay in the Q path in ns Remote control command SOUR IMP DEL Q 1 25 Frequency Shifts The frequency offset is defined in the lower part of the Af At dialog The frequency offset shifts the baseband frequency interval Hence a quick way to shift the used frequency band in the RF frequency section is provided without modifying the RF
347. p S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt MODE UNCHanged RESTart PULSe PATTern RATio LIST The command defines the signal for the selected marker output Parameter UNCHanged A marker signal as defined in the waveform file tag marker mode x is generated RESTart A marker signal is generated at every waveform start PULSe A pulsed marker signal is generated The pulse frequency 7 symbol rate divider is defined with the SOURCe TRIGger OUTPut1 PULSe DIVider command and can be queried with the SOURce TRIGger OUTPut 1 PULSe FREQuency command PATTern A marker signal is generated with the aid of a user definable bit pattern The bit pattern is entered with the aid of command TRIGger OUTPut PATTern The bit pattern is a maximum of 32 bits long RATio A regular marker signal corresponding to the Time Off Time On specifications in the commands SOURce TRIGger OUTPut OFFTime and SOURce TRIGger OUTPut ONTime is generated LIST A marker signal that is defined by a pattern of samples is generated The pattern is entered with the aid of the command SOURce TRIGger OUTPut LIST The samples can be assorted by entering either particular samples or sample ranges each defined by the sampleindex and the signal value 0 1 The arguments are separated by A hyphen between the start and the end sampleindices of a sample range Acolon between the sample index and
348. pecific 1401 3084 32 6 34 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce WSEGment NEXT This command determines which segment the instrument shall generate after a following trigger event Example SOUR WAV SEL D TEMP SineTriRectMarker wv selects a waveform file SOUR WSEG NEXT 2 selects the second segment of the current waveform SOURce WSEGment NEXT MODE AlNCrement FPARallel FSERial The command sets the segment sequence mode of a multi segment waveform Parameter AlNCrement Auto Increment The indices of the segments are incremented automatically FPARallel FHOP Parallel The indices of the segments are fed in parallel as binary digits via the BERT BNC connectors Note The FHOP mode requires the hardware revisions Baseboard 2 Rev 5 and SFB gt Rev 01 05 05 FSERial FHOP Serial The indices of the segments are fed in via the serial FHOP bus of the BERT BNC connectors Example WSEG NEXT MODE FPAR selects the segment sequence mode FHOP Parallel 1401 3084 32 6 35 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Baseband Block Marker Settings Command Parameter por SOURce TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON OFF SS E SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay 0 2 20 1 Samples Kegel SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay MAXimum Query only SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt DELay MINimum Query only
349. plitudes by applying a gauge circuit to the waveforms The instrument switches a relay The adjustment takes some time The level resolution is high especially for small signal amplitudes 1V Remote control command SOUR OUTP ANAL AMOD ATT 4 59 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Q Offset Enable Bias Bias 1401 3084 32 Output Block Sets a DC component balanced or unbalanced Value range 10 mV 10 mV Balanced Output Sets an offset between the inverting and the non inverting output The set value is set half in the positive and half in the negative direction A positive offset is set with half of the value in positive direction at the non inverting outputs in negative direction at the inverting outputs respectively For example if a 10 0 mV offset value is set for the I signal component the output signal at I will have a 5 0 mV offset and the output signal at BAR will have a 5 0 mV offset 1 5V BL d V sm E V B E d 1 OUT BAR A negative offset is set with half of the value in negative direction at the non inverting outputs in positive direction at the inverting outputs respectively 15V 5 x A OUT BAR mae Tf our 0v Unbalanced Output L zreerg Ee Sets a DC component in the UO path in Volts Remote control commands SOUR OUTP ANAL BAL OFFS I 0 001 SOUR OUTP ANAL BAL OFFS Q 0 002 SOUR OUTP ANAL UNB OFFS I 0 01 SOUR OUTP ANAL UNB OFFS Q 0 01
350. pprox 5 s 1401 3078 62 1 18 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Switching Off G Power Press the ON STANDBY switch on the front panel The R amp S AFQ stores the current setting on the hard disk before it shuts down the windows operating system Then the AC supply is m switched to standby mode Only the AC supply is powered and the oven controlled crystal oscillator is kept at operating temperature Lighting orange the LED indicates that the instrument is in standby mode CAUTION Danger of shock hazard The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode Do the following only if the instrument is completely disconnected from the AC supply A4 Press the main power switch at the rear of the instrument to position 0 None of the front panel LEDs should be on Note It is recommended to switch the instrument to standby mode before disconnecting it from the AC supply If the power switch is switched off set to 0 while the application is still running all current settings will be lost Moreover loss of program data cannot be excluded is the application is terminated improperly 1401 3078 62 1 19 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Function Check Function Check The instrument automatically monitors the main functions when the instrument is switched on and continuously during operation If a fault is detected the front panel LED ERROR indicates the error state The error can be queried w
351. program stores the binary data set to a file called SICO WV The contents of the file SICO WV reads as follows IQIQIQIQIQIQIQI IQ Explanation There is no readable representation for binary values in this document This is why we use the sequence IQIQIQ to characterize the binary code in the present example Step 2 The file SICO WV now contains the binary data set corresponding to the 20 I Q pairs Before this binary data set can be further processed in step 3 the TYPE and the CLOCK tag TYPE SMU WV xxxxxxx CLOCK yyy must be placed in front The TYPE tag must be the first entry in a WAVEFORM The TYPE tag identifies the waveform as a valid R amp S Signal Generator waveform SMU WV denotes that the waveform is self contained is the checksum of the waveform To simplify our example 0 is used i e the R amp S Signal Generator does not evaluate a checksum XXXXXXX The TYPE tag informs the R amp S Signal Generator about the clock rate of the waveform is the clock frequency at which the waveform has to be output in Hz yyy 1401 3084 32 6 23 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Step 3 1401 3084 32 AFQ Commands Signal Generation To enter the TYPE tag in the SICO WV file an ASCII editor which is able to handle binary data as well e g the Microsoft Windows editor NOTEPAD EXE must be used Now the contents of the SICO WV file read TYPE SMU WV 0 CLOCK 10e6 IOIQIOIQIOIQIOIQIOI The binary data m
352. ps to Signal D Output Pin Port 2 only Assignment Assigns the output pins LSB and LSB 1 of and Q to signal or marker The Output Pin Assignment dialog is visible only if PORT2 is selected Output Pin Ass Maps the output pin LSB I 0 of the digital port 2 to I 0 LSB either the signal or marker 4 Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PASS 1I0 SIGN Output Pin Ass Maps the output pin LSB 1 I 1 of the digital port 2 I 1 LSB 1 to either the signal or marker 3 Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PASS 11 MARK Output Pin Ass Maps the output pin LSB Q 0 of the digital port 2 Q 0 LSB to either the Q signal or marker 2 Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PASS Q0 MARK Output Pin Ass Maps the output pin LSB 1 Q 1 of the digital Q 1 LSB 1 port 2 to either the Q signal or marker 1 Remote control command SOUR OUTP DIG PASS Q1 MARK 1401 3084 32 4 64 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Output Block The output clock source and frequency are set in the Clock section Note The section Clock section is displayed only if PORT2 is activated Clock Interface clock memory clock Clock Interface clock Port 2 only memory clock For configuring the clock settings see section Clock Dialog on page 4 31 Slope Digital Output Port only Sets the polarity of the active clock for triggering digital signal transmission via Port2 Clock and data are in phase Either the rising or the falling ed
353. ptions It in cludes a printed Quick Start Guide and a CD ROM with the complete operating and service manual in printable pdf format The R amp S AFQ is equipped with a context sensitive online help that offers a help page for each instru ment function Quick Start Guide Help System 1401 3084 32 The present quick start guide describes everything that is needed to put the instrument into operation and to get familiar with the generator The quick start guide gives an introduction to remote control and manual control via external monitor mouse and key board The quick start guide is subdivided into the data sheet plus 3 chapters plus index The data sheet informs about specifications and characteristics of the instrument Chapter 1 Describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well as all proce dures required for putting the instrument into operation Chapter 2 Gives an introduction the operating concept and typical applications of the R amp S AFQ Chapter 3 Describes key operating modes the structure of the graphical interface and the principles of manual control Chapter 5 Describes the basics for programming the R amp S AFQ command processing and the status re porting system Index Contains an index of the quick start guide The help system is embedded in the instrument offering quick context sensitive reference to the information needed for operation and programming
354. queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 08 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la docum
355. r Example CLOC INP SLOP NEG the active slope of the external clock signal at the CLOCK connector is the falling slope POSitive Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 41 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce CLOCk SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects the memory clock source internal or external Parameter Internal The internal clock reference is used to generate the sample clock External The external clock reference is fed in as the sample clock via the CLOCK IN connector Reference Clock Oscillator Subsystem Outline This subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency Note The commands of the SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem are not affected by an instrument reset RST E ONN Ela SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBAN WIDE NARRow CERNI dwidth SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal a ie SOURce ROSCillator SYNC MODE LAST MASTer SLAVe NORMal NORMa OO SOURce ROSCillator DELay 0 5 ns The command sets a time shift delay to the reference clock signal for adjusting the clocks in the slaves Note The synchronization of several connected R amp S AFQ I Q Modulation Generators requires the Baseboard Revision 8 or higher Up to baseboard Revision 5 only synchronization mode normal is provided stand alone mode Example ROSC DEL 2 5 sets a delay of 2 5 ns to the reference clock signal 1401 3084
356. r Info operation complete Recall completed Detailed description for highlighted message No pending errors Softkeys Delete Delete all Del volatile History Info Current time Mi Nov 23 2005 10 21 52 rP te scm re 0 0 0 0 0 0 O No pending errors Delete Delete an Del vote History The messages are color coded according to their level Device specific messages are red information and remote control errors are black The level is also indicated in the Lev column Err Sys or Info Column SCPI indicates the SCPI error code 1401 3078 62 3 9 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Display With the aid of the softkey buttons error messages can be cleared and a history of all messages called Delete Clears the highlighted message This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Remote control command see Delete All Delete All Clears all messages This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Remote control command SYST ERR ALL Delete Vol Clears all brief messages This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed Remote control command History Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list When the button is pressed again the list of current messages is displayed Remote control command SYST ERR Or STAT QUE Each t
357. r Name Hardware Advanced System Restore Automatic Updates Pemote 4 Select the ways that this computer can be used from another location Remote Assistance C Allow Remote Assistance invitations to be sent from this computer What is Remote Assistance Remote Desktop Allow users to connect remotely to this computer Full computer name Select Remote Users For users to connect remotely to this computer the user account must have a password Windows Firewall will be configured to allow Remote Desktop connections to this computer S Note When activating locking the Remote Desktop the associated firewall settings are automatically enabled disabled 1401 3078 62 1 36 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Install Remote Desktop and Establish Connection on the Windows PC The Remote Desktop Connection program of Microsoft is available on the Internet for the Windows 957 operating system and its successors as a free of charge download Following the instructions on the Internet it can be loaded onto any external PC For the Windows XP operating system the program is already preinstalled or it is available on the installation CD ROM 1 Install Remote Desktop Connection program on the PC if required 2 Start program in the Start All Programs Accessories Communications window Que Y Remote Desktop Connection Computer Name
358. r and Softkeys Display ss 3 13 Menu Structure Display enn 3 13 Setting Parairieters ceci da 3 16 Calling a Dialog Setting Parameters seeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeereeen n 3 16 Selecting a Control Element Setting Parameters 3 17 Switching Parameters On Off Setting Parameters 3 17 Selecting and Exiting a Dialog Area Setting Parameters 3 18 Terminating Entries Setting Parameters sess 3 19 Restoring the Previous Value Setting Parameters 3 19 Dialog OperatlOn acm crt p Le e tetro e e Dt M E a PN 3 20 Editors i200 a ein ai AT ed eer a E lee 3 21 Equalizer List Editor cccccccceceecceceeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 21 Online Help eters ease tanneries estes eg o ee AE e tantes 3 23 File ManageMen tii 3 25 Select Save Instrument Settings File Management 3 26 Select Save Lists File Management 3 28 File Manager oi ee a d deed 3 30 1401 3078 62 I 3 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Manual Operation 3 Manual Operation Introduction Manual Operation The present chapter describes the manual control of the R amp S AFQ even though the modulation generator is primarily intended to be remote controlled via the GPIB interface or a LAN connection Manual control using an external monitor mouse and keyboard or from an external PC via a network link mi
359. r wavel wv deletes waveform file wave1 wv from the d user directory Device specific SOURce WAVeform POINts waveform filename The command queries the number of samples in the waveform file selected using command WAV SEL Only the file name has to be entered Only files with the file extension wv will be read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example WAV POINt queries the number of UO values pairs in the waveform file Response 401 the waveform file contains 401 I Q value pairs Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 16 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce WAVeform PURGe SOURce WAVeform PURGe KEY The command is used to delete all waveform files from local hard disk which is split into two partitions D and D To delete all waveform files on hard disk two steps are necessary The instrument generates a pseudo random number which is the key necessary for deleting the wv files Example WAV PURG queries the key necessary for deleting the wv files Response lt key gt WAV PURG KEY deletes all wv files from hard disk Device specific SOURce WAVeform SELect waveform filename The command selects the waveform file If the file is not on the default path the path must be specified at the same time If no file of the specified name exists it is created The file extension may be omitted Only files
360. rameterg 5 21 Threshold BERT iid e eria 4 248 6 87 External segment trigger 4 190 External frioger 4 190 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AAA bebe eun 4 204 Too many digits 124 ssssssss 9 11 Too much data 223 sss 9 11 Trigger BERT ERR 4 242 Delay be tends 4 178 Delay External AND 6 40 Execute oe eh eet 4 178 Impedance sse 4 190 NMB s ari dio 4 179 Inhibit External AND 6 40 Repeat Count sees 6 35 6 38 Repeat count Multi segment waveforms 4 185 6 38 SIODO zo Roe am 4 179 Slope negative ssssssssss 4 179 Slope Dostive nanne nenenena 4 179 Threshold e 4 190 Waveform dagranm 4 191 Input NEXT uius inm 1 20 TRIG J nc e ig 1 20 Mode dte ker ns 4 175 Continuous rair ea TEE 4 175 Repeat count ssssssssssssssss 4 177 Repeat N Times sssssssss 4 176 AS AAA a 4 176 SIhglea 2 dai diana dd 4 175 Parameters AND 4 174 SOUICO Ld suele deci 4 177 Luo n 4 178 BUS H 4 178 Exteral ena kata 4 177 Man al s t epe 4 177 ARB oa aiino tn 6 39 State RUNNING ui 4 174 SIODDOed aat cvap imis 4 174 1401 3084 32 10 17 Index U Ultra MN iiie besos 1 51 Undefined header 113 9 11 Uni BERT 4 237 6 86 Unai ene es 3 96 Universal commande 5 37 8 5 Unix controller sss 1 51 USB Visa Resource String
361. rch function This procedure is also of importance for a point to point connection for instance in order to start a firmware update for which the files have been stored on the hard disk of the remote computer Note The computer and the modulation generator must both be equipped with a computer name and an IP address see section Configuring the R amp S AFQ for Network Operation Enabling the desired directory on the remote computer Note The menu name may deviate from the name specified in the operating sequence depending on the language and on the operating system used on the computer 1 Onthe computer in Windows Explorer mark the directory to be enabled and open the Properties menu with the right hand mouse button 2 Inthe Sharing panel activate the Share this folder checkbox 3 Write down the name of the computer see section Query Computer Name Accessing the enabled directory on the R amp S AFQ 1 Call the Start menu 2 Inthe Search menu select Computers or People and then A Computer on the Network 3 Inthe input window of the query Which Computer you are looking for enter the computer name and start the search by pressing the Enter key The computer and its name appears in the results list 4 Click on the computer s name to display the enabled directory The files in this directory can be used in the R amp S AFQ Note If a user name and password are requested when you click on the computer the lo
362. re available This suffix is preset in the field Files of type Remote control command Loads the selected settings file and closes the window Remote control command MMEM LOAD STAT 4 d Ntest savrcl RCL 4 Terminates the action and closes the window The current settings have been retained unchanged Remote control command Stores the current instrument settings If the instrument works with loaded settings the current changes overwrite the settings in the file File name and path cannot be entered If the instrument does not work with loaded settings the function Save as will be called automatically Remote control command SAV MMEM STOR STAT 4 d Ntest savrcl E My Recent E SaveRecallTest savrcl Documents 2 Desktop My Documents fisch bi on MUSBDOCFE ei My Network File name Places Save as type Save Recall Files sawrcl 1401 3084 32 Cancel 4 106 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Storing and Loading Instrument Data Save As Opens the window Choose a filename to save under for creating a file to store the current instrument settings Save in File List File name Save as type Save Cancel 1401 3084 32 Selects the directory in which the file with the instrument setting is to be stored Remote control command MMEM CDIR d user All files containing instrument settings are listed in the selected directory Note If a file is h
363. red Every subsequent trigger event internal by clicking the Execute button or external causes a restart Retrigger Off When retrigger is disabled a trigger during signal generation is without effect Retrigger On Trg 4 13 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Repeat N Times Baseband Block When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a trigger during signal generation Remote control command SOUR TRIG MODE SING Multiple output of the waveform when a trigger event occurs Note Run mode Repeat N Times is enabled only in combination with Segment Trigger source Auto see Source Segment Trigger on page 4 22 If Segment Trigger source is set different to Auto the instrument operates in run mode Continuous Retrigger Off When retrigger is disabled a trigger during signal generation is without effect Retrigger On When retrigger is enabled the current signal output is reset at a subsequent trigger event after start of signal generation The waveform is repeated as often as the number of Repeat Count is set see Repeat Count Trigger on page 4 34 After finishing the last run signal generation stops The waveform output can be restarted by retriggering or switching off and then switching on the ARB state in the baseband block Remote control command SOUR TRIG MODE REP 4 14 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Repeat Count Trigger
364. rk properly 2 the common mode voltage is higher than 2 5 V Even if the common mode voltage is applied for only a very short time the output will back off Example If a DUT has pullups to 3V3 on both LVDS lines it will pull these lines to 3V3 When the DUT is now connected to the R amp S AFQ the R amp S AFQ will see this 3V3 at least for short time Countermeasure Power Up the DUT after powering the R amp S AFQ In both cases the output of the R amp S AFQ will not be damaged and will return to work after reinitializing 1401 3078 62 1 5 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation 7 Analog outputs ANALOG OUT 0 o9 Analog UO output inverting and non inverting See data sheet The loaded waveforms are output at a nominal level of 0 5 Volts at two BNC connectors I and Q The impedance amounts to 50 Ohm Four BNC connectors and BAR Q and Q BAR are available for differential output 8 Hard disk HARDDISK DO NOT REMOVE DURING OPERATION Slot for removable hard disk With respect to security concerns the hard disk can be removed from the instrument but it is bound to the specific R amp S AFQ Therefore it cannot be changed between different instruments NOTICE Risk of instrument damage and data loss During operation the instrument is accessing the hard disk Removing the hard disk while operating will lead to data loss or even instrument damage Do not remove the hard disk during operation 1401 3078 62
365. ronization is checked and displayed If a faulty status is displayed the signals can be checked at the BERT interface using an oscilloscope Remote control command BERT RES Response the 4th value indicates whether the measurement has been terminated 1 terminated 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 Clock The applied clock signal was detected Remote control command BERT RES Response the 5th value indicates the status of the clock line 1 active 0 not active 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 4 72 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A No Clock Data No Data Sync 1401 3084 32 Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block The applied clock signal was not detected Possible causes are Clock recovery is not available e g with tests of RF components Amarker signal can be used as a clock As the DUT causes a delay the ratio of clock to data travel times must always be taken into account and checked with an oscilloscope if necessary The wrong impedance for the applied clock rate was selected see Impedance parameter The wrong threshold for the applied clock signal was selected see Threshold parameter The applied data signal was detected Remote control command BERT RES Response the 6th value indicates the status of the data line 1 active 0 not active 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 The applied data signal was not detected Only clocked in signals are detected if the
366. rted If the data is stored under another name the R amp S AFQ link is available in the selection list opened with the J button of the Computer entry field 5 Enter remote desktop size 800 x 600 in the Display tab Y Remote Desktop Connection E UL General Display Local Resources Programs Experience Remote desktop size m Choose the size of your remote desktop Drag the slider all the way to the right to go fullscreen Less Jg More 800 by 600 pixels Colors High Color 16 bit y NEN NEN Note Settings on the remote computer might override this setting Display the connection bar when in full screen mode 6 The connection is established when the Connect button is pressed After the connection is established the modulation generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S AFQ can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in chapter 3 section Legend of Manual Controls on page 3 1 The device firmware of the R amp S AFQ is disabled when the connection is set up Direct control on the R amp S AFQ is not possible while manual remote control is active The access of an external PC is indicated by the logon screen of Windows XP which identifies the accessing user If several R amp S AFQ in
367. s MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of the types of parameter refer to section Parameters on page 5 19 Example SOURce TRIGger OUTPut3 DELay 1000 This command sets the delay of Marker 3 to 1000 samples If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g several inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Optional keywords must be specified if they select a function with the suffix Example SOURce TRIGger OUTPut2 DELay 100 This command sets the delay of Marker 2 5 17 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon A colon at the beginning of a command marks the root node of the command tree Example MMEM MSIS c Nuser SOURce WAV LOAD gsm test This command line contains two commands The first command is part of the MMEMory system and is used to specify the default directory for file operations The second command is part of the SOURce system and loads the waveform file gsm test wv If the successive commands belong to the same system havi
368. s a waveform file Remote control command SOUR TSIG RECT CRE NAM D temp test wv Generate Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Rect Test Signal Remote control command SOUR TSIG RECT CRE ARB Table Sine Test Signal Dialog The Table Sine Test Signals dialog is accessed via the ARB main dialog The dialog can be used to configure a table sine test signal i e a superposition of two sine waves Both paths I and Q get the same signal In the upper section of the dialog the table length and i i OX i Sn apis ine Test Signal a the offset of the resulting signal can be selected The Sample Clock 300 000 000 000 MHz v table length is the number of sample values of the whole Table Length 100 waveform Offset 0 000 FS y Sine 1 Periods 4 Amplitude 0 500 FS Y Phase 0 00 deg e In the Sine 1 section the first sine signal is configured Res Frequency 12 000 000 00 MHz ener In the Sine 2 section the second sine signal is Periods 6 configured Amplitude 0 500 FS Phase 0 00 deg D Res Frequency 18 000 000 00 MHz D Generate Signal HD Generate Signal RAM In the lower section of the dialog buttons to load or save the test signal are provided 1401 3084 32 4 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Sample Clock Table Sine Test Signal Table Length Table Sine Test Signal Offset Table Sine Test Signal
369. s all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC IEEE bus command Use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by 8 bytes Example a 125 345678E6 bit 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT modulator SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREO 216 MKDS af MKDS b in the command string introduces the binary block 2 indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating point number with 8 bytes each The actual binary data follow now As the function IBWRT requires a text string MKD is used for the type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT modulator SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREO 125 345678E6 127 876543E6 1401 3084 32 5 21 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the key words of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks
370. s and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in som
371. s or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garant a de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s
372. s processed Subsequently the traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1401 3084 32 5 23 E 3 RES AFQ100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only a DCL is serviced with priority a GET Group Execute Trigger e g is only executed after the commands received before Each recognized command is immediately transmitted to the data set but not executed immediately The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them to the status reporting system The rest of a command line after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced After the syntax test the value range of the parameter is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter or a DCL it also requests the data set to perform the necessary instrument hardware settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution Data Base and Instrument Hardware The expression instrument hardware deno
373. s with the MSB most significant bit A strobe marks the LSB least significant bit and thus the end of a valid data sequence of 40 bits Tsetup time between start of data signal and falling clock edge and Troa time between falling clock edge and end of data signal are 5 ns each Remote control command SOUR WSEG NEXT MODE FSER x AAA ANA fhop_strb fhop_data Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 39 A 38 A 37 h 36 h 35 N 34 iy Bi it Bit l Bit l Bit Bit see Bit l Bit FHOP CMD 7 0 FHOP DATA 31 0 Input control signals for FHOP on the serial FHOP bus BERT BNC connectors 1401 3084 32 4 24 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Function of data bits of FHOP bus fhop_data line see figure above and their function for controlling multi segment waveform generation Data bit name bit number Function Bit 39 to 10 Bits must be set to 0 data 9 to 0 Data bits Determine the segment index to be processed for multi segment waveforms index 0 1023 Execute Segment Trigger Delay Segment Trigger Inhibit Segment Trigger 1401 3084 32 Executes a manually initiated segment trigger event The manual segment trigger can be executed only when the manual trigger source has been selected Segment Trigger Configuration Segment Mode Single Source Manual
374. se thus enabling operation by mouse only An external keyboard is recommended for extensive entries System settings under Windows XP can be made in the Start Control Panel menu for required settings refer to the Windows XP manual and to the hardware description The Windows XP start menu is opened with the Windows key next to the Ctrl key or with key combination Ctrl Esc on the external on screen keyboard In this menu the Windows XP programs can be called Some of the programs are also placed as symbols on the Windows task bar and can be called directly by double clicking on the associated symbol The Windows XP desktop including the task bar is displayed when moving the mouse to the bottom of the display Kur 333397 The instrument display with block diagram header and Winbar is displayed in the foreground by double clicking the Block Diagram StatusBar and TaskBar buttons in the Windows task bar The R amp S AFQ does not contain a disk drive Data is exchanged via a memory stick connected to a USB interface An unused disk drive letter is automatically assigned to the memory stick Data can be transferred in Windows Explorer Energy saving mode An energy saving mode is a default setting in the R amp S AFQ The hard disk switches to energy saving mode if it is not accessed for 30 minutes The energy saving mode is exited by accessing the hard disk anew 1401 3078 62 1 22 E 3 R amp S AFQ
375. section Slope Digital Output 1401 3084 32 8 14 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Transmission Specs data clock skew rise time Digital Resolution Specifications of Digital Interfaces LVDS gt 200mV at 10009 LVDS gt 200mV at 10009 200 ps 400 ps The user can adjust digital resolution to 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 or 16 bits Marker Independent of the selected digital resolution the user can make the instrument replace several lines of the output stream by marker signals see chapter 4 section Marker Dialog Clock Generation The output signal at port 2 can be generated using either internal or external clock However the user should observe the following aspects 4 instrument s output clock and signal Forward Clock are in phase Signal and clock propagation delay are equal The input registers of the receiver circuitry should be configured accordingly 5 The instrument generates its internal clock by a phase locked loop within digital circuitry This clock signal is therefore not appropriate for driving a sophisticated DAC The same problem arises from external clocks which are output again at the CLOCK OUT connector Jitter and noise level of a re output clock are worse compared with a dedicated clock of the DAC 6 An dedicated clock generated by a synthesizer is therefore recommended for the DAC The data of the instrument along with its clock signal should be taken over and then be both re sync
376. selected State Test Point Activates the measurement of the voltage at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG MEAS POIN DIAG IQOP3 LCM CAL I Response 2 1401 3084 32 4 93 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Select Test Point Voltage Test Point State Test Point Analog Output Board 1401 3084 32 General Instrument Settings Calls the dialog for selecting a test point SS Select Test Point recent data sets DIAG P2V5 DIAG_GND DIAG P5V DIAG P3V3 DIAG P12V DIAG M12V DIAG P13V5 DIAG US BERT DIAG_P1 25REF DIAG P2V5 DIAG_US_TRIG The currently selected test point is shown next to the Select button Remote control commands DIAG POIN CAT Response list of the available test points DIAG MEAS POIN DIAG P2V5 With remote control voltage measurement starts as soon as the test point is selected Displays the measured voltage measurement at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG MEAS POIN DIAG P1V25REF Response 2 Activates the measurement at the test points of the analog output board Remote control command n a 4 94 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Select Test Point Analog Output Board Voltage Test Point Analog Output Board Fan Speed Control 1401 3084 32 General Instrument Settings Calls the dialog for selecting the test point on the analog output board SS Select Test Point recent data sets DIAG_AUX1 GND VREF_2 DI
377. set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered e g the start of an adjustment This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 86 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Setup Section STATus OPERation EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENT part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the STATus OPERation EVENt register SCPI Compliant STATus PRESet The command resets the status registers All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh 32767 i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example STAT P
378. si n Ug gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expues
379. sktop any user on the network who knows the computer name and login data of the vector modulation generator can access this R amp S AFQ Even after cutting it the connection is still enabled and the R amp S AFQ can be accessed any time To disable the connection the remote desktop must be deactivated on the R amp S AFQ 1401 3078 62 1 35 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Enable Remote Desktop Connection on R amp S AFQ The configuration is performed in the Windows XP menus The operating system can only be accessed if an external keyboard and monitor is connected A mouse is recommended for convenient operation of Windows XP To ensure recognition of the external devices the instrument has to be switched off prior to connecting them 1 Switch off the instrument Connect the external keyboard mouse and monitor to the USB interface Switch on the instrument Open the start menu Select My Computer and open the context menu by pressing the right mouse key 9 Se co M NSTUNent er My Computer Open Explore Y Control Panel Search Manage ES Search Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive All Programs gt Show on Desktop Rename Properties 6 Click on Properties and select the Remote tab in the menu 7 Activate check box Allow users to connect remotely to this computer and close window with the OK button System Properties ea General Compute
380. ss and the user specific password for the VNC connection are entered in the VNC Viewer panel NOTICE Risk of unauthorized access After enabling the VNC connection any user on the network who knows the password and IP address of the UO modulation generator can access this R amp S AFQ Even after cutting it the connection is still enabled and the R amp S AFQ can be accessed any time To disable the connection the VNC program on the R amp S AFQ must be uninstalled or the VNC server service disabled To enhance security also communication on the network via Ultr VNC program should be disabled in the firewall 1401 3078 62 1 40 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Install and Enable VNC Connection on R amp S AFQ The Ultr VNC program is available on the Internet as a free of charge download Following the instructions on the Internet it can be copied onto the R amp S AFQ 1 Download the program from the internet and copy it to a directory that can be accessed by the R amp S AFQ 2 Switch off the instrument 3 Connect a mouse a keyboard and an external monitor 4 Switch on the instrument 5 Shut down firmware using the Alt F4 key combination 6 Start installation by double clicking the setup file Ultrgo VNC 100 RC18 setup exe whereas 18 denotes the version number The setup wizard leads through the installation In the following only those panels are described in which defined settings
381. stment to account for different cable lengths in the analog section and hence signal propagation times of 10 ps resolution are possible The instrument loads multi segment waveform files thus very fast switching from one waveform to another without loading a new file is possible 1401 3078 62 2 3 E 3 Block Diagram R amp S AFQ100A 1015 Py Xy 04y uondo mo IeyuBrg sisayuu s sisoyyu s O ke lt usy 9 d N ZHAO0 01 SIN 00 LN pu SL d y ova 4 sde E SL sde ES SL Aep eBBu1 snipe rp iia ZHMAOO L SINO0 EN mm SL mans yo ysnipe l dI ud a OH e E IVA 4 o Jojduiesa y O b O 49 18 AJ Co 959001 lt 9 cn ESET 0H 0 zasn PUBI sng 53l ecasn 4901 s s 49015 uis 19019 D PON JeDDu sng I2d Figure 2 1 The instrument features a correction filter accounting for the frequency response of the two UO input amplifiers and the RF modulator of the user s RF generator E 3 2 4 1401 3078 62 R amp S AFQ100A Two ways to operate the instrument Two ways to operate the instrument There are two possibilities to operate the instrument 1 Using the instrument s own graphical user interface GUI a stand alone plugging in an external monitor keyboard and mouse directly b using Windows XP Pro s Remote Desktop feature or the program VNC via LAN as described in the first chapter 2 Remote control a via IEC Bus via LAN LXI or USB 2 0 using the
382. struments are to be manually remote controlled from one PC a separate Remote Desktop Control window must be opened for each R amp S AFQ This is possible by starting the program on the external PC several times 1401 3078 62 1 38 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Cut Manual Remote Control Connection via Remote Desktop The connection can be cut either on the R amp S AFQ or on the external PC Cutting the connection does not disable it It can be established again any time Cutting the connection on the modulation generator Cutting the connection requires external keyboard mouse and monitor 1 Click on Disconnect in the remote control message menu of the R amp S AFQ The connection is cut a message on the external PC informs about the disconnection Cutting the connection on the external PC 1 Open the start menu 2 Click on Disconnect in the lower right hand corner of menu nsintier Tja remote on RS INSTRUMENT Ek Control Panel P Search 5 Windows Security All Programs gt 9 Disconnect OE II E Disable Manual Remote Control Connection via Remote Desktop The connection can be disabled by deactivating the Remote Desktop on the R amp S AFQ 1 Open the start menu with the Windows key select My Computer and open the context menu by pressing the right mouse key 2 Click on Properties and select the Remote tab in the menu 3 Deactivate check box Allow users to connec
383. substances Use a soft non linting cloth to suitably clean the outside of the instrument 1401 3078 62 1 14 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation Removing and Installing the Hard Disk HARDDISK DO NOT REMOVE DURING OPERATION For security reasons the R amp S AFQ is equipped with a removable hard disk The hard disk is located at the front of the instrument NOTICE Risk of instrument damage and data loss During operation the instrument is accessing the hard disk Removing the hard disk while operating will lead to data loss or even instrument damage Do not remove the hard disk during operation For removing process as follows 1 Switch off instrument 2 Unscrew 2 milled screws at the hard disk cover 3 Take off the hard disk slide module carefully Safe keeping It is recommended to keep the hard disk in antistatic package in order to prevent damage to the disk For installing process as follows 1 Unscrew the slot and remove the cover 2 Reassemble the hard disk by carefully sliding it into the slot 3 Remount the cover and screw tighten it The instrument now can be connected and power supplied Note The hard disk is supplied with pre installed software and adjustment data and therefore bound to the specific R amp S AFQ It cannot be replaced or installed in several R amp S instruments For replacing an inoperable hard disk refer to the Sevice Manual chapter 3 Service and Repair supplied on CD ROM with t
384. sure trouble free data transmission The associated query command transmits the specified file from the instrument to the control computer via the IEC bus Please note that the buffer on the control computer must be big enough to accept the file The setting for the IEC bus delimiter is of no significance Using this command waveforms can be read out directly from or sent directly to the instrument WAV DATA File block data without query or WAV DATA File Tag query only 1401 3084 32 6 15 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation To test the query command a dummy file is required which the instrument will generate Only the file name has to be entered the file extension may be omitted Waveform data is stored only in files with the specific file extensions wv If this file extension is missing the instrument will append it This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example WAV DATA TEST1 WV 3767 lt binary data block writes the block data to file test1 wv Device specific SOURce WAVeform DELete waveform filename The command deletes the specified waveform file If the file is not on the default path the path must be specified at the same time The file extension may be omitted Only files with the file extension WV Will be deleted This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example WAV DEL d use
385. switching on the ARB state in the baseband block Example TRIG MODE SING the waveform is output once only when a trigger event occurs 1401 3084 32 6 29 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commandes Signal Generation SOURce TRIGger RCOunt 1 100 This command sets a repeat rate for restarting the waveform after a trigger event occurs Example TRIG RCo 5 the waveform will be restarted 5 times Device specific SOURce TRIGger RENable ON OFF This command determines whether a following trigger event shall restart the current signal output The minimum time interval between two retrigger events amounts to 10 us plus 25 memory clock symbol periods This setting is always on for multi segment waveforms Example TRIG REN ON a following trigger event will reset the current signal output Device specific SOURce TRIGger RMODe The command queries the status of waveform output for all trigger modes The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Parameter RUN the waveform is output a trigger was internally or externally initiated STOP the waveform output is stopped The instruments waits for an internal or external trigger event to restart the signal generation Example TRIG RMOD queries the current status of waveform output Response RUN the waveform is output a trigger internally or externally was initiated in triggered mode Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 30 E 3
386. t Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching
387. t Transition to the Local state manual control Configures instrument for parallel poll Additionally the Visual Basic command executes PPE PPD E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces LAN Connector The unit is equipped with an LAN interface as standard The LAN connector is at the rear of the instrument Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator files can be transmitted via the network and network resources e g a network folders can be used The instrument can also be remote controlled and manually operated in the network It is connected by means of a commercial RJ45 cable The network card functions with 100 1000 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Connection of the instrument is described in chapter 1 section Connection to the Network remote control via Ethernet is described in chapter 5 section Remote Control via IEC IEE Bus The architecture of a LAN remote control connection is described in detail in the following Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Application SCPI SCPI 3 Presentation XDR VXI 11 RFC 1014
388. t be set WinVNC Error WARNING This machine has no default password set WinVNC will present the Default Properties dialog now to allow one to be entered 1401 3078 62 1 42 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller e After clicking on OK in the warning panel the Default Local System Properties panel opens A password with a length of at least five digits must be entered This password is used on the remote PC to access the R amp S AFQ Other settings may be changed according to the user specific security requirements WinVHC Default Local System Properties E t3 Incoming Connections Connection Settings iv Accept Socket Connections Force View Only disable Viewers Inputs Password RERERRRR l Disable Local Inputs Keyboard amp Mouse Display Number or Ports to use Auto y Remove Desktop Wallpaper C Display Ni Update Handling C Ports Main Http v Poll Full Screen Fast r Poll Console iv Poll Foreground Window windows Only MS Logon g Poll On Event Poll Window Under Cursor Received Only MV Enable Java Viewer Http Connection iv Enable Xdmcp X11 Connection duco iv Video Hook Driver When Last Client Disconnects Low Accuracy Turbo Speed Do Nothing C Lock Workstation YW2K C Logoff Workstation DSM Plugin Use No Plugin detected y Misc Share only the Window Named v Enable Blank Monitor on Viewer Request Share cmm i iv Ena
389. t equal a whole number multiple of a PRBS sequence 150 bits 150 bits 150 bits 150 bits ah user data gaalh user data gah user data gah user data g PRBS9 sequence 511 bits Fig 4 5 TDMA signal generated by the WinIQSIM2 software with user data that contains the PRBS data sequence The PRBS sequence is continuously written to the user data fields 1401 3084 32 4 68 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Data Enable The data signals usually contain not only PRBS data but also other data e g sync and preambles that would result in bit errors The BER measurement for this data can then be interrupted using the Data Enable signal The Data Enable signal is fed in at the BERT input frame access header user data guard data clock III III UU U data enable Fig 4 6 TDMA signal with user data that contains the PRBS data sequence and various check fields which should be ignored for the bit error rate measurement Below that the associated clock and Data Enable signals are indicated Pattern Ignore Bit sequences of 32 bits or more with only 1 or 0 which some mobile radio standards provide instead of frame data when faulty frames are detected can also be excluded from the measurement using the Pattern Ignore function see figure Drop Out of DUT
390. t i Pei tei betonte 1 16 Switching ON oc 1 17 Booting the RES AFQ roin aiar A A S 1 18 Switchirig E Seet a T T Ze 1 19 Function Check 2 oce ehm cs 1 20 Default Settings tin i ieee ee e neg ebbe 1 21 Windows XP cio ii irada ENNEN NEEN ANNERES 1 21 Connecting an External kevboard AA 1 23 Connecting a Mouse earrais yarria aR A EAE E aR EA edid AST 1 24 Connecting an External Monttor narco 1 24 Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN 1 25 Connection to the Network eene 1 25 Manual Remote Control via an External Controller ssessseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeneee 1 34 Configuration for Manual Remote Control via Windows Remote Desktop Connection 1 35 Configuration for Manual Remote Control via Ultra VNC 1 40 Using Norton AntiVir s ee bete te dti eia eo ee iria 1 49 Preparing the Installation of Norton Antivirus 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 49 1401 3078 62 I 1 1 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation Introduction Putting into Operation Chapter 1 Putting into Operation explains the control elements and connectors of the R amp S AFQ UO Modulation Generator with the aid of the front and rear views and describes how to put the instrument into operation It also describes the connection of peripherals such as keyboard mouse and monitor A detailed description of the device interfaces is given in chapter 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Specifications of
391. t integer values are modulated to full scale Full scale 0 dB max amplitude of vector of UO samples SIQ max sqrt I2 Q2 max 2 15 1 32767 A positive PeakOffset_dB value indicates that a headroom to full scale is provided when generating the waveform A negative PeakOffset_dB value indicates that overrange is likely for some samples i e clipping might occur The crest factor can be calculated from the two values as follows crest factor PeakOffset_dB RMSOffset_dB Example LEVEL OFFSET 3 45 2 IEC bus query WAV TAG LEVEL OFFSET queries the content of the LEVEL OFFSET tag of the selected waveform file Response 3 45 2 the level of the waveform is below full scale clipping will not occur SAMPLES Samples optional for waveforms The tag contains the number of UO samples in the waveform in ASCII format Example SAMPLES 4333 IEC bus query WAV TAG SAMPLES queries the content of the SAMPLES tag of the selected waveform file Response 4333 the waveform contains 4333 I Q samples 1401 3084 32 6 21 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation WAVEFORM Length lyjQ l4Q 1 Q In 4Qu4 mandatory for waveforms The tag contains the actual waveform data and consists of the following Length Length specifies the number of bytes in a WAVEFORM tag and consists of the following Length of 1 byte
392. t not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Sample clock rates between 300 MHz and 600 MHz are not available and set to maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz Remote control command SOUR TSIG CLOC 300e6 Enters the number of sample values required from the sine wave per period The resulting clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate of 300 MHz The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Remote control command SOUR TSIG SINE SAMP 500 Enters the phase offset of the sinewave signal on the Q channel relative to the sinewave signal on the channel Remote control command SOUR TSIG SINE PHAS 45 Indicates the resulting frequency of the test signal Remote control command SOUR TSIG SINE FREQ Generates a signal and saves it to a file on HD The Create Test Signal window opens automatically and the signal can be stored as a waveform file Remote control command SOUR TSIG SINE CRE NAM D temp test wv Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Remote control command SOUR TSIGn SINE CRE 4 6 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block ARB Rectangular Test Signals Dialog The Rectangular Test Signals dialog is accessed via the ARB dialog The dialog can be used to configure a rectangular test signal A rectangular test signal with a duty factor of 0 5 is created Amplitude and offset are adjustab
393. t remotely to this computer and close window with the OK button The connection is disabled it is no longer possible to access the R amp S AFQ for manual remote control via Remote Desktop 1401 3078 62 1 39 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Manual Remote Control via an External Controller Configuration for Manual Remote Control via Ultr VNC The instrument is operated with the aid of the program UItr VNC The program is included in operating system Linux Unix It is available as a free of charge download on the internet for operating system Window XP http ultravnc sourceforge net download htm Manual remote control of the modulation generator is possible under the following conditions The external PC with Linux Unix or Windows operating system Windows 95 or higher is equipped with a LAN interface which is configured for the network The modulation generator and PC are linked via a LAN The Ultr VNC program is installed and enabled on the R amp S AFQ and an user specific password for the VNC connection is defined Communication on the network via Ultr VNC program is enabled in the firewall PC with Linux Unix operating system The R amp S AFQ IP address is entered in the address line of the internet browser of the external PC and the user specific password for the VNC connection is entered in the request panel PC with Windows operating system The Ultr VNC Viewer program component is installed on the external PC The R amp S AFQ IP addre
394. t viDiscardE vents viwaitOnE vent viGetAttribute viSetAttribute viLock viUnlock viE ventHandler Hequesiod hey Actual Access Key Timeout F 0 Lock Type i Exclusive Shared Return Value E Acquire a lock on the resource Execute VXI 11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the IEC IEEE bus amp ABO Abort Aborts the processing of the commands just received Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active device function eg a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys org Serial Poll O e Serial org Serial Poll O e Starts a serial pol a serial Starts a serial pol amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys Table 5 9 VXI 11 Interface Messages 1401 3084 32 5 38 E 3
395. t waveform is selected the segment trigger mode can be set The segment trigger mode defines the mode of switching between segments The current status of signal output Running or Stopped is indicated for all trigger modes IUS NU In section Trigger Configuration the trigger for the Run Mode Continuous start of waveform generation is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on the selected trigger source In section Segment Trigger Configuration the Enable Retrigger Jv on Source Auto Segment Trigger Configuration Segment Mode sme E trigger for the multi segment waveform is set Various Source Etema d Segment Address Auto Increment zl Delay ooo parameters will be provided for the settings depending on the selected segment trigger source Inhibit 5 000 00 ms DI Sione Posie Fj In section Control Line Setup the threshold and Control Line Setup CLKIN TRIG NEXT impedance values are selected for the inputs CLOCK Threshold 1 000 V DI IN TRIG and NEXT In section Waveform Diagram a symbolic graph for the selected waveform type is indicated Impedance 1k0 Waveform Diagram Shown for segmented waveforms Note TRIG A The curves plotted in this dialog box only are textbook examples not measured waveforms They are intended to visualize the trigger settings NEXT more clearly State Trigger Displays the status of waveform output for all trigger modes
396. t with parameters in the Trigger Configuration section of the dialog For multi segment waveforms retrigger is always enabled In the Waveform Diagramm section of the dialog waveform output is displayed schematically depending on the trigger configuration in run mode and segement mode Continuous The current segment is output continuously i e cyclically until a segment trigger event occurs Then the trigger switches to the next segment Run Mode Continuous Trg Segm Trg The following segment is output immediately after a segment trigger event occurs When the run of the last segment is finished signal generation starts at the beginning Run Mode Single Trg Segm Trg The following segment starts to be output immediately after a segment trigger event occurs After finishing the run of the last segment signal generation stops A segment trigger event is without effect Restart of signal generation is triggered by a regular trigger event activated automatically after a system imposed signal gap R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Continuous Seamless Baseband Block Run Mode Repeat N Times UTM NEXT The following segment starts to be output immediately after a segment trigger event occurs After finishing the run of the last segment signal generation switches to idle mode A segment trigger event is without effect Restart of signal generation is triggered by a regular trigger event activated automa
397. te control command CAL AOUT DEL 1401 3084 32 4 84 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Hardware Config Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration The Hardware Configuration window can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu amp Hardware Config Common Assembly ES P Part Number Serial Number Revision Sit BaseBoard 1401 4000 00 000000 i not installed Baseband Assembly not installed Analog Output 1401 4200 00 000000 00 00 In the Hardware Config window the installed Common Assemblies and Baseband Assemblies are listed Providing service purposes the variants and revision states of the assemblies are displayed Remote control commands DIAG INFO OTIM Response 100023 DIAG INFO POC Response 23 Path Shows the Path to which the assembly belongs Assembly Assembly name Part Number Part Number of assembly Serial Number Serial Number of assembly Revision Revision state of assembly Remote control command DIAG BGIN MBRD Response AFQ BASEBOARD 1401 4000 02 08 00 001234 1401 3084 32 4 85 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A General Instrument Settings Gui Update Setup System Setup Edit Help Internal Adjustments Test Hardware Configuration Remote gt GUI Update The GUI Update window can be selected in the System section of the Setup menu Start Stop Gui Update Gui Update is On
398. te control operation A general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments This includes the description of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard the description of command execution and of the status registers A description of the remote control interfaces In chapter 6 all remote control functions are described in detail All commands and their parameters are listed by alphabetical order in the command list at the end of chapter 6 The instrument is equipped with the following interfaces for remote control IEC IEEE bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 2 LAN interface the network card uses 10 100 1000Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u the protocol is based on the VXI 11 standard USB interface slave USB The master USB interfaces can be used for a firmware update and for connecting peripherals such as mouse and keyboard The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit a connection to a controller for remote control either directly or via a local area network LAN The remote control interfaces and their interface functions are described in section Remote Control Hardware Interfaces SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and
399. te safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 08 Page 3 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vims gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC 60950 1 EN 60950 1 or IEC 61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection
400. ted Certain data sections and frames that have been marked as faulty can be excluded from the measurement E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block The top section is used to switch on the bit error rate measurement and to display the results and current status of the measurement State Switches On or Off the bit error rate measurement Depending on the selection in the Mode box either a continuous measurement Auto or a single measurement Single is carried out A single measurement must be started by clicking the Execute Single button Remote control command BERT STAT ON Bit Error Rate Displays the measured bit error rate The bit error rate is the ratio of occurred errors to transmitted data bits Remote control command BERT RES Response the 3rd value indicates the error rate 1000 5 E 4 1 1 1 1 The display unit can be selected in the box to the right of the value ENG The bit error rate is output in engineering notation with the exponent 3 or 6 Remote control command BERT UNIT ENG SCI The bit error rate is output in scientific notation i e standardized to one place to the left of the decimal Remote control command BERT UNIT SCI of The bit error rate is output in percent Remote control command BERT UNIT PCT PPM The bit error rate is output in parts per million Remote control command BERT UNIT PPM Data Bits Displays the current n
401. tem can not be accessed via remote control Calling a Dialog Setting Parameters After instrument switch on the cursor is always on the first softkey block of the winbar default setting Activates the menus in the Winbar Click on the menu in Winbar File Move the cursor to the menu item Press the left mouse button to open Setup the dialog Edit Help Activates the function blocks Click on the function block Activate the check box to switch On Off the function block Baseband Impairments Equalizer Output BERT B then the Enter key to switch On Off the function block 1401 3078 62 3 16 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Setting Parameters Selecting a Control Element Setting Parameters Control elements are always selected in the same way no matter whether a function block in the diagram a menu in the menu tree a parameter in the dialog or an entry in a list or table is concerned An element is activated by means of the cursor An active element is highlighted by a blue frame PRBS PRBS 9 E PC keyboard Selects an element Select element by means of the cursor Click on the element keys Switching Parameters On Off Setting Parameters A parameter can be activated and deactivated using a button or a check box The Enter function of the different control media switches the highlighted element
402. tes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation etc The controller is not included The term database denotes a database that manages all the parameters and associated settings required for setting the instrument hardware Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition As this is only ever effected at the end of a command line the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the detection is made that execution is not possible an execution error is signaled to the status reporting system All alterations of the data set are canceled the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting however impermissible instrument states can be set for a short period of time within one command line without this leading to an error message At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must have been reached again 1401 3084 32 5 24 E 3 RES AFQ100A Instrument Model and Command Processing Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state a
403. the signal will have a 5 0 mV offset and the output signal at I BAR will have a 5 0 mV offset Example OUTP ANAL BAL OFFS I 9 9mV sets a DC offset of 9 9 mV between the inverting and the non inverting output in the path Device specific SOURce OUTPut ANALog lt CH gt BALanced OFFSet Q 10 mV 10 mV The command sets an offset between the inverting and the non inverting output Value range 10 mV 10mV The set value is set half in the positive and half in the negative direction A positive offset is set with half of the value in positive direction at the non inverting outputs in negative direction at the inverting outputs respectively For example if a 10 0 mV offset value is set for the Q signal component the signal will have a 5 0 mV offset and the output signal at Q BAR will have a 5 0 mV offset Example OUTP ANAL BAL OFFS Q 9 9mV sets a DC offset of 9 9 mV between the inverting and the non inverting output in the Q path Device specific SOURce OUT Put ANALog lt CH gt TYPE BALanced UNBalanced The command defines the type of the selected analog output If unbalanced is selected the signal is output at the I and Q connectors If balanced is selected the signal is output at the I I BAR Q and Q BAR connectors Example OUTP ANAL TYPE UNB the analog output is set to unbalanced Alias remote control command OUTP TYPE UNB BALanced Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 58
404. the DIAG BGIN CATalog command Each entry for one module consists of four parts which are separated by space characters Module name Module stock number incl variant Module revision Module serial number The path for which the query is performed is determined by the numerical suffix 1401 3084 32 6 74 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section Example DIAG BGIN CAT queries the instrument configuration of path A Response MBRD SATT3C BBINS BBINR BBOUT returns the data of all available modules DIAG BGIN MBRD queries the configuration of the motherboard of path A Response MBRD 1141 3501 02 1 5 3 100023 module motherboard with stock number 1141 3501 01 has revision 1 5 3 and serial number 100023 DIAGnostic FCONtrol AUTO FSPeed The command sets the fan speed of the instrument The full speed mode is provided for service purposes Example DIAG FCON FSP sets full fan speed Device specific DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command queries the number of operation hours Example DIAG INFO OTIM queries the operation hours Response 100023 the instrument was operated for 100023 hours up to now Device specific DIAGnostic INFO POCounter The command queries the number of power on events Example DIAG INFO POC queries the number of power on events Response 123 the instrument was switched on for 123 times up to now Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 75 E 3
405. the LED display indicates the current status of the LAN connection Green Indicates that LAN is active normal operation Green flashing Device identification Red Indicates a LAN fault or no LAN connection The instrument is connected to the ethernet with the aid of a cable attached to the LAN interface at the rear of the instrument 1 3 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation 4 Trigger key along with two status LEDs O ARM TRIGGER See data sheet RUNNING The trigger key covers various features which are selected by pressing the Trigger button in a different manner C Pressing short TRIGGER A manual trigger event or a manual segment trigger event are generated if either the trigger mode or the segment trigger mode manual is selected respectively If both settings are manual then a manual trigger event is generated Pressing long An LXI LAN reset can be generated manually The two status LEDs indicate ARM Indicates that the instrument is waiting for a trigger pulse RUNNING Indicates that a signal output has been triggered 5 USB connectors type A USB 2 0 universal serial bus interfaces of type A See section host USB Connecting a Mouse on page 1 24 and section Connecting an External Keyboard on page 1 23 and chapter 3 section Automatically Launching a Program or a Command File on page 3 6 Connection of peripherals such as mouse and keyboard Connection of memory s
406. the beginning of the printed manual The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting repair and exchange of modules Maintenance The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective covers at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage 1401 3084 32 8 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces Hardware Interfaces The following section describes the remote control interfaces of the signal generator and the pin assignment of the monitor connector All other interfaces are described in chapter 1 sections Legend for Front Panel View and Legend for Rear Panel View For specifications refer to the data sheet IEC IEEE Bus Interface The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connector An IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel An external controller for remote control of the instrument can be connected via the IEEE 488 interf
407. the error messages which may be output by the instrument It is sub divided into 10 chapters The data sheet informs about specifications and character istics of the instrument Chapter 1 Describes the control elements and connec tors on the front and rear panel as well as all procedures required for putting the in strument into operation Chapter 2 Gives an introduction to the operating con cept and typical applications of the R amp S AFQ Chapter 3 Describes key operating modes the struc ture of the graphical interface and the prin ciples of manual control 1401 3084 32 2 E 2 R amp S AFQ100A Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Annex User Documentation Forms a reference for manual control of the R amp S AFQ and contains a detailed descrip tion of all instrument functions and their ap plication The chapter also lists the remote control command corresponding to each in strument function Describes the basics for programming the R amp S AFQ command processing and the status reporting system Lists all the remote control commands de fined for the instrument Describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instruments inter faces Gives the status messages and a list of er ror messages that the R amp S AFQ may gen erate Lists the remote control commands in al phabetical order Contains an index of the operating manual Service Manual Ins
408. the actual file name by a dot see the following table containing a list of the file types The two characters and function as wildcards i e they are used for selecting several files The 2 character represents exactly one character while the character represents all characters up to the end of the file name therefore stands for all the files in a directory When used in conjunction with the commands the parameter file name is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path including the drive only the path and file name or only the file name The file name must include the file extension The same applies for the parameters directory name and path Depending on how much information is provided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the commands MMEM MSIS default drive and MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path and drive setting in the commands Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file they have to be stored in an intermediate memory using common command SAV number The specified number is subsequently used in the MMEM STOR STATe number file command Also subsequently to loading a file with instrument settings with the command MMEM LOAD STAT number lt file gt these settings have to be activated with the common command RCL number 1401 3084 32 6 77 E 3
409. the associated setting function is called by pressing the Enter key Required menus and graphs are displayed on the block diagram which is displayed again in the foreground whenever the Ctrl D key combination is pressed Operation via the graphics interface Menus are assigned to the specific function blocks in the block diagram The function blocks represent elements of signal generation e g the baseband block which contains all dialogs required for baseband signal configuration Function blocks displayed with a blue frame can be directly switched on and off by means of the Ctrl T key combination The dialogs of the highlighted function blocks can be called by pressing the Enter key Trigger Marker Clock At Af The signal flow between the function blocks and the employed inputs and outputs are also shown Marker 1 Unchanged gt 2 Pulse 3 Pattern 4 Ratio jv A menu tree can be opened and closed by the key combination Alt the underscored character of the name in the windows toolbar The menu tree is organized in the same way as the directories in the Windows Explorer The function blocks correspond to the first directory level the menus to subdirectories Edit Help Impairments gt Trigger Equalizer Marker Output id Clock BERT At AF Operation corresponds to the Windows concept 1401 307
410. the left to the right The connectors of the R amp S AFQ are placed on the front and the rear panel and are described in this section and in section Legend for Rear Panel View respectively As the R amp S AFQ is mainly intended to be remote controlled the front panel of the R amp S AFQ contains no display but mostly LEDs to inform the user about the status of the instrument The user interface can be displayed on an external monitor that is either connected directly to the instrument or that belongs to a remote PC station used to manually remote control the instrument 1401 3078 62 1 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Putting into Operation 8 1401 3003K02 LXI Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1 Status LEDs for instrument state ERROR See chapter 6 section System Indicates that an error occurred during operation d Subsystem Only errors are indicated that impair further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The error can be queried with the commands SYSTem ERRor ALL SYSTem ERRor NEXT and SYSTem SERRor REMOTE Indicates that the instrument is in remote control mode If using an external monitor and an external keyboard the external display remains unchanged and shows the current instrument status i e the status which exists under the remote control settings The instrument can be operated e g dialogs can be opened How
411. the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 4 TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS enables the pulsed marker signal TRIG OUTP2 PULS FREQ queries the pulse frequency of the marker signal Response 33000 the resulting pulse frequency is 33 kHz Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 40 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Baseband Block Clock Settings The CLOCk system contains the commands for configuration of the signals at the clock output and input connectors Command Parameters Default unit SOURce CLOCk 1000 Hz 300 MHz In Ir S SOURce CLOCk INPut SLOPe POSitive NEGative E ie SOURce CLOCk SOURce INTernal EXTernal E y SOURce CLOCK 1 kHz 300 MHz The command sets the output clock rate of the ARB By default the clock rate is defined by the clock tag of the waveform Example CLOC 10MHz sets the output clock rate to 10 MHz 0 001 Hz Device specific SOURce CLOCk INPut FREQuency The command queries the frequency of the external clock signal An external clock reference must be supplied at the CLOCK input The command is a query command and therefore does not have an RST value Example CLOC INP FREQ queries the measured frequency of the external clock reference Device specific SOURce CLOCk INPut SLOPe POSitive NEGative Clock source external only The command sets the active slope of an externally applied clock signal at the CLOCK connecto
412. the modulation generator Cutting the connection requires external keyboard mouse and monitor 1 Open the start menu with the Windows key or the Ctr Esc key combination 2 Right click on the VNC icon on the task bar The context menu opens 3 Select Kill all clients Tha connection is cut a message on the external PC informs about the disconnection The VNC icon changes color Cutting the connection on the external Linux Unix PC 1 Either close the internet browser or close the modulation generator window The connection is disabled the VNC icon on the task bar SS off the R amp S AFQ changes color Cutting the connection on the external Windows PC 1 Close the VNC Viewer program The connection is cut the VNC icon on the task bar SS off the R amp S AFQ changes color Disable Manual Remote Control Connection via Ultr VNC The connection can be disabled by removing the program on the R amp S AFQ or by deactivating the VNC Server service in the Control Panel Removing the VNC program 1 Open the start menu with the Windows key or the Ctrl Esc key combination 2 Open the Control Panel menu 3 Select Add or Remove Programs 4 Remove the VNC program The connection is disabled the VNC icon on the task bar SS of the R amp S AFQ disappears Deactivating the VNC Server service 1 Open the start menu with the Windows key or the Ctr Esc key combination 2 Open the
413. the value Asemicolon between the argument entries 1401 3084 32 6 38 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Examples TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 4 TRIG OUTP2 PULS FREQ this selects the pulsed marker signal on output MARKER 2 A pulsed marker signal is generated The pulse frequency 7 symbol rate divider is defined with the second command The latter command queries pulse frequency SOUR TRIG OUTPI LIST 1 100 1 101 0 102 200 1 a marker signal is generated for the output MARKER 1 The signal starts with value 1 from position 1 start index to position 100 end index By the sample position 101 the signal changes to 0 and during the sample range positions 102 to 200 the signal is set to 1 again UNCHanged Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt OFFTime 1 wavelength 1 samples The command sets the number of samples in a period ON time OFF time during which the marker signal in setting TRTGger OUTPut MODE RATio on the marker outputs is off Example TRIG OUTP2 OFFT 20 sets an OFF time of 20 samples for marker signal 2 Device specific SOURce TRIGger OUTPut lt 1 4 gt ONTime 1 wavelength 1 samples The command sets the number of samples in a period ON time OFF time during which the marker signal in setting TRTGger OUTPut MODE RATio on the marker outputs is on Example TRIG OUTP2 0NT 20 sets an ON time of 20 samples
414. threshold for the inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT A threshold can only be set with an external trigger source Remote control command SOUR INP CONT THR Sets the impedance value for the inputs CLOCK IN TRIG and NEXT The lower value 50 Ohm is recommended for high clock frequencies or signals with high slew rates The impedance is set for external trigger signals Remote control command SOUR INP CONT IMP The Waveform Diagram section indicates the graph for the selected waveform type Waveform Diagram Trigger 1401 3084 32 Displays schematically the graph of the currently loaded waveform either as standard sine waveform or as multi segment waveform After the instrument switch on the graph of the last loaded waveform is displayed Note The curves plotted in this dialog box only are textbook examples not measured waveforms They are intended to visualize the trigger settings more clearly Shown for The graph shows the generation of the waveform standard depending on the selected trigger configuration waveforms This section is shown only if a standard waveform is loaded Shown for The graph shows the generation of the waveform segmented depending on the selected trigger and segment waveforms trigger configuration This section is shown only if a multi segment waveform is loaded 4 26 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Baseband Block Marker Dialog In the Marker dialog markers can be defined in addition to marker set
415. tically after a system imposed signal gap The waveform is repeated as often as the number of Repeat Count is set see Repeat Count Trigger on page 4 15 After finishing the last run signal generation stops Remote control command SOUR TRIG SEGM MODE CONT The current segment is output continuously i e cyclically until the next segment trigger event occurs Signal output will switch to the next segment when the current segment is output completely to achieve wrap around seamless signal transition Run Mode Continuous When a segment trigger event occurs the following segment is output after finishing the current one When the run of the last segment is finished signal generation starts immediately at the beginning provided that a segment trigger event has been occured before Otherwise signal output switches to idle mode and starts again with the next trigger or segement trigger event 4 19 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Single Baseband Block Run Mode Single When a segment trigger event occurs the following segment is output after finishing the current one A trigger event during output of the last segment effects that signal generation stops after completing the segment A segment trigger event is without effect The waveform output can be restarted by switching off and then switching on the ARB state in the Baseband Block Run Mode Repeat N Times When a segment trigger
416. tick for file transmission Firmware update Plugging in an USB memory stick The interface establishes a connection to the controller After plugging in an USB memory stick the instrument looks for a command file named Autoexec iec which will be processed immediately 1401 3078 62 1 4 E 3 RES AFQ100A Putting into Operation 6 Digital outputs DIGITAL OUT The instrument has two digital outputs Port 1 and 2 See chapter 8 featuring LVDS transmission Maintenance and Port 1 Remote Control This socket provides a multiplexed output to connect Interfaces other R amp S instruments e g the R amp S SMU Vector Signal Generator Note Electromagnetic interference may disturb the digital data stream Take precaution by complying with the EMC safety precautions recommended by R amp S see EMC Safety Precautions on page 1 13 Port 2 The parallel output provides a 16 bit wide data bus for both and Q channels via a 68 pole SCSI socket to connect test boards equipped with DACs Note Test applications in labs usually are open circuits On this account there is no need to shield port 2 against EMI Electromagnetic Interference Notes on connecting an output device on Port 1 and Port 2 1 the LVDS output is held higher than 0 6 V The output common mode voltage is not properly established if the LVDS output is held higher than 0 6V when the R amp S AFQ is switched on As consequence the output will not wo
417. tings that may be defined already in the waveform file The marker dialog is accessed via the Baseband block In section Reconfigure up to four markers signals can be set in addition to marker settings already defined in the waveform file Channel 2 Pattern Di Channel 3 Ratio h On T Samples d y uer In section Delay the delay values for the marker w F N output signals are entered Enters the delay between Da the marker signal at the marker outputs and the start cl ETA In the Delay section a marker signal delay can be defined either without restriction or restricted to the dynamic section This means the section in which it is possible to make settings without restarting signal and marker output Note Fix Delay To Current Range J On The curves plotted in this dialog box only are textbook examples not measured waveforms They are intended to visualize the trigger settings more clearly Channel 1 4 Marker Selects the type of a marker signal on the appropriate marker output Note The marker trace in the waveform file remains unchanged in every case It is not overwritten even in the case of a selection other than Unchanged Unchanged The marker signal is generated as defined in the waveform file It remains unchanged Remote control command SOUR TRIG OUTP1 MODE UNCH Restart A brief marker pulse is released at the start of the waveform or a segment Remote control command SOUR TR
418. to al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pafio suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 08 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manej
419. to be tested before a faulty bit occurs Because of the large number of bits involved the measurement time is usually very long Since 32 bit wide counters are used for the total number of bits and the number of error bits the maximum measurement time is 4 29 x 10 2 bits To keep the measurement times short for both small and large bit error rates the instrument provides a number of ways to end the measurement In addition to manually interrupting the count two termination criteria can be selected 1 reaching a user defined number of checked data bits 2 a maximum number of detected errors The measurement stops as soon as one of the two criteria has been met The display shows which of the two criteria caused the measurement to stop Note The BERT measurement measures statistical bit errors i e errors which do not occur at regular intervals but at random Although a single measurement determines the exact number of errors in the measured interval a statistically reliable BER can only be obtained when a sufficient number of errors occur in the observed interval This is the only way to ensure that the single BERT measurement result approaches the true error rate with high probability Bit error rates of approximately 50 96 indicate a faulty measurement since a bit error rate of 1 2 indicates a complete loss of user data 1401 3084 32 4 67 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Interrupt free measurement In the
420. to the files occurs in the individual dialogs where only the relevant type of file is available 1 Settings of the instrument can be loaded and saved in the File menu see section Select Save Instrument Settings File Management on page 3 26 2 Lists e g user correction lists can be loaded in the Select List window Lists can be generated either externally or internally For internal generation a new list must be created in the window New List which will then be edited in the list editor see section Editors on page 3 21 3 Complex modulation and control data can be loaded in the Select List window It can be generated either externally or internally For internal generation a new list must be created in the New List window which will then be edited in the data and control list editor 4 Waveforms are generated externally e g by means of the R amp S WinIQSIM program that is supplied together with the instrument and can be loaded in the Arbitrary Waveform Generation ARB menu by clicking on the Load Waveform button Each of the windows Select List and Load Waveform contain buttons softkeys for the Select and File Manager functions Internally generated lists can be stored by clicking on the Save button in the New List window Clicking on the File Manager button opens the File Manager window for managing all files see section File Manager on page 3 30 1401 3078 62 3 25 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A File Management Sele
421. ton L Local Area Connection Properties we General Advanced Connect using BB Intel R PRO 100 Network Connectio This connection uses the following items 37 NWLink NetBIOS EN AF NwLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compatible Transport Prot wi 37 Internet Protocol TCP IP LA EI Sa m a Install Uninstall ropertie Description Enables this computer to log on to NetWare servers and access their resources C Show icon in notification area when connected 6 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties menu enter the IP address in the Use the following IP address field the complete data can be queried from the network administrator Terminate the entry in all menus with OK Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol is the default setting General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 188 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DN t dr utoma 1 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Internet Protocol TCPAP Properties we 1401 3078 62 1
422. tput beyond the normal trigger resolution of 3 3 ns can be reached by connecting and configuring the instruments as described below A delay between trigger and signal output of only approx 30 ps can be reached Note The very precise synchronization of several connected R amp S AFQ LO Modulation Generators requires the Baseboard Revision 8 or higher Up to baseboard Revision 5 only synchronization mode Normal is provided stand alone mode A simultaneous signal output of several R amp S AFQs is only available for analog signal output One instrument is used as the master to control the other slave instrument s The figure below illustrates the correct cabling of the instruments The following has to be observed The instruments have to be wired as a daisy chain BNC T adapters are used to this end A bus terminator is needed on the last instrument in the chain This instrument must be setup as Last slave The required terminator resistance is automatically applied to the inputs TRIG IN and REF IN Reference Clock 10 MHz Sync Mode Last Slave M The output REF OUT of the Master AFQ has to be connected to the signal inputs REF IN of all Slave AFQs The output MARKER 1 of the Master AFQ has to be connected to the signal inputs TRIG of all Slave AFQs The connecting cables from the master instrument to the slave instrument must be of same length and type concerning both the REF OUT to REF IN connection and the MARKER1 to TRIG
423. triggers the output signal for digital output on PORT 2 see section Digital Output on page 4 67 4 Clock amp Clock Memory Clock Memory Clock Source Internal External Frequency 100 000 000 000 MHz Recommended Range 1kHz 300MHz Reference Clock 10 MHz Frequency 100 000 000 000 MHz D Sync Mode Normal D Input Slope Positive D Source Internal Measured External Clock 0 000 Hz Delavin 0 000 Input Line Setup CLKIN TRIG NEXT Threshold 1 000 000 V D Impedance 1k0 Reference Clock 10 MHz Sync Mode Normal Source Internal D Delay ns 0 000 1401 3084 32 4 31 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Source Memory Clock Recommended Range Memory Clock Frequency Memory Clock Input Slope Memory Clock 1401 3084 32 Baseband Block Selects the clock source for loading the waveform file Internal The internal clock reference is used to generate the sample clock Remote control command SOUR CLOC SOUR INT External The external clock reference is fed in as the sample clock via the CLOCK IN connector Remote control command SOUR CLOC SOUR EXT Clock source external only Indicates the recommended range of the memory clock frequency The recommended frequency range is indicated only if an external clock source is used Remote control command n a Sets the output clock frequency of the ARB or the frequency of the internal or external clock respect
424. trument The service manual instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all in formation required for the maintenance of R amp S AFQ by ex changing modules In addition it describes how to perform a firmware update and how to install options Internet Site internet site The Rohde amp Schwarz internet site http www rohde schwarz com product afq100A html provides the most up to date information on the R amp S AFQ Additonally firmware updates includ ing the associated release notes instrument drivers current data sheets and application notes are provided for download on the The current operating manual at a time is available as printable PDF file in the download area 1401 3084 32 RES AFQ100A Contents Putting into Operation Contents Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation cocccccccccccccccnnnnnncnnnonnnnenennnnnnnnnnnenenonos 1 1 Introduction Putting into Operaton nono m 1 1 Legend for Front Panel View 1 1 Legend for Rear Panel View ooooonccccconcccccconcccccnnnancccnnno nc nnnnn eene enne 1 7 Putting into Operation osson aa a tha riera 1 12 Unpacking the Instrument enm 1 12 Installing the Instrument in a 19 Rack 1 12 Safety Instructions oec ee bte prio ihe ena rid 1 13 Connecting the R amp S AFQ to the AC Supply siseses 1 16 Power F USOS uito tie ig deo e
425. ts Block This subsystem contains the commands for the digital UO impairments Gain and offset cannot be set independently Command Parameters Default unit SOURce IMPairment GAIN 2dB 0 dB dB SOURce IMPairment GAIN Q 2dB 0 dB dB 0 1 FS 0 1 FS digital 0 1 FS 0 1 FS digital BEER aoo m FiSOURCe TMPaimentsTaTe Laut SOURce IMPairment GAIN I 2 dB 0 dB The command sets a gain in the path from 2 dB to O dB Example IMP GAIN I 1 99 sets the gain to 1 99 dB SCPI Device specific SOURce IMPairment GAIN Q 2 dB 0 dB The command sets a gain in the Q path from 2 dB to 0 dB Example IMP GAIN Q 1 99 sets the gain to 1 99 dB SCPI Device specific SOURce IMPairment OFFSet l The command sets a DC offset in the path from 0 1 FS to 0 1 FS 10 10 of the digital signal The accessible data range depends on the settings of the Gain in the path After entering the gain the instrument calculates the accessible data range of the offset in order not to output an amplitude exceeding 1 0 full scale Example IMP OFFS I 0 10FS sets a negative DC offset to 10 FS SCPI Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 46 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation SOURce IMPairment OFFSet Q The command sets a DC offset in the Q path from 0 1 FS to 0 1 FS 10 1096 of the digital signal The accessible data range depen
426. turn Value En Acquire a lock on the resource Execute VXI 11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the IEC IEEE bus amp ABO Abort Aborts the processing of the commands just received Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys POL Serial Poll POL Serial Poll Poll Starts a serial pol a serial Starts a serial pol amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys Table 8 4 VXI 11 Interface Messages 1401 3084 32 8 8 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Hardware Interfaces USB Connection USB and USB IN The instrument is equipped as standard with five USB universal serial bus connectors USB Four of them are type A interfaces host USB wh
427. umber of data bits checked Remote control command BERT RES Response the 1st value indicates the number of data bits checked hood 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 1401 3084 32 4 71 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Errors Terminated By State 1401 3084 32 Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block Displays the current number of occurred errors Remote control command BERT RES Response the 2nd value indicates the number of occurred errors 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 Displays the termination criterion for the measurement These criteria can be entered to keep the duration of the measurement short for low as well as high bit error rates The last measurement result is displayed after the measurement has been terminated Remote control command BERT RES Response the 4th value indicates whether the measurement has been terminated 1 terminated 1000 5 5E 4 1 1 1 1 The measurement was manually terminated by the user switching the state to off User Remote control command BERT STAT OFF BERT STOP Number of Data The measurement was terminated because the Bits specified number of data bits was reached Number of The measurement was terminated because the Errors specified number of errors was reached Displays the status of the measurement This enables the user to check whether the measurement functions The status of the data and clock lines and of the synch
428. umeric data not allowed 22091 9 6 Out of memory 225 ET 9 6 Parameter not allowed 2108 9 6 Program mnemonic too long 312 9 7 1401 3084 32 1 9 1 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A 1401 3084 32 Contents Error Messages Queue overflow C30 rnei ierre a a kea E Ear aE ette ine 9 7 Query interrupted 410 sse enn 9 7 Query unterminated A20 emen 9 7 Query deadlocked 430 sse 9 7 Self test failed C3201 taa aieeaa Ee adaa 9 8 Settings conflict El isos 9 8 String data not allowed 7188 9 8 Suffix not allowed 7381 9 8 Suffix too long 194 nene et e et dens 9 8 Syntax error 102 WEE 9 9 System error 2310 iiie eic etude dd re den dae dis 9 9 Too many digits 124 9 9 Too much data Leger ENEE adds 9 9 Undefined header 113 eese 9 9 1 9 2 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Introduction Status Information and Messages 9 Error Messages Introduction Status Information and Messages This chapter describes the error messages of the instrument The error messages are output in the Info line on the screen and entered in the error error event queue of the status reporting system A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen Some error messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured In the remote co
429. unction eg a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input Transition to the Local state manual control Configures instrument for parallel poll Additionally the VISUAL BASIC command executes PPE PPD E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Remote Control Hardware Interfaces LAN Connector The unit is equipped with an LAN interface as standard The LAN connector is at the rear of the instrument Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator files can be transmitted via the network and network resources e g a network folders can be used The instrument can also be remote controlled and manually operated in the network It is connected by means of a commercial RJ45 cable The network card functions with 10 100 1000Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Connection of the R amp S AFQ is described in chapter 1 section Connecting the R amp S AFQ to a Network LAN remote control via Ethernet in section Remote Control via LAN Interface on page 5 7 The architecture of a LAN remote control connection is described in detail in the following Remote control of an instrument via a network is based o
430. used by disregarding the following precautions Any non compliance with the following precautions may cause damage to the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation check the following 4 4 4 The covers of the housing are in place and screwed on Vents are not obstructed Make sure that the air can escape freely through the vents at the rear and at the sides The minimum distance to the wall should therefore be at least 10 cm The signal levels at the inputs do not exceed permissible limits The outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or incorrectly connected This particularly applies to the maximum permissible back feed at the outputs which is specified in the data sheet The instrument should only be operated in horizontal position on an even surface The ambient temperature must not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Also observe the instructions in the following sections and the general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual Protection against Electrostatic Discharge To avoid damaging the electronic components of the EUT Equipment Under Test due to electrostatic discharge produced by contact the use of appropriate protective measures is recommended EMC Safety Precautions To avoid EMI Electro Magnetic Interference double shielded signal and control cables must be used at all signal connectors Unless other stated outputs and lines have to be terminated properly w
431. ust now be packed into a WAVEFORM tag with the following structure WAVEFORM Length 4IQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQI IQ The WAVEFORM tag consists of the following characters and data Opens each tag WAVEFORM Name of the tag for waveform Separates the name from the length indication Length Length of the data set Length indicates the number of bytes of the data set and consists of length of 1 byte number of UO pairs 4 2 bytes per and per Q value In our example containing a sine and a cosine with 20 pairs for each wave the resulting length is 81 Separates the name and length from the remainder of the data set The blanku can be omitted Indicates the beginning of the binary data IQIQIQ Binary data set The binary data contain the and Q values in alternate order the first value is an value Each value consists of 2 Bytes starting with the least significant bit Terminates each tag The editor mentioned above which can handle binary data is now used to place the string WAVEFORM 81 in front and at the end of the data set 6 24 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation The contents of the waveform file SICO WV for 20 I Q pairs is now ready for operation and reads TYPE SMU WV 0 CLOCK 10e6 20 1 Q pairs 80 bytes WAVEFORM 81 4 0 7 0 1 0 10 LQ 81bytes 4 The tags TYPE CLOCK and WAVEFORM are mandatory for each waveform All ot
432. values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example SOURce TRIGger OUTPut3 DELay MAXimum Answer 4000 3 Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example OUTPut STATe Answer for ON 1 4 Text character data is returned in a short form Example SOURce OUTPut ANALog TYPE Answer for BALanced BAL Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numerical values Numerical values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the values must be in the value range 9 9E37 to 9 9E37 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed Units In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SOURCe CLOCk 15 kHz SOURce CLOCk 15000
433. ve been executed Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Command Error This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument Table 5 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register 1401 3084 32 5 28 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Status Reporting System Application of the Status Reporting System In order to effectively use the status reporting system the information contained there must be
434. voltage the test points available in the instrument The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example DIAG AOUT POIN CAT queries the analog output test points available in the instrument Response GND VREF 2 DIAG 3V3 DIAG 5V DIAG 12V Device specific DIAGnostic AOUTput lt CH gt POINt The command triggers voltage measurement at the specified test point of the analog output module and returns the measured voltage A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument on CD ROM A list of the available test points can be queried using the DIAG AOUT POIN CAT command The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example DIAG AOUT POIN GND queries the voltage V of the test point GND Response 0 000000 Device specific DIAGnostic BGINfo lt module name gt The command checks the modules available in the instrument using the variant and revision state If the command is sent without parameters being specified a complete list of all modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration If the command is sent with parameters a list of the specified modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas A list of modules names can be called up using
435. with the file extension wv will be created or loaded This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example WAV SEL D NuserNsinus25kMHz wv selects waveform file sinus25kHz wv from the d user directory and loads it Device specific SOURce WAVeform TAG tag name gt The command queries the content of the specified tag of the selected Waveform file see following section Baseband Block ARB Waveform and List Format The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example WAV TAG comment queries the content of the comment tag Response Sine wave for test purposes Device specific 1401 3084 32 6 17 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commands Signal Generation Baseband Block ARB Waveform and List Format ARB Waveform and List Format Introduction The instrument loads waveform files and multi segment waveforms generated by R amp S WinlQSIM Matlab R amp S vector signal generators such as SMU The instrument uses a tag oriented format for externally or internally generated waveforms The data can be transmitted via the IEC bus from an external computer to the instrument and vice versa For these purposes the file is transmitted as a binary data block using GPIB command SOUR WAV DATA Note A waveform version number is not necessary due to the flexible tag based form Tags are self contained information units Their general format is
436. wwEwoycomy EC Lienen wwEMoyDAT E Jens Dwwwoypowgi Jl ss DEC Il TT DET TO A TT CEC E A TT DE TN TT wwwoywove fle names pame JL Lienen CEI CI A TT DE E A IN WwEMoySTOReSTATe number e name wowen 1401 3084 32 6 78 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section MMEMory CATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories and files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out on the default drive selected with the MMEM MSIS command The response has the following format used bytes in this directory free bytes on this disk lt file name gt lt file type gt lt filesize in bytes gt lt file name gt lt file type gt lt filesize in bytes gt The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Parameters lt file_name gt File or directory name lt file_type gt File type There are the following file types DIR directory ASCii ASCII file BINary Binary file and STATe file with instrument settings lt filesize_in_bytes gt File size The size 0 is returned for a directory Example MMEM CAT Server DATA LOG reads back all files in Server DATA with the extension LOG MMEM CAT d user reads out all files at the highest directory level of the memory stick Response 127145265 175325184 test DI
437. xtension are indicated in the file list window below Remote control command Selects the drive and the directory where the file to be deleted moved or copied is located The currently selected path is displayed above the directory window Remote control command MMEM CDIR D user Lists all files in the selected directory The file to be copied moved or deleted can be highlighted Remote control command MMEM CAT 4 110 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete Create New Directory 1401 3084 32 Storing and Loading Instrument Data Cuts the selected file It can be pasted into a different directory using the Paste button Remote control command MMEM DEL E Ntest savrcl Copies the selected file It can be pasted into a different or the same directory using the Paste button Remote control command MMEM COPY D user setl wv D user set2 wv Pastes the file that has been copied or cut before When pasting the file into the same directory file name copy of filename is given automatically When pasting the file into a different directory the original filename is kept If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file Remote control command MMEM COPY D user setl wv D user set2 wv Renames moves the selected file or directory The new name can be entere
438. xternal monitor is connected to the instrument the installed BIOS version and the processor characteristics are indicated for a few seconds in the start display after instrument switch on During booting the status LEDs in the AFQ s front panel start to flash counterclockwise Immediately disable firewall for Remote Desktop By default the firewall is on and remote desktop is disabled Some actions require a different firewall configuration e g connecting to the instrument via remote desktop The firewall settings can be modified by pushing the trigger button during startup i e while the LEDs are flashing When the user connects to the instrument via remote desktop he is asked if he wants either permanently disable the firewall and enable the remote desktop or for the current session only NOTICE Risk of changing the firewall settings Disabling the firewall or allowing exceptions may make the instrument more vulnerable to viruses and intruders It is recommended to restore the default firewall configuration after completing a task which requires modified settings After booting is completed the front panel LED READY indicates that the instrument is ready to be operated The settings that were active before the last switch off are established With an external monitor the block diagram of the modulation generator is displayed Note If the software stops unexpectedly the instrument can be rebooted by pressing the STANDBY key for a
439. y SCPI see chapter 9 Error Messages If the error queue is empty 0 is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant 1401 3084 32 6 92 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A AFQ Commande Setup Section SYSTem ERRor COUNt The command queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty O is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 1 one error has occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see chapter 9 Error Messages If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is identical to the command STATus QUEue NEXT The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out SCPI Compliant SYSTem FPReset The command triggers an instrum
440. y a keystroke operation is easy For instance the Esc key closes the active dialog 1401 3078 62 3 4 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Operating Concept Help functions support the user Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration The valid setting range can be displayed for each numeric parameter This requires a short wait after activation of the entry field The range is then displayed automatically after a few seconds in a yellow flyout window If the entered value is outside the permissible range the next permissible value is automatically set and a message is output see below Amplitude 100000 IN Offset Q Offset Context sensitive online help for each parameter can be called with the F1 key Each help page is part of a comprehensive online help function which can be called by means of an index a content tree or the Previous Next buttons Error messages display list SAW Instrument Functions 2 Overview of Instrument Functions Arbitrary Waveform Generator ARB Baseband Block So Impairments Block e Equalizer Block E Q amp Output Block Bit Error Rate Measurements BERT Block E Q amp General Instrument Settings gt Help System e Storing and Loading Instrument Data Remote Control Commands Error queue query Errors BERT Exclude Frequency Exclude Level Execute Trigger ARB Expiration date of option Extended Trigger Mode ARB
441. y correction is performed for a bandwidth of 200 MHz centred on the RF carrier Relative Frequency values given in the table are interpreted as relative to the carrier frequency Negative frequency values are possible Remote control command SOUR EQU MOD FEM REL Absolute Frequency values given in the table are interpreted as absolute values The carrier frequency must be entered in the RF frequency field The allowed range is 200 MHz centred on the RF carrier Remote control command SOUR EQU MOD FEM ABS RF Frequency Frequency entry mode absolute only Enters the RF carrier frequency Remote control command SOUR EQU MOD RFFR 1 4 GHZ Editing Modulator Data amp ij Edit Equalizer Modulator Data equ mod _test EI a I3 Frequency f Gain Phases Hz dB deg 10 000 00 Insert Fill Goto Row s Save As Save 1401 3084 32 4 48 E 3 R amp S AFQ100A Goto 1401 3084 32 Equalizer Block Selects the row of the table to be edited Goto last Goto row Goto first Goto last Goto row Selects the first row of the table Remote control command n a Selects the last row of the table Remote control command n a Opens an input box for entering the number of the row to be edited e g Remote control command n a 4 49 E 3 RES AFQ100A Insert Fill Rows 1401 3084 32 Equalizer Block Opens the dia

R&S®AFQ100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;AFQ100A User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®AFQ100A User Manual